CR QS 3.5 - Service Manual For Download 2009-11-16

HEALTHCARE ReadMeFirst
Imaging Services Service Manual for Download
► Purpose of this Document

This document describes how to
• add the “order list for documentation”.
• print.
• add comments.
► Document History
Edition. Release Changes

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.1
1.2 06-2008 Added how to integrate the order list for documentation in a
printed manual. See section 1.
Edition 1, Revision 2
06-2008 printed in Germany
Document Node ID: 16099429
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
ReadMeFirst
1 Integrating the Order List for Documentation
IMPORTANT:
The “order list for documentation” is not part of the service manual for download.
Purpose of the “order list for documentation”:
To verify the latest level and completeness of your Service Manual.
(1) In the MEDNET GSO library select the product of your interest.
(2) Select “Order list and Front page → PRODUCT - Chapter 00 - Order List for
Documentation”.
(3) Download the “order list for documentation” to your computer.
(4) When creating a paper manual:
Print the order list and put it behind the cover sheet.
2 Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual
IMPORTANT:
Preferably print this manual double-sided:
This PDF manual contains empty pages at the end of several chapters, to have the
next chapter starting with an uneven page number when printed doubles-sided.
If printed one-sided, dispose these empty pages.
Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3 or ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if

available.
Some pages – especially circuit diagrams for equipment – have been created on paper
size larger than DIN A4/Letter. Printing these pages on DIN A4/Letter may result in
reduced legibility. It is recommended to print these pages separately on a DIN A3 or
ANSI B (Ledger) printer.
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 2 of 5

06-2008 Agfa Company Confidential
ReadMeFirst
2.1 Printing single Pages or Chapters
To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows:

(1) Click the bookmark of the desired chapter.
(2) Write down or remember the shown PDF page number. See Figure 1.
Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar
(3) Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.

(4) Select "Print".
(5) Select the page range.
(6) Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".
(7) Select “OK”.
Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters


ReadMeFirst
NOTE:
“Shrink to printable area” may be named on other Adobe Reader versions
“reduce to printer margins” or “shrink oversized pages to paper size”.
2.2 Printing the complete Service Manual
To print the complete service manual proceed as follows:

(1) Select "Print".
(2) Select “All”.
(3) Select "shrink to printable area" and "Auto-rotate and Center"
(see NOTE above).
(4) Select “OK”.
Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual
3 Adding Comments
• If you open this file in an Adobe Reader version ≥ 7, the comment toolbar will
show-up.
• This allows adding comments, to highlight or underline text and many more text
manipulations.
Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar


ReadMeFirst
3.1 Exporting your Comments
NOTE:
Exporting your comments allows importing them again in a next version of the manual.
(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".
Figure 5: Drop down menu “Comment & Markup”
(2) Select the desired comments: Press the CTRL-key for multiple selections.
(3) Select “Options - Export Selected Comments”.
(4) Save the file with any name.
3.2 Importing Comments
(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".
(2) Select “Options - Import Comments”.
(3) Browse for the comments file and press “select”.
NOTE:
The imported comments possibly appear on different pages, if the file where the
comments have been imported has a different number of pages.


HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services Service Manual
Document No.: DD+DIS302.05E
CR Quality System 3.5

Type 4406 / 421
2nd edition*
* For the revision status per chapter please refer to the latest version of the order list in the GSO library.
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.
Document Node ID: 9504388

01-2008 printed in Germany 00-folder-cover_e_template_v05
DD+DIS302.05E Service Manual
Agfa HealthCare N.V.

Tegernseer Landstraße 161
D - 81539 München
Germany
Copyright © 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V.

All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.
WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.
INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.
NOTE:
Release Date, Edition and Revision are displayed in the footer of each own
new released document.
So please refer to the GSO Library doc type ‘Order list and Front page’ to verify
the volume and revision status of a Service Manual.

Edition 2 CR Quality System 3.5

01-2008 4406 / 421 Agfa Company Confidential
OVERVIEW
0. Order List
1. Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedure
2. Functional Description
3. Repair and Service

3.1 Machine specific safety and repair information
3.2 Machine specific tools, software tools and auxiliary equipment
3.3 Troubleshooting
3.4 Acceptance Test
3.5 Not Applicable
3.6 Adjustments and Calibrations
3.7 Software Menus, Settings
3.8 Software-Releases and Patches
3.9 Frequently Asked Questions
4. Not Applicable
5. Spare Parts List
6. Accessories
7. Field Modifications
8. Manufacturing Standard Modifications
9. Maintenance
10. Service Bulletins
11. Installation Planning

1 2 3
12. Glossary and Key Word Index


EXPLANATION OF NOTES:
This documentation uses:

Safety relevant notes
Icon Signal Word Situation
CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the

equipment described in the manual and/or damage to any other
equipment or goods and/or environmental pollution can be the
consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a user, engineer,
patient or any other person and possible mistreatment of patients can
be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or serious injuries can be the
consequence.
Not-safety relevant notes

Icon Name Type of Information
INSTRUCTION: Indicates an instruction where it is important to follow literally the
described actions.
IMPORTANT: Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
prevent malfunction.
NOTE: • Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action without

having a direct influence on the step or action.
• Highlights unusual points
• Indicates background information
• Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the graphical user
interface.
CONVENTIONS:
Actions Way of writing Sample

Action, Switch the machine on Switch the machine on
explanation
Action with the mouse or the <omni-cd.exe> Double-click the
"Return" key <omni-cd.exe> icon
Required text input via the vips Enter vips and click on
keyboard <Continue>


DD+DIS302.05E General Information
CR QS 3.5 – Service Documentation, 2nd Edition

(DD+DIS302.05E)
Information for the Field Service Engineer
The following issues have been added / changed compared to the 1st edition
of this manual:
Chapter 1: • Upgrade installation instructions have been moved to chapter 7

“Upgrade installation instructions to CR QS 3.5.398 (Service Pack 1)”.
Chapter 2: • Functional Description of the Learning Mode for automatic study selection
using RIS has been added (see section 6.5.2).
Chapter 3.2: • Troubleshooting for usage of a Restore CD has been added.

• Information on PCAnywhere has been updated.
With the new Operating System CD version 3.0.108 PC Anywhere is
automatically installed on the system.
• Installation instructions and warranty issues for Powerware UPS have been
updated.
• A list of supported storage providers, DICOM MWL connections and
printers has been added to the chapter.
Chapter 3.3: • The whole chapter has been updated according to the changes introduced
with CR QS 3.5.398 (CR QS 3.5 Service Pack 1).
Chapter 3.6: • Information of how to use Barco NioWatch calibration tool in combination
with nVidia video card has been added.
• A list of hardware for server and client systems which support LUT access
has been added.
Chapter 3.7: • Section “Change Body Parts containing non-DICOM conform characters”
has been added (see section 5.1.1).
• Section “Use automatic Study Selection” has been updated.
• Structure of the chapter has been adapted to the structure of the
Configuration Viewer.

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR Quality System 3.5 Chapter 0 /1
2006-07-04 (Type 4406/421) Agfa Company Confidential
General Information DD+DIS302.05E
Chapter 3.8: • The release info for CR QS 3.5.372 SU1 and CR QS 3.5.398
have been added to the chapter.
Chapter 7: • “Upgrade installation instructions to CR QS 3.5.398 (Service Pack 1) have

been added.
Chapter 8: • Overview of technical standard modifications since first release of

CR QS 3.5 has been added.
Chapter 9: • Cleaning of interior fans in a CR QS 3.5 system has been removed as the
risk of damaging parts during the cleaning process is too high.
Chapter 11: • Values for Mean Time to Maintain (MTTM) and Mean Time between
Maintenance (MTBM) have been added to the chapter.
• Installation Planning Checklist has been updated.
Printed copies of this document are not controlled.

The reader should always refer to MedNet to ensure that they are working with the latest copy of this document.
Chapter 0 / 2 CR QS 3.5 Edition 2, Revision 0
Agfa Company Confidential (Type 4406/421) 2006-07-04
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services Generic Safety Directions
Document No: DD+DIS238.06E
Generic Safety Directions

for HealthCare Imaging Products
► Purpose of this Document
This Generic Safety Directions document comprises the general safety relevant information including
relevant environmental and occupational safety instructions for the Service Engineer.
It is valid for all Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products and part of each Service Documentation as well as
Installation Planning document.
The latest version is available via MedNet, GSO Library path:
General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications => Service Manual

Revision Date compared to previous Revision 1.2:
1.3 07-2009 • Updated table with laser classification to latest changes of the
corresponding standard. See section 3.3.
• Added section Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions.
See section 9.
• Added safety note concerning inroom installations of CR equipment
and corresponding X-ray shielding. See section 17.
• Added laser safety note and safety note concerning electrical checks
after repairs. See section 19.
• Added treatment for Lithium batteries in sections 19 and 21.
• Updated information concerning the recycling pass. See section 24.
► Referenced Documents
Document Title
Not applicable Not applicable

07-2009 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 11849633
eq_generic_safety_directions_e_template_v01
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions
► Manufacturer
Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the
equipment.
the product.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 2 of 28
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 DISCLAIMER......................................................................................................... 5
2 USED ICONS ........................................................................................................ 6
3 LABELS ................................................................................................................. 7
3.1 CE Mark................................................................................................... 7
3.2 System Labels ......................................................................................... 7
3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation ............................................ 8
4 PRODUCT COMPLAINTS .................................................................................. 10
5 REFERENCES .................................................................................................... 10
6 INTENDED USE.................................................................................................. 11
7 INTENDED USER ............................................................................................... 11
8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS.......................... 11
9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............. 12
10 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 13
11 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................ 14
12 COMPLIANCE..................................................................................................... 14
13 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION......................................................... 17
14 RADIATION PROTECTION ................................................................................ 18
15 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION......................... 18
16 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ....................... 19
17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES ............ 20
18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES................................ 22
19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES ........ 23
20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................... 26

21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

PARTS, ACCESSORIES AND DEVICES............................................................27
22 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS.................................27
23 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS .................27
24 RECYCLING ........................................................................................................27
25 WASTE DISPOSAL .............................................................................................28
26 ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI) ...................................28

1 Disclaimer
The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified

personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates or who are
otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide such services.
Fitters, engineers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise directly
affiliated with or authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates are directed to
contact one of the local offices of Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates before attempting
installation or service procedures.
No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted in any form
or by any means without the written permission of Agfa HealthCare.
Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with

respect to the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the information contained in this
document and specifically disclaims warranties of suitability for any particular purpose.
Agfa HealthCare shall under no circumstances be liable for any damage arising from the
use or inability to use any information, apparatus, method or process disclosed in this
document.
Agfa HealthCare is not liable for resulting consequences, damages or injuries if you don’t
operate the product correctly or if you don’t have it serviced correctly.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to change the product, the characteristics and its
documentation without further notice to improve reliability, function or design.
NOTE:
In the United States, Federal Law stipulates that medical devices should only be sold to,
distributed and used by or by order of a licensed physician.

2 Used Icons
Icon Name and Circumstances

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or
damage to the equipment described in the manual and/or
damage to any other equipment or goods and/or environmental
pollution can be the consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a
user, engineer, patient or any other person and possible
mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or heavy injuries
can be the consequence.
INSTRUCTION:
If used in combination with the warning or caution sign: Indicates
a specific instruction, which if followed exactly, avoids the
subject of the warning or caution.
If used without warning or caution sign: Indicates an instruction
where it is important to follow literally as described.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
prevent malfunction.
NOTE:
Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action.
Highlights unusual points.
Indicates background information.
Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the
graphical user interface.
Is additional information without influence on the action or step!

3 Labels
3.1 CE Mark
CE Mark This product carries the CE Mark. The CE Declaration (CE Conformity)
becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the
manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
3.2 System Labels
All system labels and software version number locations are referred to within this service
document in the appropriate section.
Enclosed an overview of common labels, according to ISO 3864.
This list is not complete.
Hot Surface Laser Beam Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation
Obstacles Corrosive Liquid High Voltage Hand Injuries

C&W_005.cdr

3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation
According to its classification, laser radiation can lead to eye and skin injuries.
Each laser source is classified from class 1 to class 4, based on standard
DIN EN 60825-1:2007.
The table below lists the meaning of the different laser classes. Note the detailed
instructions in the user manual and technical documentation.
Class # Meaning Example Label
Class 1: Not dangerous to the human eye, even

when using optical instruments. Can
nevertheless produce irritating effects, CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
especially with low ambient light
conditions.
Class 1 M: Not dangerous to the human eye if no

optical instruments (magnifying glass or LASER RADIATION
binocular) are used. DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
Can nevertheless produce irritating OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT
conditions.
Class 2: Dangerous to the human eye for

intentional staring into the beam.
Not dangerous for short term exposure
< 0,25 seconds.
Using optical instruments does not
increase the risk of eye injury. LASER RADIATION
Can even for short term exposure < 0,25
seconds produce dazzling and irritating DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT

conditions.

Class # Meaning Example Label
Class 2M: Dangerous to the human eye when

staring into the beam or when using
optical instruments (magnifying glass or
telescope). No hazard for short term
exposure < 0,25 seconds (aversion
response of the eye) without use of LASER RADIATION
optical instruments. Can produce DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM
dazzling and irritating effects even for OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
short term exposure < 0,25 seconds, CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
especially at low ambient light conditions.
Class 3R: Possibly dangerous to the human eye for

direct view into the beam.
Risks of an eye injury is increasing with
duration of exposure.
Can produce dazzling and irritating
effects, especially with low ambient light LASER RADIATION
conditions.
AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE
CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCT
Class 3B: Normally dangerous to the human eye

for direct view into the beam.
Viewing diffuse reflections is normally not
dangerous.
Risk of small skin injuries or ignition of
explosive material if the power of the LASER RADIATION
laser beam is close to the upper limits of
class 3 B. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM
CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT
Class 4: Dangerous to the human eye for direct

view into the beam or viewing diffuse
reflections.
Very often class 4 lasers also implicate a
fire hazard.
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EYE OR SKIN EXPOSURE
TO DIRECT OR SCATTERED
RADIATION
CLASS 4 LASER PRODUCT

4 Product Complaints
Any service person who has any complaints or has experienced any dissatisfaction in the
quality, durability, reliability, safety, effectiveness or performance of this product must
notify Agfa HealthCare by the Agfa HealthCare complaint procedure.
If the product malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious injury of a
patient or an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an accident
Agfa HealthCare must be notified immediately by telephone, fax or written
correspondence to the following address:
Agfa Service Support - local support addresses and phone numbers listed on:
www.agfa.com
Agfa – Gevaert N.V.

Septestraat 27
2640 Mortsel, Belgium.
Fax +32 3 444 4485
5 References
Technical Documentation is available via MedNet (PDF) and your local Agfa HealthCare
support organisation (Paper).
Access to MedNet:
IntraNet: http://docs.agfanet/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf
ExtraNet: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf

6 Intended Use
This Agfa HealthCare product should only be operated in a hospital or clinical radiological
environment by qualified staff.
It must only be operated according to its specifications and its intended use. Any
operation not corresponding to the specifications or intended use may result in hazards,
which in turn may lead to serious injuries or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks).
AGFA will not assume any liability whatsoever in these cases.
Make sure that the product is constantly monitored in order to avoid inappropriate
handling, especially by children.
The product must only be installed and put into operation under the specified conditions.
7 Intended User
This manual is written for Agfa trained Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application
Specialists, trained users of Agfa HealthCare products and trained diagnostic X–Ray
clinical personnel who have received proper training. Users are considered as the persons
who handle the equipment as well as the persons having authority over the equipment.
8 Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks
This Technical Documentation describes adjustments and routines which must only to be
performed by qualified technical personnel.
The Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must have
received adequate Agfa HealthCare training on the safe and effective use of the product
and applicable environmental and occupational safety matters before attempting to work
with it. Training requirements may vary from country to country.
Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must make
sure that training is received in accordance with local laws or regulations that have the
force of law.
Your local Agfa HealthCare representative can provide further information on training.

9 Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions
Each Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineer and Clinical Application Specialist:
• Must make his or her personal contribution to improve safety and protect the
environment.
• When working on a customers site, has a duty to take reasonable care to avoid injury
to himself or herself or to others who may be affected by their acts or omissions.
• Is obligated to adhere strictly to regulations and instructions.
• Shall familiarise himself or herself with the provisions of the Agfa Healthcare
Health, Safety and Environment Policy and any specific rules or procedures relating to
occupational safety at work and the protection of the environment.
• Shall promptly report any near misses, accidents, incidents or dangerous occurrences
to their line manager and co-operate fully in any investigation.
• Shall co-operate with company management on matters relating to
health, safety and environment and, where appropriate, discuss with and / or assist
their manager in resolving matters relating to health, safety and environment.
• Shall ensure that any company equipment issued to them, or, for which they are
responsible, is correctly used and properly maintained.
• Shall wear protective equipment whenever instructed or if it is recommended to do so.
• Shall be responsible for good housekeeping in the area in which he or she is working.
• Shall report situations, which could put them at risk, on either company or
customers' premises, to their manager or supervisor; and, if warranted, directly and in
confidence, to the Health and Safety Co-ordinator, Global HSE Manager, or ultimately
to the Managing Director.
• Shall report any injuries, diseases or dangerous occurrences to his or her line
manager.
• Shall report any accidents, incidents or near misses to his or her line manager.
• Shall report any situation of which he or she is aware that is potentially dangerous.
• Shall comply with any health surveillance procedure instituted for his or her benefit or
for compliance with regulations.

10 Connections to other Equipment
Agfa HealthCare equipment must only be used in combination with other Agfa HealthCare
equipment or components if these are expressly recognized by Agfa HealthCare as
compatible. A list of such equipment and components is available from Agfa HealthCare
service on request.
Changes or additions to the equipment must only be carried out by persons authorized to
do so by Agfa HealthCare. Such changes must comply with best engineering practice and
all applicable laws and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction of the
hospital.
The Agfa HealthCare products are designed to communicate with other devices in the
hospital network using DICOM protocols.
Connections to other equipment:

Warning:
Accessory equipment not complying with the safety requirements of this product
may lead to a safety hazard.
INSTRUCTION:
Consult the Technical Documentation before making any connections to other equipment.
Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include:
• Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity.
• Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been performed
in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-1 harmonized
national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard IEC
60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system Configurer and is
responsible for complying with the systems standard.
If required, contact your local service organization.

11 Accessories and Spare Parts
Parts and accessories replacement:

WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible
accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com.
12 Compliance
Directive for HealthCare Imaging Products:

Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices
(OJ No L 169/1 of 1993-07-12)
• ANNEX I - ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The

products are designed and manufactured in such a way that, when used under the
conditions and for the purposes intended and, where applicable, by virtue of the
technical knowledge, experience, education or training of intended users, they will not
compromise the clinical condition or the safety of patients, or the safety and health of
users.
• ANNEX II - EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY: Full quality assurance system

ISO 13485
• ANNEX X - CLINICAL EVALUATION: The clinical evaluation follows a defined and

methodologically sound procedure.

Applied Standards for HealthCare Imaging Products
• IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for
basic safety and essential performance
• ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices – Application of risk management to medical devices
• IEC 60601-1-2, It specifies the MANUFACTURER of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME

SYSTEM provides information to the RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION that is essential
in determining the suitability of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM for the
electromagnetic environment of use, and in managing the electromagnetic environment
of use to permit the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM to maintain BASIC SAFETY and
provide its ESSENTIAL PERFORMANCE without disturbing other equipment.
Additional standards for documentation:
IEC 62079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions - Structuring, content and presentation
Harmonization:
Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/
This document has been prepared to comply with Study Group 1 guidance document
of the Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/ to assist development
of a consistent, harmonized definition for a medical device that could be used within a
global regulatory model and would offer significant benefits to the manufacturer, user,
patient or consumer, and to Regulatory Authorities and support global convergence of
regulatory systems.
IECEE CB SCHEME
The IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme is the world's first truly international system
for acceptance of test reports dealing with the safety of electrical and electronic products.
It is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and certification organizations.
Agfa has produced a CB test report and claims national certification in all other member
countries of the CB Scheme.
Details see www.iecee.org

Radiation of radio frequency:

CAUTION: For USA only:
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the service manual, may cause interference
to radio communication.
Note:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial
environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference.
The user will be required to take all necessary measures to correct the interference at
his own expense.

13 Safety Directions for Operation
Accessibility of the mains power switch:

CAUTION:
Do not obstruct the mains power switch.
Position the Agfa HealthCare product so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power
connection.
• Under certain conditions the Agfa HealthCare product will show a display containing a
message. This message will show that either a problem or action has occurred or that
a requested action is required or cannot be performed. The user must read these
messages carefully they will provide information on what to do. This will be either
performing an action to resolve the problem or to contact the Agfa HealthCare
service organization. Details on the contents of messages can be found in this
Technical Documentation.
• All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which could be
confused with diagnostic information. If there is any doubt that the diagnostic
information could be corrupted, additional investigations must be performed to get
clear diagnostic information.
• Ventilation openings must not be covered.
• If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the product immediately from
the mains.
• Do not pour water or any other liquid over the device.
• If a system malfunction causes an emergency situation involving the patient, operating
personnel or any system component, activate the emergency stop for the system
concerned. All motor driven system movements will be stopped.
• Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce magnetic fields,
since stored data may be lost.
Explosive environment:
DANGER:
Risk of explosion.
Never operate this device in zones where there are flammable anesthetics or oxygen which
may cause an explosion.

Usage of an un-interruptible power supply:

Warning:
Images can be lost due to power failure.
Connect the equipment to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional
standby generator.
14 Radiation Protection
Only qualified and authorized personnel shall operate any X-Ray system. In this context
qualified means those legally permitted to operate this X-Ray equipment in the jurisdiction
in which the X-Ray equipment is being used, and authorized means those authorized by
the authority controlling the use of the X-Ray equipment. Full use must be made of all
radiation protection features, devices, systems, procedures and accessories.
Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is
applied, the required protective measures must be complied with.
15 Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection
• Details about cleaning and disinfection or sterilization methods that may be used on
SYSTEM parts or ACCESSORIES that can become contaminated through contact
with the PATIENT or with body fluids, are referred to within the individual service
documents.
• Disconnect the power supply from the equipment prior to cleaning the equipment.

16 General Safety Directions for Service Activities
• This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
• Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician.
• Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
• The safety directions for operation (see section 13) are also valid for all service
activities.
• During all service activities observe prescribed local and country-specific
requirements (e.g. occupational safety and accident prevention regulations).
• All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not
be overstressed when tightening. There must always be compliance with stated
torque values!
• Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw types that
have the specified hardness rating. Unless a different value is listed in the
instructions, all Allen screws used must be hardness rated 8.8.
• All screws must be secured in accordance with the corresponding data.
If "Loctite" has to be used to secure screws, this is stated in the text.
• Any Agfa service PC or tool which is to be connected via RS232, RJ45, USB or other
interface to an Agfa device must not be connected to the mains but must be operated
on its internal battery or indirect supply (low voltage).
• When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must be
observed:
o Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before you
disconnect or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
o When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never touch any
parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
o PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry a
PCB without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering
(electrostatic charge).
o Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected from
electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.
Static discharge at electrical components:

CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(Order number: CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this
strap on a grounded conducting metal piece.

17 Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
Protecting CR (Computed Radiography) Equipment against scattered X-Rays:

Warning:
Image plate is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The digitizer and the cassette storage shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way,
that the annual dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Protecting Film-Screen Systems against scattered X-Rays:

Warning:
Film is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The film-screen system shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way, that the annual
dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Accessibility of the power disconnection device:

Warning:
Electrical device. Shock possible.
INSTRUCTION:
• Do not position Agfa EQUIPMENT so it is difficult to operate the disconnection device

when an APPLIANCE COUPLER or separable plug is used as isolation.
• Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies and
voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or their
engineers.

• The device complies with the EN 60601-1, 2006 standard for Information Technology.
This means that, although it is absolutely safe, patients may not come in direct contact
with the equipment. Therefore the operator console must be placed outside a radius
of 1.5 m around the patient.
R = 1.5m
1.5m
1.5m
Patient environment
• This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g. a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Fixing equipment at the wall or floor:

Warning:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure: Risk of injury or damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.
Floor load:
CAUTION:
Heavy device may damage the floor covering.
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device.
Fixing equipment at the ceiling:

CAUTION:
Ceiling construction may be inadequate for fixing of equipment: Risk of injury or
damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.

18 Safety Directions for Installation Activities
• If not otherwise stated, installation and configuration is performed by Agfa HealthCare

trained personnel.
• If damage of the package is visible from the outside contact your local AGFA
representative.
• Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g. safety boots and gloves, care
must be taken that heavy loads are correctly lifted/carried to avoid injury. The relevant
instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved by
mechanical means or by several people.
• When installing the product be sure that there is either a mains plug or an all-cable
disconnecting device in the internal installation fitted near the product and that it is
easily accessible.
• Defective covers, sharp edges or protruding parts of equipment can cause injuries, if
accidentally knocked into. Route cables and position equipment safely.
• This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g., a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Connection of the device to the power supply:

CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the device by using the wrong power supply:
INSTRUCTION:
Prior to connecting the device to the mains:
• Compare the power requirements indicated on the type label with the available
power supply in the installation room.
• Check the service manual for the type of input voltage selection, manual or
automatic: If manual, select the appropriate voltage and fuses.
• Confirm to use the correct socket and plug for the required power supply.
• Check the equipment will work with the power supply available.

Ground potential differences:

CAUTION:
To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
connected to the same power source.
INSTRUCTION:
• Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power Source as
the PC.
• When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical environments
a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in different localities.
If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can cause a HAZARD for the
OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
19 Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities
• This Technical Documentation identifies the parts on which preventive inspection and
maintenance shall be performed by Agfa HealthCare service personnel, including the
periods to be applied.
• In general the device has to be switched off during service activities. Exception: If the
device is switched on to perform tests pay particular attention to any hazards due to
moving and rotating parts. Avoid lose clothing or finger traps. Switch off the device
immediately after the tests.
• Do not turn motors manually. If required, first disconnect the motor from the motor
control board.
• Make sure that the power cord does not show any signs of damage.
• After repair work always check that the integrated safety features are not overridden
or disconnected.
• If there is any visible damage to the machine casing do not hand-over the product to
the customer. First repair the machine casing.

Replacing batteries:
WARNING:
Battery can explode, causing chemical burns.
INSTRUCTION:
• Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity.

• Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the
manufacturer.
• Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the manufacturer.
• When removing lithium batteries from the equipment take appropriate measures to
avoid short circuit of the battery:
Either use tape to cover the two poles of the battery or put the battery back in its
original packing and secure the packing by tape.
Performing the electrical test according to national regulations:

WARNING:
Improper ground connections inside the device or too high leakage current may lead to
electric shocks.
• After any work at the power supply or at any component connected to mains voltage
inform the responsible organization 1 about the necessity of the electrical test
according to national regulations.
If specific national regulations do not exist: It is recommended to perform the
electrical test according to IEC 62353.
• Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers and all grounding
connections inside the device are present.
NOTE:
On MedNet, GSO Library path "General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual" a form “IEC 62353:2007 Test Documentation” for CR Digitizers is
available, to be handed out to the responsible organization (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
1
Responsible Organization:
Entity accountable for the use and maintenance of a medical equipment or a medical equipment system. The
accountable entity can be, for example, a hospital or an individual clinician.
Performing service activities at devices emitting laser radiation:

WARNING:
Laser radiation. Eye injury possible.
INSTRUCTION:
• Strictly observe the warning notes in the service manual of devices emitting laser
radiation (See service manual chapter describing Safety Guidelines / General
Repair Instructions) and at the corresponding steps of instructions.
• Strictly observe the warning labels at the modules emitting laser light. For the
meaning of the labels refer to section 3.3 in this document.
• Do not look into the laser beam.
• Do not open modules containing a laser. Only open modules containing a laser if
explicitly instructed to do so.
• Do not keep tools in the laser beam unless explicitly instructed to do so.
• Make yourself familiar with the path of the laser light and the conditions, when the
laser beam is switched on. Refer to the Functional Description in the
corresponding service manual.
• Do not operate modules with laser outside the device.
Sharp edges:
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the device: Cut or abrasion possible.
Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts.
Cleaning optical elements:

CAUTION:
Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements.
When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.

Secured screws:
CAUTION:
Opening screws secured by red lacquer may misalign important device
adjustments:
Do not open screws that are secured by red lacquer.
Opening PCs and Workstations:

Warning:
Electrical shock and damage to the equipment possible.
• Only open the PC or workstation if explicitly stated in the service manual.
• Unplug before opening.
• Observe anti-static safety regulations.
Replacing fuses:
Warning:
Replacing fuses by wrong type may lead to fire hazard!
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated in the service manual or on
the device.
20 Safety Directions for remote Service Activities
Remote Service Activities:

Warning:
During remote service activities images can be lost.
Inform the customer prior to remote service activities to finish the current work and to
stop working on the system.

21 Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts,

Accessories and Devices
• In compliance with transport regulations, all uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)

must be shipped with batteries disconnected.
• Use the original packing when returning spare parts, accessories or devices.
• Before returning any spare part with a built in lithium battery remove it and dispose the
batteries locally according to local waste regulations.
22 Safety Directions concerning Modifications
Modifications made in products/systems shipped by Agfa HealthCare must not be

implemented without written permission from Agfa HealthCare.
This applies in particular to changes which may affect the mechanical and/or electrical
safety or radiation-protection properties of a product (e.g. changing of safety distances,
removal of locks/instructions etc.).
23 Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials
'Hazardous materials' is the designation for substances which can ignite or explode or
which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. The “Hazardous Material”
instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be complied with
when performing work to avoid health risks.
Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them
are identified clearly by symbols and described by the instructions appertaining to the
hazardous substances.
24 Recycling
Agfa HealthCare has Recycling Passports available for all equipment. The Recycling
Passport explains whether hazardous materials, special components and batteries are
present, where they are located and how they can be removed at the end of the life cycle.
The Recycling Passports are meant to be used as information for waste treatment
partners and companies that want to recycle end-of-life Agfa equipment.
To get a copy of the required Agfa HealthCare Recycling Passport please contact your
local Sales organization.

25 Waste Disposal
On August 13, 2005, the European Directive on Waste Electrical and

Electronic Equipment (WEEE) 2002/96/EC, amended by Directive
2003/108/EC, came into force.
The directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) aims to

prevent the generation of electric and electronic waste and to promote the
reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery. It therefore requires the collection
of WEEE, recovery and reuse or recycling.
This directive has to be implemented into national law by the individual
European countries by August 13th 2005.
Due to the implementation into national law, specific requirements can be

different within the European Member States.
This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and / or on
its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household
waste.
For more detailed information about take-back and recycling of this product,
please contact your local Agfa service organization. By ensuring this product is
disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences
for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by
inappropriate waste handling of this product. The recycling of materials will
help to conserve natural resources.
If your equipment or replaced spare parts contain batteries or accumulators
please dispose of these separately according to local regulations.
26 Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)
AGFA HealthCare Field Service Personnel or its authorized affiliates are responsible for
the removal of Protected Health Information (PHI) patient data from devices, modules or
parts that are removed from the customer’s site. This also applies to the exchange of
spare parts, especially to parts that are returned to central warehouses for repair or
refurbishing. Examples for parts or modules that may contain Protected Health
Information (PHI) are: Computer hard disks, CD-ROMS, backup tapes, archive tapes.

DD+DIS302.05E Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedure
Chapter 1
List of Contents
1 General ..........................................................................................1
1.1 Safety Instructions.......................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 Safety Regulations for System Components .................................................... 1
1.1.2 Safety Regulations for CR QS 3.5 Hardware.................................................... 2
1.2 Creating a Restore CD after successful Installation/Configuration ........... 2
2 Set up a CR QS 3.5 System .........................................................3

2.1 Prerequisites ................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Measures on a staged CR QS 3.5 System .................................................... 3
2.3 Installation of Additional Languages ............................................................ 4
2.4 Change TCP/IP Settings ................................................................................. 6
2.5 Change Computer Name and Workgroup .................................................... 9
2.6 Fine Tuning.................................................................................................... 12
2.7 Lookup of Hostnames and Creation of a Host File.................................... 17
2.8 Create a CR QS User in a Workgroup Environment .................................. 18
2.9 Install an Uninterruptible Power Supply (optional) ................................... 22

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR Quality System 3.5 Chapter 1 / I
1 General
This document describes the Setup of the CR QS 3.5 Server and Client
Station.
For the Installation Planning of the CR Digitizers, please refer to the following
documents:
• ADC Compact Digitizer: DD+DIS288.00E
• ADC Solo Digitizer: DD+DIS251.02E
• CR 25.0 Digitizer DD+DIS232.05E
• CR 75.0 Digitizer DD+DIS227.05E
1.1 Safety Instructions
NOTE:
Electrical connections and repairs must only be made by authorized
electricians.
Mechanical connections and repairs must only be made by authorized
technicians.
NOTE:
For technical data of the commercially available devices as PCs and
Workstations please refer to the corresponding user manuals!
1.1.1 Safety Regulations for System Components
When operating the CR QS system, you should always make sure that the
following safety checks have been taken before bringing the system into use:
• Do not bypass or disable any incorporated safety features.
• Always disconnect any components of the CR QS system from the mains
before carrying out service or maintenance.
AGFA-Gevaert reserves the right to modify and improve their equipment in

order to adapt them to the latest technical standards.
There are no user-serviceable parts inside the CR QS server or client station.

Edition 2 Revision 0 CR Quality System 3.5 Chapter 1 / 1
Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedure DD+DIS302.05E
NOTE:
Troubleshooting, as well as electrical or mechanical repairs, may only be
carried out by qualified service personnel.
• Perform no other operations on the CR QS server or client station than
the ones described in the user manuals.
• The only reliable means of protecting the CR QS server or client station
against blackouts or other potentially damaging events such as power
surges and brownouts, is to use the optionally available battery-backed
uninterruptible power supply (UPS). The UPS (recommended option)
ensures that the electrical flow to the workstation is not interrupted
because of a blackout.
1.1.2 Safety Regulations for CR QS 3.5 Hardware
Safety Regulations for Server- and Client Station:

The CR QS client station complies with the UL1950, respectively EN60950,
standard for "Information Technology Equipment". The CR QS workstation
must be placed outside a radius of 1.5 m around the patient.
All configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard
IEC 60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system
configurator and is responsible for complying with the systems' standard. If
required, contact your Agfa Service Organization.
There are no user-serviceable parts inside the CR QS client station. Perform

no other operations on the workstation than the ones described in the user
manual.
1.2 Creating a Restore CD after successful Installation/Configuration
NOTE:
After the CR QS 3.5 system has been installed and configured successfully,
create a Restore CD to be able to recover the system after a system crash
(see chapter 3.2 of the CR QS 3.5 Service Manual, DD+DIS302.05E).

Chapter 1 / 2 CR Quality System 3.5 Edition 2, Revision 0
2 Set up a CR QS 3.5 System
2.1 Prerequisites
• The PC must be connected via local network to at least one other PC that
is alive or a switch (connected on TCP/IP level: must be able to ping each
other).
• In the boot sequence, the hard disk must be on top of the list.
• The language setting always has to be English (US) for the default
administrator.
• Log in as administrator.
NOTE:
Have the new values for DomainName, Hostname, IPAddress, SubnetMask,
Default Gateway, DNS ready.
2.2 Measures on a staged CR QS 3.5 System
On a new CR QS system prepared in production, no extra installation needs

to be done by the FSE.
On a system staged in production the following features are installed:
• CR QS 3.5 server: server Operating System Win XP, languages
(if needed), hotfixes, CR QS 3.5 software;
• CR QS 3.5 clients: client Operating System Win XP, languages
(if needed), hotfixes, CR QS 3.5 software;
NOTE:
Together with the operating system, PCAnywhere software has been
installed on the CR QS 3.5 system. It is recommended to use PCAnywhere
for remote service purposes.
For more information refer to chapter 3.2 of the CR QS 3.5 Service Manual
(DD+DIS302.05E).
NOTE:
The CR QS 3.5 system needs to be configured and customized according to
chapter 3.7 of the CR QS 3.5 Service Manual.
Please do not forget to also change the body parts of the default exam tree
or an exam tree configured previously on a lower QS software version. They
may contain non-DICOM conform characters which need to be changed
before being able to send images to a storage destination.
The procedure for this can also be found in chapter 3.7 of the
CR QS 3.5 Service Manual (DD+DIS302.05E).

2.3 Installation of Additional Languages
NOTE:
As server and client are both running on Windows XP you can use the same
CD for both systems.
(1) Insert the CR QS Language CD depending on the language you want to

install and launch MUISETUP.EXE from the CD. This will start the
installation of additional languages.
(2) A license acceptance window pops up; accept the license.

Click <Continue>.
(3) You then get a popup where you have to indicate the languages you
wish to install. Check the respective boxes.
NOTE:
English is the default language. You do not have to install it.
Mind, only the languages on the inserted CD are listed. If you wish to install
other languages, click <Cancel> and insert another CD.
(4) Select the option “Match the language for non-Unicode programs with
the default user language”.
figure 1

NOTE:
Keep the language for default user to English until the entire system is
installed (including QS software). Install scripts depend on English as
default language. The administrator can define another language during the
setup of the account. Changing the default language for new users will set
the logon screen in this language.
(5) Click <OK> to start the installation. The installation of the languages
takes up to 5 minutes per selected language.
(6) At the end of the installation you get a confirmation that the installation
is completed. Click <OK> to finish the installation.
(7) The following message may occur:
figure 2
(8) Click <Cancel>.
(9) In the following window click <Yes>.
figure 3

(10) Click <OK> to finish the installation of the languages.

Wait a few minutes.
figure 4
(11) Next you are prompted to reboot the machine. Click <No>.
(12) Repeat the procedure if you wish to install additional languages from
other Language CDs.
The installation of languages is complete.
2.4 Change TCP/IP Settings
(1) To change the TCP/IP settings go to Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel,

choose Network and Internet Connections and then choose Network
Connections.
(2) Network Connections: Go to the Properties of Local Area Connection

(Right mouse click, Properties)
figure 5

(3) The Local Area Connection Properties will open.
figure 6
(4) Highlight the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click on <Properties>.
(5) The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) properties will open.

(6) In the TCP/IP properties you can change the values according to the
customer’s needs.
figure 7
NOTE:
If available, enter the IP address of the hospital’s DNS server under
Preferred DNS server.
If there is no DNS server available at the site, leave the Preferred
DNS server empty..
(7) Click <OK>. (Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties).
(8) Click <Close>. (Local Area Connection Properties).
The TCP/IP settings are updated according to your changes.

2.5 Change Computer Name and Workgroup
(1) To change the computer name, right-click the My Computer icon on the
desktop and select Properties. Then go to the Computer Name tab.
figure 8

(2) Click <Change>. This will open the following:
figure 9
(3) Here you can enter the new computer name and the workgroup. After
entering the correct names click <OK>.
(4) If you changed the workgroup you will get the following welcome
message:
figure 10

(5) Click <OK> here. Next you will get a message that tells you that you
have to reboot:
figure 11
(6) Click <OK> here and then click <OK> to close the System Properties.
(7) Now you will then be asked if you want to reboot the system.
Click <No>.
figure 12
Computer name and password are changed.

2.6 Fine Tuning

NOTE:
This fine tuning of the QS system is necessary to make sure that all the
users are using the correct regional settings. Fine tuning is needed to make
sure that some background task (e.g. online printing) are using the correct
regional settings. When this is not properly set, the online printing would, for
example, print the date in the original date format (US-format) instead of the
regional typical date format. Strictly follow the instructions below!
(1) Go to Start \ Settings \ Control Panel \ Date, Time, Language, and

Regional options \ Date & Time.
(2) The Date and Time Properties window will pop up.
figure 13
(3) Next select the tab Time Zone.

(4) Select the correct time zone and check the “Automatically adjust for
daylight saving changes”
figure 14
(5) Click <OK>.
(6) Reboot the server/client system and log on as crservice.
(7) Stop the cluster again (if it was not stopped).
(8) Go to Start\Settings\Control Panel\Regional and Language Options.
(9) In the tab Regional Options, adapt both listboxes to your corresponding
language.
(10) In the tab Languages, set the listbox to your installed language.

(11) In the tab Advanced, select your language and mark the checkbox at
the bottom of the tab, to apply these settings for the default user
profile...
figure 15
(12) A messages box Change Default User settings pops up. Click <OK>.
(13) Apply all changes in the Regional and Languages Options window by
clicking <Apply>.

(14) Reset the Regional Options to English (Unites States) and uncheck
Default User checkbox:
• In the tab Regional Options, adapt both listboxes to your

corresponding language (English, USA).
• In the tab Languages, set the listbox to English, USA.
• Uncheck the Default User checkbox (see below).
figure 16
NOTE:
This brings the CRService account back to English (Unites States). This
setting is recommended for the CRService account.
(15) Click <OK>.
(16) Go to D:\agfa\adc-qs\bin and run the RegionalSettings.exe file.

(If the Operating System CD 3.0.17 or later has been used to install the
operating system go to folder C:\Tools. You will find the .exe file there).

(17) Confirm the install dialog.
figure 17
(18) Click <Start>.
figure 18
(19) While the program is working, text status messages and a progress bar
are continually updated. When the program has finished the Cancel
button changes to a Close button and the text status message
communicates, that the process has successfully completed
figure 19

2.7 Lookup of Hostnames and Creation of a Host File
On the CR QS 3.5 system the QS server can not act as DNS server as was
the case on a CR QS 3.0 system. The CR QS application sometimes needs
to look up the hostname if an IP address is provided in the configuration of
the CR QS cluster. There are two possible scenarios for CR QS 3.5:
• The lookup is done by a DNS server available in the hospital.
• The lookup of hostnames is done by the host file. In this case, a host file
needs to be created.
A tool is available on the distributed CR QS CDs to gather all IP address.

Only the hostname/ IP address of client systems are not retrieved
automatically.
For the creation of a complete host file refer to the following procedure:
(1) Run the tool to collect all IP addresses and corresponding hostnames
(location: D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Bin\hostfile.exe).
(2) Click <Start>.
(3) Click <Done>.
(4) A file is created and located in

D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\config\settings\QSHostFile.txt.
(5) Add any missing IP addresses and hostnames, such as those of the
CR QS client systems.
(6) Copy/paste the relevant lines to the file called “hosts” in

C:\<WINDIR>\system32\drivers\etc.
(7) Copy this file to all other systems in the cluster.

2.8 Create a CR QS User in a Workgroup Environment
The users adcqsacct and crservice, as well as the groups QSAdmin,

QSService and QSUsers are created automatically.
In order to add one or more users (e.g. qsuser) to the workgroup, follow the
instructions given above.
(1) Right-click on the My Computer icon and select Manage.
(2) Select Local Users and Groups and right-click on Users.
figure 20
(3) Select New User….
figure 21

(4) Fill in User name, Full name, Description and Password.

Check “User cannot change password” and “Password never expires”.
figure 22
(5) Click <Create>.
NOTE:
No complexity rules have to be applied when giving a password.
(6) Click <Close>.

The user has been created.
You now will have to add him to a group (e.g. QSUsers).

(7) Double-click on the user name. A window pops up.

Select tab Member Of.
figure 23
(8) Click <Add…>.

(9) In the new window click <Advanced> and then <Find Now>.
All available groups are listed at the bottom of the window.
figure 24
(10) Select the desired group (e.g. QSUsers) and click <OK>.

(11) Click <Check Names>.
figure 25
(12) Click <OK>.

The QSuser has been added to the group QSUsers.
(13) Click <OK>.
NOTE:
Repeat the procedure on all clients which are part of the workgroup.
2.9 Install an Uninterruptible Power Supply (optional)
NOTE:
It is highly recommended to connect CR QS 3.5 to an UPS.
For the installation instructions of an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
and for further information on the issue, refer to chapter 3.2 in the

HEALTHCARE Chapter 2
Imaging Services Functional Description

Type 4406/421
► Purpose of this document

This document provides an overview of the software architecture of
CR Quality System 3.5, Type 4406/421 and describes its service functions.

Revision Date compared to previous version 2.1
2.2 01-2008 • Added section 7.4 Web Services
Document Title
n.a. n.a.


sw_04_functional_e_template_02
DD+DIS302.05E Functional Description
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications
=> Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance
task on the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and
on the product.

Edition 2, Revision 2 CR Quality System 3.5 Chapter 2 / 2

01-2008 Type 4406/421 Agfa Company Confidential
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW...............................................................................................................6
1.1 System Components.................................................................................................................6
1.2 Configuration of CR QS 3.5 ......................................................................................................9
1.2.1 Workgroup Configuration ..........................................................................................................9
1.2.2 Domain Configuration .............................................................................................................10
1.3 Integration of MR4 Functionalities into CR QS 3.5 .................................................................10
1.4 New Functionalities of CR QS 3.5 compared to CR QS 3.0...................................................11
1.4.1 Fast Preview ...........................................................................................................................11
1.4.2 DICOM Export.........................................................................................................................13
1.4.3 Extended Storage ...................................................................................................................14
1.4.4 P-Values..................................................................................................................................15
1.4.5 Extended Character Set..........................................................................................................17
1.4.6 Improved Selection .................................................................................................................18
1.5 Changed Functionalities in CR QS 3.5 compared to CR QS 3.0 ...........................................18
1.5.1 Black Border............................................................................................................................18
1.5.2 Reject Analysis Toolset...........................................................................................................19
1.5.3 GUI Customization..................................................................................................................19
2 THE JOURNEY OF AN IMAGE..............................................................................................20

2.1 All Steps: Business Object Server ..........................................................................................20
2.2 Step 1: ID Viewer ....................................................................................................................20
2.3 Step 2: Digitizer.......................................................................................................................21
2.4 Step 3: Gateway .....................................................................................................................21
2.5 Step 4: AutoRoute...................................................................................................................21
2.6 Step 5: Viewing .......................................................................................................................22
2.7 Step 6: Manual Route .............................................................................................................23
3 CR QS CLUSTER...................................................................................................................24
4 CR QS SERVER STATION ....................................................................................................24
4.1 Technical Specifications of the CR QS Server Station...........................................................25
4.1.1 Hardware of the CR QS Server ..............................................................................................25


4.1.2 Software of the CR QS Server................................................................................................25
5 CR QS CLIENT STATION ......................................................................................................27

5.1 Technical Specifications of the CR QS Client Station ............................................................27
5.1.1 Hardware of the CR QS Client Station ...................................................................................27
5.1.2 Software CR QS Client ...........................................................................................................27
6 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ..............................................................................................28

6.1 Software Main Components....................................................................................................28
6.2 Main Components of the Server .............................................................................................30
6.3 Server Processes....................................................................................................................32
6.3.1 Minikernel / Business Object Server.......................................................................................32
6.3.2 Control Center (CC) ................................................................................................................38
6.3.3 ASPROs..................................................................................................................................41
6.3.4 DICOM Gateway.....................................................................................................................42
6.3.5 Preview Window .....................................................................................................................43
6.4 Main Components of the Client...............................................................................................44
6.5 Client Processes .....................................................................................................................45
6.5.1 Configuration Viewer...............................................................................................................46
6.5.2 ID Viewer.................................................................................................................................47
6.5.3 CR Viewer ...............................................................................................................................56
6.5.4 Logging ...................................................................................................................................58
7 SECURITY..............................................................................................................................60
7.1 General ...................................................................................................................................60
7.2 HIPAA .....................................................................................................................................60
7.2.1 Authentication .........................................................................................................................61
7.2.2 Authorization ...........................................................................................................................61
7.2.3 Accountability ..........................................................................................................................61
7.2.4 Integrity Proofing .....................................................................................................................61
7.2.5 Secure Transfer ......................................................................................................................62
7.2.6 Secure Storage .......................................................................................................................62
7.2.7 Key Management....................................................................................................................62
7.3 Security at CR QS 3.5.............................................................................................................63


7.3.1 Secure Socket Layer 3.5 (SSL) ..............................................................................................63
7.3.2 Security Architecture...............................................................................................................65
7.3.3 Security Proxy .........................................................................................................................66
7.4 Web Services ..........................................................................................................................67


1 System Overview
This chapter gives a short overview of the complete CR system. Further on, the internal
functionality of the CR QS server station (PC-based) is discussed.
For a description of the user related topics please refer to the
CR user manuals.
1.1 System Components
10
on Mbit
ly
figure 1: overview of the CR system components


ADC Cassette (with image plate inside)

The ADC cassette is the “container” for the image plate. During the
handling outside the digitizer (e.g. exposing the plate) the image plate is in
the cassette. It is only opened inside the digitizer.
The ADC cassette has an internal chip card which holds the cassette,
patient, examination and routing data belonging to a certain X-ray
exposure. The data put together are called demographic data.
The image plate takes the place of the X-ray film in a conventional system.
It receives the X-ray radiation and “stores” a latent image. The image
plates can be reused thousands of times. The actual restriction of
utilization is the mechanical robustness.
ADC Digitizers (CR 75.0 / Compact / CR 25.0 / Solo)

The digitizer is used to read the latent image on the image plate. After the
ADC cassette is exposed and identified it is inserted into the digitizer. The
digitizer reads the data on the ID chip, opens the cassette, takes out the
image plate and scans it. The latent image on the image plate is
stimulated by means of a laser beam to emit light according to X-ray
exposure.
The data from the ID chip is used to set the scan parameters correctly
(e.g. speed class, image plate size, etc.) for this individual X-ray exposure.
The emitted light is converted into voltage and then digitalized into a
12/14 bit, square root compressed raw image. This image is transmitted,
together with the chip data, on-the-fly via Ethernet to the processing
station (CR Quality System). A backup of that image is made on the
internal hard disk in parallel to retransmit the image in case of transmission
problems. The output format of the digitizer is DICOM SCU-CR.
After scanning / transmitting is finished the image plate is erased with very
bright light to make it ready for the next exposure. It is put back into the
cassette and a status flag on the ID chip is set from “EXPOSED” to
“ERASED”. The cassette is returned to the user and is ready for the next
examination.


CR QS 3.5 Client Station

The CR QS (Quality System) 3.5 Client Station is a Windows XP based
workstation.
The CR QS 3.5 Client Station allows cassette identification via the ID
Viewer software and basic viewing of the raw image.
Several QS client stations can be served by one QS server station.
CR QS ID Viewer Software
The CR QS ID Viewer in combination with the Identification Tablet
(ID Tablet) is used to write the cassette, patient, examination and routing
data to the ID chip. This data can be entered manually or by retrieving the
data from a Hospital or Radiology Information System (HIS/RIS).
By means of the ID Tablet the data is transferred to the ID chip. Writing

and reading is done by means of radio frequency in a contact-free manner
inside the digitizer.
CR QS 3.5 Server Station

The CR QS 3.5 server station is a Windows XP based processing station
with the CR Quality System 3.5 software installed.
Every incoming image runs through an image processing (MUSICA).
The processed images are stored on the internal hard disk(s) of the
QS server station. However, the QS server station can only provide a
limited amount of storage capacity. The final archiving must be realized
either by hardcopies or PACS.
Moreover, the QS server station decodes the routing data and sends the
image data to the selected destinations (e.g. printer, PACS).
For the QS system licensed software options (e.g. interactive image
processing, annotation, smart print, etc.) can be purchased. For an
overview of available licenses refer to section 4.1.2.2.


1.2 Configuration of CR QS 3.5
There are two possibilities to integrate the CR QS 3.5 into an existing system:
1.2.1 Workgroup Configuration
Ex factory, the CR QS 3.5 is installed as a workgroup.

Several CR QS 3.5 clusters can exist next to each other on a site. Sending images
from one workgroup to another is possible.
figure 2: workgroup configuration


1.2.2 Domain Configuration

The workgroup can easily be integrated into an existing CR QS 3.0 domain with Win
2003 server or into a hospital domain.
The integration of up to five workgroups into one domain is supported. Sending images
from one workgroup in the domain to another workgroup in the same domain is
possible.
The integration of several workgroups into several domains is also supported. In this
scenario sending images from one workgroup in a domain to another workgroup in
another domain is possible only if a trust has been set up between the two domains.
figure 3: domain configuration
1.3 Integration of MR4 Functionalities into CR QS 3.5

The following functionalities from CR QS 2.1 MR4 (Maintenance Release 4) have been
integrated into CR QS 3.5:
• Cleanup Studies including Failed Studies (Diskmon):

Diskmon Daily ASPRO removes studies (also with Routing or Printing status
‘FAILED’) with StudyDateTime greater than elapsed time in order to clean up
the hard disk of the system.
• Changed patient orientation for sending out to PACS systems
• QC Viewer: Combined Force Release:

Combination of Release button and Force Release button in one button


• Print Composer:
Opening of the Print Composer and behavior when changing the study data is
enhanced. This means:
• Only one instance per application (QC Viewer and IPD Viewer/Selector)
is allowed.
• If a second request to open Print Composer is received
• the first instance will restore and come to the foreground (“on top”).
• if the Print Composer was minimized, Print Composer pops up and
goes on top of all screens.
1.4 New Functionalities of CR QS 3.5 compared to CR QS 3.0
1.4.1 Fast Preview

With the Fast Preview a gradual build-up while image is being scanned is shown in the
QC Viewer. The functionality is only available for CR25.0/Solo and CR75.0/Compact
Plus.
figure 4: Fast Preview


Limitations of Fast Preview:
• Image delay:
• There is no synchronization between the preview and normal image
processing gateway.
• The time delay is specified in the CR QS configuration file which is not
configurable. Default delay = max. 4 seconds (18 × 24 cm).
• Image quality of the preview is set to the default window/leveling parameter
• In the preview window, the following patient data are shown:

• Patient ID
• Patient Name
• Patient First Name
• Fast Preview window size:

• The maximum size of the Fast Preview window is specified in the
CR QS configuration file which is not configurable.
• Default size = 256 x 256 pixels
• Audit trail
• There is no Audit trail for Fast Preview available.
• The system supports only one Fast Preview gateway per CR QS cluster.


1.4.2 DICOM Export
In QS 3.5 it is possible to export multiple studies and/or patients in

DICOMDIR format to a CD which is DICOM compliant. This functionality is especially
useful if the hospital does not have an archive to burn on CD.
NOTE:
These exported studies do not contain a report!
Requirements:
• The DICOM Export is only possible if Multi Format Import/Export License is

enabled.
• Studies have to be exported in a DICOMDIR format
• with patient demographics (default).
• without patient demographics.
• Export is only supported to CD.

• Studies are always exported to the DICOMDIR directory of the CD.
• User cannot change the default filename for the exported study which is always
“DICOMDIR”.
• The system adds a DICOM viewer (TSI Viewer) to the CD so the studies can
be viewed independently from the QS system.


1.4.3 Extended Storage
Due to the reorganization of hard disk partitions there is an “Extended Storage”

available for CR QS 3.5 what means that more storage is available for images and
studies.
• The capacity for storing images on CR QS 3.5 is increased to 26 GB
(in CR QS 3.0: 8 GB)
• The theoretical number of images to store on the CR QS 3.5 is 5600
(in CR QS 3.0: 1700 images)
NOTE:
The storage capacity may be different, depending on the processing algorithm and
package.
For example, the CR QS 3.5 Mammo system has a maximum storage capacity of
700 images due to a different quantisation factor (images are stored in RAW-format)
and Musica2 image processing.
Overview storage capacity of QS Software versions:
Release Processing Small/big Image Size No. of Images (*)

Algorithm
CR QS 2.1
Musica 1 4 MB/10 MB 1700
CR QS 2.1 MR4
CR QS 3.0 Musica 1 4 MB/10 MB 1700
CR QS 3.0 Mammo Musica 2 33 MB/55 MB 210
CR QS 3.0 MR1 Musica 1 4 MB/10 MB 5600
CR QS 3.5 Musica 1 4 MB/10 MB 5600
CR QS 3.5 Mammo Musica 2 33 MB/ 55 MB 700
(*) 90% small images, 10% big images


1.4.4 P-Values
1.4.4.1 Situation without P-values

The appearance of grayscale images displayed on different types of softcopy displays
or printed on different types of hardcopy devices has often been inconsistent and is not
optimized to the perception character of the eye.
These facts have an impact on the image quality:
• Optimal image viewing parameters (e.g. no window/ level to rectify) selected on

one device appear different when displayed on a different device.
• Device capabilities/ characteristics vary.
• The same number of gray levels cannot be rendered or perceived on different
devices.
• Displayed images look different from printed images
The causes for this are:

• Display devices vary in the maximum luminance they can produce.
Display CRT vs. film on a light box is an extreme example.
• The characteristic curve of monitors varies.
• Ambient light or illumination has an influence on the perceived image.
1.4.4.2 What is Grayscale Standard Display Function?

In order for the radiologist to distinguish all possible masses on a display monitor, film
on a light box, projector etc. all grayscales used in the image must be perceptible. This
is archived by applying the DICOM Grayscale Standard Display Function (DICOM
GSDF).
The GSDF describes:
• how pixel values should be interpreted or displayed.
• relates pixel values to displayed luminance levels.
• visual consistency in how a medical image appears.
• based on human perception
• greyscale image, presented on greyscale or color displays
• display monitor, film on a light-box, projector, …
The GSDF is the relation between Just Noticeable Differences (JND) in contrast and
the luminance.

1.4.4.3 What are P-values?

Device independent presentation of contrast can be achieved using the DICOM GSDF
to standardize display and print systems.
All devices (monitors, printers and lightboxes) have to be calibrated according to the
GSDF.
• JND index is “perceptually linearized”:
• Same change in input is perceived by the human observer as the same change in
contrast
• JNDs are mapped to absolute luminance
• Determine range of display
• minimum to maximum luminance
• minimum to maximum JND
• Linearly map:
• minimum input value to minimum JND
• maximum input value to maximum JND
• input values are then called “P-Values”
1.4.4.4 Limitations of P-values

The P-values are only a means to achieve device independence. P-values do not
magically produce a “better” image
Diagnostic value could be influenced when image is viewed on an inconsistant device.
NOTE:
The P-values are not a good choice if the customer does work with eitheronly
hardcopyor softcopy reporting.
In this case the use and configuration of OD values is more appropriate.


1.4.5 Extended Character Set
For the CR QS 3.5 the following character sets can be applied.

“Latin alphabet No. 1” is used as default character set when the CR QS 3.5 is newly
installed.
figure 5: overview of available character sets


1.4.6 Improved Selection
The Improved Selection functionality can be used to search for studies in case
problems occur when printing or transmitting images.
• Sort studies by one of the attributes specified in the favorite pane,

e. g FAILED / DONE / REQUESTED in case of printing status
• Sorting can be done up and down
• Fields on which the user can sort = fields shown under a favorite study.
• The previously selected item from the list box is retained during a session.
1.5 Changed Functionalities in CR QS 3.5 compared to CR QS 3.0
The following functions well-known from the QS 3.0 have been changed and improved.
1.5.1 Black Border
The Black Border function allows configuring the black border density.
Configuration:
• For Black Border configuration there is no license necessary.
• Black Border density is the same for the complete CR QS cluster.
• Collimation (black) border density:
• a value between 0 and 100 can be set
• 0 = WHITE ; 100 = BLACK
• 0 = no difference between collimation border and ROI (region of interest)
• 100 = no contrast in collimation border, black
• default value = 40


1.5.2 Reject Analysis Toolset
NOTE:
Reject Analysis Toolset only works if Reject Analysis license is activated.
The following table shows which functions are executable when the
Reject Analysis Licence is disabled or enabled:
Reject Analysis License disabled Reject Analysis License enabled

add, delete and configure reject
reasons
reject images reject images
folder with rejected images under
favorites
unreject images
export and storage of xml-file for study
statistics
1.5.3 GUI Customization
With the CR QS 3.0 the operator had the possibility to customize the GUI for one
session but could not save his changes before logout.
With the CR QS 3.5, GUI customization by the operator is no longer possible. When a
user is logged in as operator, the change possibilities
(Tools Æ Customize) are grayed out.


2 The Journey of an Image
An image runs through the following processes in the CR QS environment:
• Step 1 ID Viewer
• Step 2 Digitizer
• Step 3 Gateway
• Step 4 AutoRoute / AutoPrint
• Step 5 Viewer (and changing)
• Step 6 Manual Route and Print
2.1 All Steps: Business Object Server

• Responsible for storing & retrieving all business objects.
• Adds defaults for many attributes.
• Initiates some of the workflow.
• Only available on the server box.
2.2 Step 1: ID Viewer

• A study is instantiated (“Procedure Step”) in the ID Viewer.
• The ID Viewer is configured by means of predefined templates coming from the
CR QS ID Viewer software (licensed option).
• Data can be entered manually or RisLink information can be used. After this
identification the status of the study changes to “INPROGRESS_HOLD” if study is
on hold and to status “CREATED” if study is not on hold.
• In the ID Viewer changes to the study, not to the exam type, can be made.
• Instantiates also the “Image” business object.
• All data entered in the ID Viewer are written to the ID chip of the cassette.
• Image status changes from “created” to “identified”.
• ID Viewer creates the PSO on the ProcedureStep.
• Identification is done on a client station.
• Step 1 is being skipped in case of emergency. Direct ID is used instead.


2.3 Step 2: Digitizer

• Reads data from the cassette ID chip
When using Direct ID patient and study data are now entered in the
ID Viewer
• The latent image data on the exposed cassette is read and transformed into pixel
and scanning info.
• The digitizer then sends the result (raw image data) to the CR QS (gateway).
2.4 Step 3: Gateway

• Receives raw image data from digitizer.
• Raw image data are processed with MUSICA.
• Finds the image object in the BO server.
• Adds the pixel & digitizer info to the image.
• Overwrites some of the BO information.
• Image status changes from “identified” to “complete”.
• Procedure step status.
• DICOM Gateway on Server / Status Gateway on client.
2.5 Step 4: AutoRoute

• AutoRoute is a task that runs in the background (ASPRO).
• AutoRoute has a queue (“to-do list”).
• Image with procedure step status “verified” gets added to the queue.
• Initiates the “transmit” of the image.
• Sets the “Routing Status” in the ProcedureStep.
• No user interaction – based on identification.
• The AutoRoute process only takes place on the server.


AutoPrint
• AutoPrint is a task that runs in the background (ASPRO).
• AutoPrint has a queue (“to-do list”).
• Uses PSO file created by the ID Viewer.
• Sets “PrintingStatus” on ProcedureStep.
• Sets “PrintingStatus” on images.
• No user interaction – based on identification.
• The AutoPrint process only takes place on the server.
2.6 Step 5: Viewing

• Images with status “complete” automatically appear in the QC Viewer.
• Study mode / sequential mode
- according to configured selection
• Changes: original image remains always untouched
• Viewing on each client possible
Viewing: Changing
• All changes have BO attributes
• Image processing: “IP parameter” attribute
• Annotations are stored as blob (binary large object) in “annot” file
• Shutters are stored as blob in “shut” file
• Collimation are stored as blob in “coll” file & “Collimation parameter” attribute
• Window level: “window_center” and “window_width” attributes


2.7 Step 6: Manual Route

• An image is routed like it was last saved.
• For the manual routing there are no options available. Manual routing can only be
configured.
• Manual Routing will be initiated by the client and executed by the server.
• The routing process is done in the AutoRoute ASPRO.
Manual Print
• An image is printed like it was last saved.
• Based on PSO of the ProcedureStep.
• Manual Printing will be initiated and executed by the client.
• All printers configured in the Configuration Viewer are available for printing.
• Spool on the server
• There is no difference between QuickPrint and PrintComposer.


3 CR QS Cluster
Each CR QS 3.5 cluster is configured as a workgroup with minimum one

CR QS server and one CR QS client.
Each workgroup has 3 predefined user groups (local groups):
• QSServices
• QSAdmins
• QSUsers
Users are individual members of one of the local groups.
4 CR QS Server Station
The CR QS server station is the center of the CR Quality System. There, all the data
(image and demographic) arrive and the whole administration happens.
The following main tasks can be distinguished:
• Reception of images (DICOM SCP-CR)

• Automatic processing of the images according to the examination
• Storage administration for the images on the local hard disks (only for short term
storage)
• Demographic data and image management by
Microsoft relational data base management system (rdbms)
• Preparing and transmitting image data for output to different destination types
(e.g. HCP (DICOM SCU Print), including automatic routing.
• Queue management
• Intuitive user interface (Viewers) to do all kind of image manipulations for the user
(e.g. change image processing, apply annotation, system monitoring and setup,
configurable search and filter criteria, view and edit patient demographics, print
layout configuration system, etc.).
• Error and warning message management with logging functionality
(NT Event Viewer).


4.1 Technical Specifications of the CR QS Server Station
4.1.1 Hardware of the CR QS Server

4.1.1.1 Basic Hardware CR QS Server Station – Server / Standalone
• DELL server hardware with floppy drive, CD ROM drive and two
SCSI hard disks inside. The CR QS Server Station HW may change during the
course of time.
• Standard Brightness Monitor (21”, 8-bit grayscale monitor)
Please refer to chapter 11 in this service manual for more information.
4.1.1.2 Optional Hardware

• High Brightness monitor (21”, 8-bit grayscale monitor)
• Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) with 700 VA
• CR Test Phantom Set
• CR Standard PC for network client application of CR QS Viewers
4.1.2 Software of the CR QS Server

4.1.2.1 Basic Software Modules
• Microsoft Windows XP Professional

• Microsoft Windows Scripting Host
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0
• Microsoft Java Virtual Machine
• Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS)
• ORACLE referential database management system (Enterprise Edition)
• AGFA CR QS 3.5 application software including
• CR QS Online Processing Software
• CR ID Viewer Software
• CR IPD Viewer Software
• CR QC Viewer Software (advanced)


4.1.2.2 Optional AGFA Software (Licenses)

For CR QS 3.5 the following optional licenses are available. The licenses written in
bold letters are new compared to CR QS 3.0.
• CR Black Border Software

• CR Smart Print Software
• CR Autorouting Software
• CR Annotation Software
• CR Pediatric Software
• CR Uro/Tomo Software
• CR Dental Software
• CR DICOM-Store Connection
• CR Multi Format Import/Export
• CR Full Leg/Full Spine Software
• CR Rislink Toolkit Software
• CR Dose-Monitoring Software
• CR Auto QC Software
• HIPAA Support
• CR X-ray Connectivity
• CR Manual X-ray Parameter Input
• Reject Analysis Toolset
• CR Mammo Software
• CR Radiotherapy Software
• ADR Connectivity Software
NOTE:
The list of options may vary during the time. The above mentioned options may be
released for different software versions.
Please follow the news distributed by AGFA to check all currently released licenses.


5 CR QS Client Station
5.1 Technical Specifications of the CR QS Client Station

5.1.1 Hardware of the CR QS Client Station
5.1.1.1 Basic Hardware
• DELL client hardware with floppy drive, CD ROM drive and one IDE hard disk
inside. The CR QS Client Station HW may change during the course of time.
• Standard Brightness Monitor (21”, 8-bit grayscale monitor)
5.1.1.2 Optional Hardware

• High Brightness monitor (21”, 8-bit grayscale monitor)
• Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) with 700 VA
• CR Test Phantom Set
• CR Standard PC for network client application of CR QS Viewers
5.1.2 Software CR QS Client

5.1.2.1 Basic Software Modules
• Microsoft Windows XP Professional
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0
• Microsoft Java Virtual Machine
• AGFA CR QS 3.5 application software including
• CR QS Online Processing Software
• CR ID Viewer Software
• CR IPD Viewer Software
• CR QC Viewer Software (advanced)
5.1.2.2 Optional AGFA software (licenses)

Optional AGFA software is the same for server and client systems. For the complete
list refer to section 4.1.2.2.


6 Software Architecture
The CR QS Server Station is based on PC hardware and runs on the Microsoft XP

Professional operating system.
The management of the demographic data and images is done by a
rdbms (relational data base management system) from Microsoft.
The CR QS Software is the AGFA part of the software running on the
server station. The rest is standard software from different vendors
(Microsoft, Symantec, etc.).
6.1 Software Main Components
The CR QS system consists of a set of components:

• Viewers
• Control Center
• DICOM gateway for DICOM CR SCP
• Business Object Server (BOS)
• Print Server
• Message Server
• Configuration Server
The components are located on one PC or are distributed over multiple PC’s. The
components communicate with each other, using the COM/DICOM messaging
framework of Windows XP. COM/DICOM is both used for stand-alone configurations
as for distributed configurations. As a result, there is no distinction (from software point
of view) between a standalone configuration and a distributed configuration. Of course,
it has an impact on the performance.


figure 6: software component overview for server and client


6.2 Main Components of the Server
Gateway Control Centre

Monitor Commander
The Server side of the

ADC-QS system.
DICOM Gateway ASPRO
Route ASPRO
Control Print ASPRO

Centre
DIskMon ASPRO
etc ASPROs
MiniKernel / Business Object Framework
Relational
DataBase File System Registry
(MSDE)
figure 7: main software components of the server system
Control Center – Task execution server

• Schedules tasks on server
• Provides fault tolerant access to server components
• Is responsible for job queuing for server components
MK / BOF Server (MiniKernel/Business Object Framework)

• Manages the lifetime of the BOs (create Æ delete)
• Performs client queries
• Notifies client about the changes on the server (Publisher/Subscriber)


ASPROs – ADC QS Server Service Providers

For a description of available ASPROs refer to section 6.3.3.
Gateway Monitor – UI GW monitoring – optional to run

For a description of the DICOM Gateway refer to section 6.3.4.
CCState – Control Center control utility

The Control Center utility can be run optionally. For a description of the Control Center
refer to section 6.3.2.
Relational Data Base (MSDE)

The MSDE is used for the management of images and demographic data on a QS
system.
File System:
On the server system:

• 3.5 Floppy (A:)
• System (C:)
• Software (D:)
• Images (E:)
• Paging 1 (F:)
• Paging 2 (G:)
• Backup (H:)
• DVD/CD-RW Drive (K:)
On the client system:

• 3.5 Floppy (A:)
• System (C:)
• Software (D:)
• Export (E:)
• Paging 1 (F:)
• D$ on “QSSERVER (qsserver)” (G:)
• DVD/CD-RW Drive (K:)


6.3 Server Processes

The following application processes run on all CR QS 3.5 server systems:
Application Process
MK mk.exe
Control Center ControlCentre.exe, CCState.exe
ASPROs BackupASPRO.exe, CleanDanglingASPRO.exe,
CompasGWASPRO.exe, DICOMSendASPRO.exe,
DiskMonASPRO.exe, DiskMonDailyASPRO.exe,
ExportXMLASPRO.exe, ImportXMLASPRO.exe,
PrintASPRO.exe, QCPhantomASPRO.exe,
ReleaseASPRO.exe, RouteASPRO.exe
ImageStatusDispatcherASPRO.exe,
StudyStatusDispatcherASPRO.exe,
RejectAnalysisASPRO.exe,
DicomFPGWASPRO.exe
DICOM GW Monitor GWMon.exe – optional
DICOM CD Burner QS3.DicomdirExport.exe
QS3.LoggingService.exe
6.3.1 Minikernel / Business Object Server

• Application-specific middle layer between client tier and server tier (database,
image processing...)
• Provides a uniform programming interface to client applications. Hence the BOS
can be considered as the AGFA Medical Foundation Classes that client
applications use to access server functionality in a uniform and transparent way.
• Provides a set of generic services, common to the different Business Objects
(BO):
• Attribute interface: get/set BO attribute values; get attribute meta data
(name, type, value range); BO contains static attributes and dynamic
attributes
• Persistent interface: store/load BO state in persistent data store (MSSQL
Server or MSDE and file system)
• LifeCycle interface: create, cascading deletes of BO;
copy, move of BO
• Publisher/Listener interface: event model among BOs
• Relationship interface: navigate through BOs via parent/child relations
• Import/export BO


• Replacement of the Compas server

• Exactly the same interfaces and behavior, so almost no client code changes
have been done, in order to work with the new kernel
• Code base reduced 10 times, compared to the Compas server
• Normal “application” that is easy to debug
• Linear search time (no real restrictions on number of images in the system)
• 2 times faster BO operations (not so important for 3.5, due to other
bottlenecks mainly, but establishes a good way to increase general
performance in the next version)
6.3.1.1 The Base of the Minikernel
• Separation of the static BO description and dynamic behavior

• Static model is described in the configuration file qsmk.xml
• At the development time it compiles into the source code:
• SQL script to generate the creation of the tables (db_create_tables.sql)
• C++ code to access the DB using the MS ADO library, what later compiles
into the mkdb.dll (all validation on data integrity done on this level)
• C++ code for COM layer, compiles into qs.dll (Developer has a chance to
override “standard” behavior and introduce “custom” logic)
• Qsmk.xml used at runtime
• Parent/child relationship
• Metadata description, currently only in use by ConfigView
6.3.1.2 Qsmk.xml
• Could be used to learn more about the system

• Main elements used in the qsmk.xml are objects
• DataBase layer (name of the DB table)
• Columns
• COM layer (name of COM object – BO)
• Properties


6.3.1.3 Object Elements
figure 8: object elements


• The name of the BO is always the name of the underlying table to store the data.
• Often, the name of property matches the name of the column – that really means
in most cases get/set operations pairs.
• Properties ending on “Path”, for example “PixelDataPath”, normally indicate the
physical path to the file used to store the BLOB data; they are read-only for
security reasons.
6.3.1.4 Data Validation
• Strings
• On the DB level two types: ASCII and UNICODE
• Done to fulfill the MS SQL server restriction: “the row size should not be
bigger than 8000 bytes”
• Default length of the string is 64 (optional attribute maxLength)
• Default type is ASCII string (optional attribute type string or wstring)
• <column name="Manufacturer" default_c='_T("AGFA")'
default_db="N'AGFA'" type="string"/>
• Numbers
• By default unrestricted
• Optional attributes min(max)Incl (Exc)
• <column name="SequenceNumber" type="long" minInc="0"/>
• Enumerations
• The list could be separated by space, or “,”
• <column name="Sex" maxLength="1"
type="enumeration_string" default_c='_T("O")'
default_db="N'O'" values="O, M, F"/>


6.3.1.5 BOExplorer
In the BOExplorer the object elements can be viewed. To view the object elements go
to:
IPatient-TEST IMAGE^Black/IProcedure/ICRProcedureStep/ICRSeries/
ICRImage
figure 9: BOExplorer


6.3.1.6 Import / Export
• Images can be import/export in format .qse. qse stands for QS Export.

• This means:
• Zip file, renamed to qse extension (see figure 10: zip file with exported
images)
• All binary files stored as .qse
• Index.xml file as in 2.1, but instead of binary data could use reference to the
file attribute
• Index.xml contains all data types explicitly in the file, for more safety
• Works directly with database, so no penalties

• During the tests was able to handle studies with 250 GenRad images within 1
minute time, with memory consumption less than one Mb. The same for upcoming
Mammo images.
• Compression rate, normally for
• GenRad images: 2:1
• Mammo images: 3-4:1
figure 10: zip file with exported images


6.3.1.7 Import / Export tools

There are two command line tools, installed with the system:
• XMLimport – for import

• XMLexport – for export
General use:
• XMLimport /qse <file name>
For the Import/Export functionality administrator right are necessary. It is used during
the installation of the QS system to import default configuration files and test images.
6.3.2 Control Center (CC)

CC is a Windows Service and is a robust replacement for the Task Manager in
previous versions of the software.
It represents the ON/OFF switch of the CR QS system and controls the cluster of
applications.
This diagram illustrates the overview of how CC fits into the CR QS system:
C R Q S -S e r v e r
C o ntro l C e ntre C C C o m m an d e r
AS P R O C C S t at e
C R Q S -C lie n t
figure 11: Control Center in the QS server


The CC is responsible for:
• Auto detect unresponsive tasks

• Auto detect and start tasks that die
• Retry jobs
• Queue multiple jobs
• Processes asynchronous jobs
6.3.2.1 Startup of the CC

During startup, the CC:
• Connects to MiniKernel
• Reads configuration information
• Reads kill list
• Initializes each configured ASPRO
• Broadcasts UDP message to connected clients
• Shuts down if any ASPRO marked as vital fails
6.3.2.2 CC Job Submission

CC on server:
• Work items (jobs) submitted asynchronously
• Client application resumes immediately
• CC adds the work item to internal queue (queue per ASPRO)
• CC has active threads that poll for new jobs and forward the first item from queue
to appropriate ASPRO
• At various stages CC fires events that connected clients can subscribe to
CC on client:
• Export
• Import
• Route – via BkgndTasksServer
• Manual print does NOT use CC


6.3.2.3 CC Commander
CC Commander is an ActiveX control that provides a detailed overview of the current
status of the CC and lists all ASPROs currently being managed by it.
For each ASPRO the CC Commander shows
• Current status – loaded, unloaded etc
• Current job description
• Total jobs
• Supported triggers
For any OnDemand ASPRO the CC Commander allows the user to invoke the
ASPRO, such as Backup and CleanDanglingBlobs.
6.3.2.4 CC State
Application sits in the system tray and serves to:
• Show current status of the CC service
• Allows the user to control the CC service
6.3.2.5 Shutdown Sequence of the CC

During shutdown, the CC
• broadcasts shutdown messages to the server with 60 second delay in case the
server does not receive client shutdown message from all connected clients.
• releases reference to the MiniKernel.
• ensures that all items listed in the kill list are killed.


6.3.3 ASPROs
ASPROs (Agfa Service Provider) are the replacements for tasks from previous
versions of the QS software.
All ASPROs can be configured with a series of triggers that govern how the ASPRO
will be invoked by the Control Center.
The table below lists the possible triggers for the ASPROs:
Trigger Description
Start/Stop Same lifecycle as CC
Startup Execute task when CC starts
Event based Executes when a MiniKernel attribute is modified
Time based Time based configuration – initial time + periodic
On Demand Invoked as per required (can be programmatically
or via the CC Commander)
The following ASPROs are currently available on the

CR QS 3.5 server system:
• Backup ASPRO: creates a backup of the system and stores it on partition Backup
(H:). This task is time-triggered (daily at 9 am) or can be triggered on demand.
• CleanDangling BLOBS ASPRO: removes redundant files from the data
directories. This task is time-triggered (daily at 1 am) or can be triggered manually
whenever a backup is necessary.
• Compas Gateway ASPRO: wrapper for a COM component that implements the
gateway logic. This task is triggered by Start/Stop.
• DICOM Send ASPRO: performs DICOM transmission. This task is triggered on
demand.
• Diskmon ASPRO: deletes studies to free disk space to a pre-configured amount.
This task is time-triggered (every 10 min.) or can be triggered on demand.
• Diskmon Daily ASPRO: similar to the Diskmon ASPRO, except that the trigger
water level is lower. This task is time-triggered (daily at 10 pm) or can be triggered
on demand.
• Export ASPRO: enables exporting of studies to be executed in the background.
This task is triggered on demand by Start/Stop.
• Import XML ASPRO: enables importing of studies to be executed in the
background. This task is triggered on demand.


• Print ASPRO: enables AutoPrint. This task is event-triggered or can be triggered

on demand.
• QCPhantom ASPRO: performs spatial/contrast calculations. This task is on
demand.
• Release ASPRO: releases studies that have their hold timeout expired. This task
is time-triggered (every hour) or can be triggered on demand.
• Route ASPRO: enables AutoRoute. This task is event-triggered or can be
triggered on demand.
• DICOM Fast Preview Gateway ASPRO: wrapper for a COM component that
implements the fast preview gateway logic. This task is triggered on demand by
Start/Stop.
• Image Status Dispatcher ASPRO: monitors the image status. This task is
triggered on Startup.
• Studies Status Dispatcher ASPRO: monitors the study status. This task is
triggered on Startup.
• Reject Analysis ASPRO: creates the reject repository item and monitors the reject
repository size. This task is triggered on demand.
6.3.4 DICOM Gateway

The DICOM gateway receives CR studies (CR Procedure Steps) from a
CR modality (CR 75.0 / CR 25.0) and stores them in the BOS. The gateway supports
DICOM CR Image Storage SCP.
The gateway is a multi-threaded application which supports multiple inputs at the same
time. A listener thread waits for a DICOM association request and passes the request
to a processing thread; the processing thread validates the DICOM stream and creates
Business Objects in the server. Normally four processing threads are running in the
gateway.
• The DICOM gateway runs on server as an ASPRO and is controlled by ‘Control

Center’ when cluster is started.
• The gateway remains running even when no user is logged on.
• There is no GUI associated with the gateway.
• There is a separate ‘Gateway Monitor’ GUI available for Service Engineers
(GWMon.exe).
• Logging is performed in the Event Viewer and the log file using the standard
logging mechanism.


The following tasks are managed by the gateway component:
• Listen to the DICOM port for a requested DICOM association.

• Open DICOM association to CR modality.
• Receive CR studies from the CR modalities.
• Convert the received DICOM data stream into the internal format (healthcare
model) of the CR QS.
• Forward the images of a CR study to the BOS.
• Closes the DICOM association after a CR study has been transmitted
successfully.
6.3.5 Preview Window
• There is a separate application available from the programs menu that provides a
fast preview image as the digitizer scans.
• The fast preview window must be started independently of the gateway and can
be run / minimized / closed as required.
• In the fast preview window no demographics, no patient orientation, and basic
window level are shown.


6.4 Main Components of the Client
Logging UI (Screen Saver and Message Console)
The Client side of the ADC-QS

system. Could be resided on
the same physical box as the
server
ID Viewer
CR Viewer: Selector / QCViewer / IPD Viewer
ConfigView
Stratus Fast Preview

ADC-QS
Monitor
ADC-QS Monitor Manager
Visual components
Non-visual components
figure 12: main software components of the client system
ADC QS Monitor – client monitoring suite

• Communicates with the control center for QS status
• Start/stops application in orderly fashion
• Inactivity timeout
ID Viewer - Identification application

For a detailed description of the ID Viewer refer to section 6.5.1.
CR Viewer – Main viewer

For a detailed description of the CR Viewer refer to section 6.5.2.8.
Config View – Configuration application

In the Configuration Viewer the CR QS system is configured.


6.5 Client Processes

The following processes run on the client system:
Application Process
QC Viewer CRViewer.exe Viewer.exe
IPD Viewer CRViewer.exe Viewer.exe

IPD Selector CRViewer.exe Selector.exe
Config Viewer ConfigViewer.exe
Print Composer PrintComposer.exe
Layout Editor TableEditor.exe
TextBox Editor FieldBoxSelector.exe
ID Viewer IDViewer.exe
ADCQSMonitor ADCQSMonitor.exe ADCQSMonitorManager.exe
RemoteEventServer.exe InactivityMonitor.exe
MessageConsole ADCQSMessageConsole.exe
Logon Screen Saver LogonScreenSaver.exe


6.5.1 Configuration Viewer
figure 13: overview of Configuration Viewer
In the Configuration Viewer the CR QS 3.5 system can be configured.

figure 13 gives an overview of the tools available in the Configuration Viewer.


6.5.2 ID Viewer
figure 14: ID Viewer
When you insert a cassette into a digitizer demographic patient data and exposure data
related to the image have to be entered into the ID Viewer.
For the ID Viewer the customer can choose between various GUI templates
(see section 6.5.2.1).
In order to reduce the work of entering patient data a RIS Link connection can be
configured. The possibilities for this option are described in section 6.5.2.3.
An exception to the scenario described above is “Direct ID” which can be used in case
of emergency (see section 6.5.2.4).


6.5.2.1 Configuration of ID Viewer GUI

The ID Viewer GUI is configured by means of predefined templates coming with the CR
QS ID Viewer software (licensed option). There are templates for normal screens and
for 15'' touch screens available.
Some examples of possible layouts:
figure 15: example for GUI template for ID Viewer


6.5.2.2 Study-oriented ID
The ID Viewer will create some objects on the server as soon as the
<Write> button is pressed.
The empty image (and if needed it’s parents) notes1 is created on the server. They can
be:
• ‘In Progress’ (“Hold” button has not been pressed).
• ‘In Progress Hold’ (“Hold” button has been pressed on ID Viewer).
6.5.2.3 Configuration of the RISLink

RISLink is a licensed option making it possible to optimize the hospital workflow.
Patient and examination data are sent from the Radiology Information System (RIS) to
the modality in a way that the typing and selecting effort necessary to identify
exposures, is minimized.
The CR system supports various possible scenarios to download the data from the RIS
to the Identification Station:
RIS Link file Multi-byte

single byte format RIS data file
RIS Link with

RIS data file
DICOM modality
Call user program
worklist (DMWL)
RIS Link Management
XML worklist Delimited

worklist
Accession
number
figure 16: possible scenarios for the RIS Link configuration


6.5.2.4 Direct ID
Direct ID on a CR 25.0/Solo or CR 75.0/Compact digitizer:
The speed class cannot be filled in via the ID Viewer Form. The drop-down box will
contain a fixed string ‘SOLO’. The speed class from one of the buttons is used. Those
are configured via the cpf of the digitizer.
figure 17: Direct ID


6.5.2.5 Patient List

Local Storage of Patient data only!
The patient list supports the possibility to import/export patient data from/to other
locations in case no RIS license is available.
6.5.2.6 Option “Use RIS as Study Data”

Option “Use RIS as study data” would merge multiple items from a RIS worklist into
one single item, depending on the so called reference item.
figure 18: Option “Use Ris as study data”
A suitable reference item could be e.g. Accession Number. Then, all worklist lines
containing the same Accession Number would be merged into one single line.
Selecting such a merged worklist line would create one procedure step with more than
one sub-exams/exposures selected!


6.5.2.7 Auto-Selection from Study Tree

One of the important functions of the ID Viewer is the possibility to use the auto-
selection of all braches of the Study Tree, with the goal to minimize the number of
necessary mouse clicks as far as possible. Another pleasant
side-effect is a better avoidance of cassette mis-identifications.
This auto-selection is based on the information coming from the RIS and is, of course,
just as precise as the RIS information itself.
The following information is delivered by the RIS system:

• study group
• study type
• sub-study type and exposure type
These items are mapped (using an input mapping xml-file) into the following database
fields:
• ICRProcedureStep.ExamSetName
• ICRProcedureStep.ExamName
• ICRSeries.SubStudyName
Often, either it is not possible to make an exact alignment of the RIS data and Study
Tree or the information is available in one piece (not exactly following the Agfa Study
Tree structure) or the complete information is encoded in one single piece of
information, the so called study_code. For such a situation the usage of the learning
mode should be considered.


6.5.2.8 Options “Use Automatic Study Selection” and “Learning Mode”

Before the "Use Automatic Study Selection" can be used it must go through a teaching
phase ("Learning Mode"), in which generally the user teaches the
ID Viewer what study group, study type, sub-study type(s) and exposure type(s) should
be used when a certain encoded study information is contained in the selected item of
a RIS worklist.
This encoded information can be a real study code (numerical), an abbreviation
(alphanumerical) or just concatenated study group, study and series descriptions.
figure 19: Options “Use automatic study selection” and “Learning mode”
NOTE:
The encoded information must comprise all hierarchical levels of the
Study Tree.
There are following exceptions (special configuration necessary):
• It is possible to leave out the sub-study and exposure levels
(in this case just study group and study type will be auto-selected).
• It is possible to skip the study group, in which case the study group must
be pre-selected manually and the rest of the study information will be
auto-selected by reading the data from the RIS.
During the teaching phase the ID Viewer stores the encoded information as a
reference and the corresponding user selections of study group, study type
and sub-study type in a plain text file, the so called mapping file which is
located on D:\Agfa\ADC QS\Config\Settings\IDV_ExamTreeMap.txt.


During the normal usage phase the teaching is switched off (i.e. no further
information is added to the file). The ID Viewer, anytime the user selects an
item from the RIS Worklist, looks up the reference item in the
IDV_ExamTreeMap.txt file and automatically selects all levels and items from
the Study Tree, as stored in the file. When the reference item has not been
taught yet, it just will not select any level and will leave it up to the user.
figure 20 Option “Use automatic study selection”
NOTE:
The IDV_ExamTreeMap.txt files are local to the computer they were created on. It is
recommended to perform the teaching on one computer and to copy these files to all
other computers in the cluster, where the ID Viewer license is activated.


6.5.2.9 Structure of the IDV_ExamTreeMap.txt file
The IDV_ExamTreeMap.txt file is a plain text file and its structure is as follows:
....
R: A010130
0: Adults
1: spine
2: cervical
3: AP
3: LAT
2: lumbar
3: AP
3: LAT
R: A010131
....
From this example it is obvious, that whenever a study code

(in this case A010130) has been delivered by the RIS, following items will be
automatically selected:
Study Group: Adults

Study Type: spine
Sub-study Type: cervical
Exposure Type: AP
Exposure Type: LAT
Sub-study Type: lumbar
Exposure Type: AP
Exposure Type: LAT
NOTE:
The line R: A010131 is the start of another reference item definition.
The levels 0 and 1 (study group and study type) can contain just a single selection per
reference item.
The levels 2 and 3 can contain multiple selections per reference item.
The repeated teaching of the same reference item value will overwrite the previous
entry for this value in the txt file.


6.5.3 CR Viewer
The CR Viewer is responsible for switching between QC Viewer, IPD Viewer and
Selector.
6.5.3.1 IPD/QC Viewer
1: toolbar
1 2
2: buttons to reject, put
on hold or release
study or image
5 3: thumbnails of all
images available in
the folder
3 4: display of the image
5: patient folders
4
figure 21: IPD/QC Viewer
When the digitizer has scanned the image, and sent it to the QS station, the image will
automatically be available in a patient folder under ON HOLD (5). All images of the
selected patient folder are shown as a thumbnail (3)
In the IPD/QC Viewer images can be viewed (4) and prepared for diagnosis using the
annotation and modification tools available in the toolbar (1).
In this viewer images and studies can be rejected, put on hold or released (2).
Note that the IPD/QC Viewer does not replace a softcopy reporting station!
In the QC Viewer the following functions are available:

• Automatic image procession (e.g. window/level, collimation boarder, …)
• Assessing of image quality (control flow of images)
• Post-processing images (re-process images with MUSICA)
• Interactive processing of images and adding annotations
• Printing studies and images


In the IPD Viewer the following functions are available:

• Searching for studies in the local database
• Viewing studies
• Interactive processing of images and adding annotations
• Printing studies and images
6.5.3.2 Selector
1: select criteria
2: thumbnails of all
images available in
1 the folder
3: data related to a
study
4 4: folders “Favorite” and
3 “Rejected images”
2
figure 22: Selector
In the Selector you have the possibility to search for studies using different search
criteria (1) or to select a study from the folders “Favorites” or
“Rejected images” (4). The studies will then be shown together with all data related to
the study (3) and the thumbnails of the images available in the
study (2).


6.5.4 Logging
figure 23: logging overview
New logging framework mainly incorporated into the server part

Adaptation of the old logging (mainly viewer) framework into the new one
Logging UI applications purely information and optional to run ( they look for the new
messages in the NT Event Log storage, and display them)
• MessageConsole
• ScreenSaver
6.5.4.1 Log Levels
• Debug: Developer level information

• Info: Detailed application workflow information
• Headline: Normal application workflow information
• Warning: Possible problems or missing information
• Error: When something goes terribly wrong
• Crash Dump: Provides valuable crash information


6.5.4.2 Locations
Persistent locations:
Application In the local file system Related files

CR QS Applications D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Log ADC-QS.log
ConfigView.log
FinishInstall.log
Security Proxy D:\Agfa\SEC\Log proxysvr.txt
proxys_out.log
proxys_err.log
audit_proxys.log
Printing D:\Agfa\WDP\Log dpmlog.txt
ps2dcm.log
Temporary locations
• Message Console (Interactive User)
• Screen Saver (Non-interactive User)
6.5.4.3 Message Console and Screensaver

• Message Console
• System tray application
• Starts up automatically at user logon
• Can be configured to pop up a balloon when messages are logged
• Configuration file:
D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config\MessageLoggerConfig.xml
• Screen Saver
• Log messages are displayed when no user is logged on
• Screen Saver layout can be configured via standard windows screen saver
configuration
Settings / Control Panel / Display / Screen Saver Configuration file:
D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config\Settings\LogonScreensaverConfig.xml
• Message configuration
D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config\MessageLoggerConfig.xml


7 Security
7.1 General
Three main regulations are defined for the United States, Europe & Japan.
• HIPAA - United States (described below)
• EC Data Protection Directive (95/46/EC) - Europe
• HPB 517 – Japan
7.2 HIPAA
HIPAA (Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act) was signed into law at
1996 and is a regulation that gives patients specific privacy rights. It defines specific
rules e.g., for healthcare providers on how these patient rights must be protected.
In order to maintain the privacy of a patient’s PHI (protected health information),

security measures need to be implemented that provide:
• Confidentiality
• Integrity
• Availability
Technical measures need to be available that provide:

• Authentication
• Authorization
• Accountability
• Integrity Proofing
• Secure Transfer
• Secure Storage
• Key Management
The CR QS 3.5 system is HIPPA compliant that is to say supports all mentioned
technical measures. On the following pages these measures are explained.


7.2.1 Authentication
Access control to the device must be guaranteed using one or a combination of the
following measures:
• User name and password (incl. policy for allocation, renewing)
• Biometric measure - e.g., iris or thumb print
• Computer readable ID card
• Lock & key for room containing device
Prevent misuse by others by providing system lockout after a certain idle time. Display
should be cleared of any PHI when locking out.
Authentication failure attempts should be logged for later investigation.
7.2.2 Authorization
• After authentication a system must determine what access rights the user has to
access PHI.
• The actions the user is authorized to perform have to be defined.
• Some information may be visible while other related information is hidden
- based on the role of the user in the CE.
• In case of crisis a procedure for emergency override access has to be provided.
7.2.3 Accountability
• All requests for access to stored information must be logged for review. This
should provide an audit trail (including timestamp, user and type of operation).
• All electronic transfers of stored information must be logged.
• Audit trail must be secure so that it can not be tampered with.
7.2.4 Integrity Proofing

• CRC / checksums can be used to indicate if data has been corrupted while in
storage or transit. However, accidental (or malicious) modification by an
authorized user is still possible.
• Digital signatures must be used to introduce non-refutable proof of the integrity of
the data.


7.2.5 Secure Transfer

• Electronic transfer of PHI between two devices should be done in such a way that
the devices can authenticate each other and that the data transferred can not be
eavesdropped or modified.
• Use of a secure transport layer like TLS (SSL) is required.
7.2.6 Secure Storage

• Storage of PHI on a media such as CD or DVD can lead to a breach of security.
• Media storage must be secure by encryption to ensure confidentiality. Digital
signatures can be used.
7.2.7 Key Management

• The use of encryption in an organization means that encryption keys (certificates)
have to be managed.
• A PKI (Public Key Infrastructure) needs to be available.
• Clear policies and procedures are needed to manage keys and authentication
mechanisms.


7.3 Security at CR QS 3.5
This section describes the security measures applied in the CR Quality System.
7.3.1 Secure Socket Layer 3.5 (SSL)
Application layer HTTP LDAP DICOM
Network layer Secure Sockets layer
TCP/IP layer
figure 24: Secure Sockets Layer
SSL uses TCP/IP on behalf of the higher-level protocols and allows:

• the SSL enabled server to authenticate itself to an SSL enabled client - SSL
Server Authentication
• the SSL enabled client to authenticate itself to an SSL enabled server - SSL Client
Authentication
• the SSL enabled client and server to establish an encrypted connection using an
agreed cipher


An SSL session always begins with an exchange of messages between client and
server called the SSL handshake.
Client Server
1. Client hello
2. Server hello
3. Certificate optional
4. Certificate request optional
5. Server key exchange optional
6. Server hello done
7. Certificate optional
8. Client key exchange
9. Certificate verify optional
10. Change cipher spec
11. Finished
12. Change cipher spec
13. Finished
14. Encrypted data 14. Encrypted data
figure 25: SSL handshake between server and client
SSL Handshake
Associate Request
Client Server
Associate Accept
SCU SCP
DICOM Message
Exchange
eg C-STORE-RQ
C-STORE-RSP
Release Request
Release Response
figure 26: Secure DICOM Using SSL


7.3.2 Security Architecture
figure 27: security architecture
For detailed information on security aspects, see SRSS documentation in MedNet:

GSO Library/Technical Services/Service delivery/SRSS


7.3.3 Security Proxy
To make a non-secure device secure, a security proxy is used.
Non-secure Secure
DICOM DICOM
Non-secure Security
Device Non-secure Proxy
HTTPS
HTTP
Secure Device
Audit Event logging

to syslog server
figure 28: security proxy
The security proxy is responsible to:

• Convert non secure communication to secure and back using TLS 1.0 (Transport
Layer Security).
• Handle authentication of server and client.
• Ensure configurable Data Encryption (QS switched off).
• Support all TCP/IP application protocols.
• Support DICOM, HL7, HTTP, TELNET, APIP, LPD.
• Generate audit messages (QS switched off).
• Support IHE actor start/stop.
• Support IHE configuration change.
• Support IHE transfer of Patient Healthcare Information (only DICOM).


7.4 Web Services
Active web services can make the system more insecure towards intrusion from
outside.
If the customer requests to disable the web services for security reasons, one has to
mind the consequences.
NOTE:
Disabling a service may lead to the fact that remote service becomes partially or
completely impossible.
Following web services can be disabled:
• FTP Publishing Service:

This service is started by default. It is used by Agfa service to transfer files.
• IIS Admin:
This service is started by default. It allows administration of web and FTP service.
Disabling this will also stop all web services (FTP, WWW and SMTP services)
• pcAnywhere (3rd Party application):
This service is started by default. It is used for remote service. Disabling will
prevent Agfa service to assist or intervene remotely.


Repair and Service
DD+DIS302.05E Machine specific safety and repair information
Chapter 3.1
List of Contents
1 General .................................................................................. 1
1.1 Safety Instructions.................................................................................1
2 Safety Precautions ............................................................... 3

2.1 General....................................................................................................3
2.2 Protective Measures for Electronic Components ...............................4
2.3 Safety Regulations for the Battery Replacement in CMOS................4
3 Repair Notes for CR QS Server and Client Stations ......... 5
4 Further Safety Guidelines.................................................... 6

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR Quality System 3.5 Chapter 3.1 / I
Repair and Service
1 General
1.1 Safety Instructions
NOTE:
electricians.
technicians.
NOTE:
1.1.1 Safety Regulations for System Components

NOTE:
Perform no other operations on the CR QS server or client station than the
ones described in the user manuals.
The only reliable means of protecting the CR QS server or client station
against blackouts or other potentially damaging events such as power surges
and brownouts, is to use the optionally available battery-backed
uninterruptible power supply (UPS). The UPS (recommended option) ensures
that the electrical flow to the workstation is not interrupted because of a
blackout.

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR Quality System 3.5 Chapter 3.1 / 1
Repair and Service
Machine specific safety and repair information DD+DIS302.05E
Safety Regulations for Server and Client Station:


manual.

Chapter 3.1 / 2 CR Quality System 3.5 Edition 2 Revision 0
Repair and Service
2 Safety Precautions
2.1 General
Before bringing the CR Quality System into use you should always check that
the following safety precautions have been taken:
• Make sure that the various components of the CR Quality System are
installed in places where they can be constantly observed.
• Always disconnect the CR Quality System from the mains before carrying
out service or maintenance.
• Troubleshooting, or electrical or mechanical repairs may only be carried
out by qualified service personnel.
• AGFA-Gevaert reserves the right to modify and improve their equipment in
• There are no user-serviceable parts inside the CR QS. Perform no other
operations on the processing station than the ones described in the CR
QS manual.
With every repair work check the following points visually:

• Condition of the insulation of the mains plug / mains cable
• Effects of the strain relief for the mains cable
• Efficiency of the protective earth on metal panel parts (protective earth
connected and spring contacts OK)
• Correct condition of the protection covers
NOTE:
The only reliable means of protecting the CR QS processing station against
blackouts or other potentially damaging events such as power surges and
brownouts is to use the optionally available battery-backed uninterruptible
power supply (UPS).
The UPS (option) ensures that the electrical flow to the processing station is
not interrupted because of a blackout.

Repair and Service
2.2 Protective Measures for Electronic Components
Since there is a frequent problem with electrical components which are

destroyed by static discharge, protective measures should be taken to avoid
this problem. For the repair on electrical components it is necessary to wear
the grounding strap around the wrist and connect the other end of this strap
on a position of the frame which is free of lacquer.
Be attentive, that the frame is grounded!
This grounding strap is available under the spare part number
CM+9.9999.0830.0 via LOG-T warehouse in Munich.
2.3 Safety Regulations for the Battery Replacement in CMOS
WARNING:
Risk of chemical burns.
An incorrect battery replacement involves the risk of explosion.
Consider the correct polarity for avoidance.
NOTE:
Do not use improper batteries.
The workstation might get damaged or will not work properly.
Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the
manufacturer.
NOTE:
Do not dispose empty battery with domestic waste.
There might be a leakage of hazardous substances.
Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the
manufacturer.

Repair and Service
3 Repair Notes for CR QS Server and Client Stations

Upon repair work on the CR QS Server and Client Stations consider the
following points:
NOTE:
Never switch off or disconnect from the mains without a “shutdown” routine.
Risk of data loss and/or program failure.
Always close all open programs before shutting down the system and the
machine.
NOTE:
Upon frequent mains interruptions we recommend to connect an
uninterruptible power supply (UPS).

Repair and Service
4 Further Safety Guidelines
Residual Risks of CR QS 3.5 system:
1. Missing diagnostic information due to software / algorithm errors

2. Missing diagnostic information due to overlaying of annotations
3. Insufficient image quality due to incorrect use when selecting the
wrong examination type in ID Viewer
4. Incorrect image orientation for route due to wrong value of patient
orientation attribute (SW)
5. Missing diagnostic information due to diagnostic information overlaid
by any annotation
6. Incorrect image (patient/study mix-up) due to image transfer to wrong
study
7. Wrong diagnostic information due to wrong line/circular calibration
8. Missing diagnostic information due to downscaled image
9. Missing diagnostic information due to wrong magnification type/
smoothing factor
10. Bad image quality due to wrong sensitivity value
11. Unrecoverable loss of image due to incorrect use
12. Insufficient image quality due to changed viewing conditions
For further safety guidelines of the CR QS server and client stations see the
user manual of the respective PC.
For safety guidelines of the ID Tablet see service documentation

CR System Components (DD+DIS198.00E).

Chapter 3.2
HEALTHCARE Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Tools and Auxiliary Means
Document No: DD+302.05E

Type 4406/421

This document describes software tools and additional equipment for CR QS 3.5

2.1 01-2008 • Updated to Restore Toolkit 3.0.18.
Document Title
n.a. n.a.

01-2008 printed in Germany Document Node 9505392

eq_03-2_tools-aux_e_template_v02
Repair and Service
DD+302.05E Tools and Auxiliary Means
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 CR QS 3.5 RESTORE TOOLKIT..............................................................................................5

1.1.1 General Information ..................................................................................................................5
1.1.2 Requirements............................................................................................................................5
1.1.3 Creation of a Restore CD..........................................................................................................6
1.1.4 Troubleshooting for Creation of a Restore CD .......................................................................12
1.2 Using the Restore CD for CR QS Server and Client ..............................................................13
1.2.1 When to be used.....................................................................................................................13
1.2.2 Contents of the CD .................................................................................................................13
1.2.3 Prerequisites ...........................................................................................................................13
1.2.4 Restrictions of Restore Procedure..........................................................................................14
1.2.5 Restore Procedure for Server and Client................................................................................15
1.2.6 Troubleshooting for Usage of a Restore CD...........................................................................16
2 EXPORT OF LOGFILES USING THE LOGCOLLECTOR TOOL ..........................................17

3 REMOTE DESKTOP CONNECTION .....................................................................................18
3.1 Preparation of the CR QS Server ...........................................................................................18
3.2 Preparation on your Service PC .............................................................................................19
3.3 Remote Desktop Connection ..................................................................................................19
3.3.1 Connect via “Remote Desktop Connection” ...........................................................................20
3.3.2 Connect via “Command Prompt” ............................................................................................20
3.3.3 Connect to a Remote Desktop with SRSS .............................................................................21
3.3.4 Close a Remote Desktop Connection.....................................................................................21
4 PCANYWHERE ......................................................................................................................21
4.1 Preparation on the CR QS 3.5 System...................................................................................22
4.1.1 Installation of Symantec´s pcAnywhere Software...................................................................22
4.1.2 Creating User Accounts ..........................................................................................................23
4.2 Quick Connection to the Remote System...............................................................................24
5 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY ................................................................................26

5.1 Important Remarks to be considered before Installation ........................................................26
5.2 Display and Connectors of Powerware 5115 UPS .................................................................27


Repair and Service
5.3 Cable Connection to UPS .......................................................................................................28
5.4 System Settings for UPS ........................................................................................................29
5.5 Technical Data ........................................................................................................................32
5.5.1 Load Table ..............................................................................................................................32
5.5.2 Measured Values for Power Consumption .............................................................................32
5.6 Powerware Service Contact....................................................................................................33
5.6.1 New Return Addresses for Warranty Exchange of Powerware UPS Devices shipped after
May 2004 ................................................................................................................................33
5.6.2 Warranty Exchange for Devices, shipped until May 2004 and for Systems used in IMPAX ..35
5.6.3 Disconnecting of an UPS ........................................................................................................35
5.6.4 Powerware Contacts globally..................................................................................................35
6 LIST OF TESTED STORAGE PROVIDERS, DICOM MWL CONNECTIONS AND

SUPPORTED PRINTERS IN CR QS 3.5 ...............................................................................36
6.1 Tested Storage Providers .......................................................................................................36
6.2 Tested Dicom MWL Connections ...........................................................................................38
6.3 Supported Printers ..................................................................................................................39


Repair and Service
1 CR QS 3.5 Restore Toolkit
1.1.1 General Information

By means of a Restore Toolkit a bootable CR QS 3.5 Restore CD can be created. A
Restore CD on site makes it possible to restore the server system as well as the clients
at a later date back to the same identical state as it was by creation time of the Restore
CD.
The Restore CD is no backup tool, as it only backups the system partition (C:) and the
software partition (D:). All other partitions get wiped when restoring a system with the
Restore CD.
NOTE:
Pay attention that the CD must only be used on the PC it was created on!
Together with release of CR QS 3.5 SP2, the Restore Toolkit version 3.0.18 is
introduced. For CR QS 3.5.xxx use the Restore Toolkit version 3.0.18.
For latest information on Restore Toolkit versions please refer to MedNet.
1.1.2 Requirements
The Restore Toolkit version 3.0.18 has been tested on standard

CR QS computer hardware. It is released for the same hardware as
CR QS 3.5.
Make sure you have:
• CR QS Restore Toolkit version 3.0.18 or higher
• Blank or re-writeable 700 Mb CD-R required (use high quality CD-R only)
• CR QS system (Server or Client) with any type of CD writer
Check the following conditions:

• For security reasons, the user account must be a member of the administrator
group to run the CR QS Restore Toolkit.
• The language of the user account running the Restore Toolkit has to be English.
NOTE:
The file <RestoreToolkit30.doc> on the Restore Toolkit CD-ROM provides
background information and useful hints.


Repair and Service
1.1.3 Creation of a Restore CD
The procedure to create a Restore CD takes place in three distinct phases:

• Part 1: (Recommended preparation) - Delete the Windows Restore Points to
reduce the disc size and prevent the restore images from becoming too big.
• Part 2: (Windows mode) – required driver files are copied to the system, which is
then restarted.
• Part 3: (DOS command mode) – the Symantec Ghost software is run, a system
image file is created.
• Part 4: (Windows mode) – the system image file is burnt onto CD media.
1.1.3.1 Part 1: Delete Windows Restore Points (recommended)

Before creating the restore CD, it is strongly recommended to first cleanup unneeded
data from the disk. Follow this procedure:
To remove old restore points from disk:
(1) Stop the CR QS via the CR QS Monitor.

(2) Double click on My Computer – and right-click on HD Drive C: and select
Properties
(3) Click <Disk Cleanup>
figure 1
(4) Wait until the system has done some calculations


Repair and Service
(5) Select tab More Options

(6) In the Section System Restore click <Clean up…>
figure 2
(7) Click <Yes>:
figure 3
(8) Click <OK> to exit Disk Cleanup
(9) Click <Yes>:
figure 4
(10) The clean up starts. This may take some time.
Result Deleting Windows Restore Points is completed.


Repair and Service
1.1.3.2 Part 2: Setting the Boot Order and copying driver files
(1) Make sure the boot order in the system BIOS lists the CD before the HDD!
To check boot order, press <F2> when booting the system to enter the BIOS.
Scroll down to ‘Boot Order’ or ‘Boot Sequence’ to check and/or change this.
(2) Insert Restore Toolkit CD in CD drive.
(3) Browse at Windows Explorer to the CD drive and double-click on
“Launch.bat”.
NOTE:
Due to HIPAA regulations the autorun ability is disabled on
CR QS 3.5 systems.
(4) Click <Yes> to continue.
figure 5
(5) A countdown dialog appears and the system restarts automatically.

Make sure to leave the Toolkit CD in the tray.


Repair and Service
1.1.3.3 Part 3: Creating the System Image File
(1) The system boots up from the Restore Toolkit CD and runs in DOS mode.
(2) Type <Y> to continue.
figure 6
NOTE:
Symantec Ghost software can show a License agreement warning when running for
the first time. If this is the case confirm license agreement with <OK>. “Progress
Indicator” shows progress of transfer; this can take a while.
(3) The Symantec Ghost software runs and the system image file is created
(no action).
NOTE:
The progress in Symantec Ghost may not be shown.
(4) When part 2 is finished the tray is ejected automatically. Remove the Restore
Toolkit CD from the tray.
(5) Press <Ctrl+Alt+Del> to restart the system.


Repair and Service
1.1.3.4 Part 4: Burning the Restore CD
(1) After login, click <Yes> to continue.
figure 7
(2) Insert a blank CD-R and click <OK>.
figure 8
NOTE:
Symantec Ghost Image could get lost when clicking <OK> and no CD-R is inserted!
(3) A status bar shows progress of creation of Restore CD.
figure 9


Repair and Service
(4) If the Restore does not fit onto one CD, you are asked to insert another blanc
CD-R.
figure 10
This request appears as often as necessary.
NOTE:
If the system is left alone during creation of a CD, the screensaver timeout may exceed
and the user is logged out. In this case, the Restore Toolkit stops working and Part 3
has to be repeated.
(5) Click <OK> to finish the procedure.
figure 11
(6) Label the Restore CDs with a marker pen as follows and store them in a safe
place.
• Record number of the CD (e.g. 1 of 3)
• System identity
The procedure is completed.


Repair and Service
1.1.4 Troubleshooting for Creation of a Restore CD
Problem 1:
Symptom: The following window appears during part 3:
figure 12
Defect: Unspecific error
Solution: Click <Yes> to try again a few times.
If it keeps failing, press <No> to stop the procedure. In this case all files will be
deleted.
Problem 2:
Symptom: After inserting the CD following dialog box appears:
CD Creation encountered an error and returned: -2147220972. Try again?
Defect: An invalid media (e.g. CD upside down) is inserted or the <OK> button is pressed too
soon after inserting the CD.
Solution: Check CD and click <Yes> to try again.
Problem 3:
Symptom: Procedure fails for one or other reason and another attempt fails.
Defect: Unwanted remains
Solution: Run the “RTKclean.js” script in c:\temp\.
Problem 4:
Symptom: After the procedure, the CR QS application does not start on the server.
Defect: Unknown software behavior.
Solution: Run the “afterrestore.js” script in c:\temp\.


Repair and Service
1.2 Using the Restore CD for CR QS Server and Client
1.2.1 When to be used
The restore procedure is an emergency procedure in case a hard disk on server or

client is corrupted and has to be changed.
Four scenarios can be tackled:
• CR QS Server system disk crashed.
• CR QS Server both disks (system and image) crashed.
• CR QS Server image disk crashed.
• CR QS Client system disk crashed.
1.2.2 Contents of the CD
A Restore CD can contain one of the following disk images:

• In case of an CR QS Server:
An exact copy of the first disk and a default image of the second disk.
• In case of an CR QS Client:
An exact copy of the only disk.
1.2.3 Prerequisites
Restore Disk 1 Perform Backup ASPRO in Configuration Viewer

(if still possible).
Restore Disk 2 No prerequisites
Restore Export the xml configuration file to an external medium

Disk 1 and 2 (if still possible).
NOTE:
You have to export the xml-file on pure CR QS systems.


Repair and Service
1.2.4 Restrictions of Restore Procedure
1.2.4.1 General Restrictions
The general restrictions are:

• Restore CD must only be used on the PC it was created on.
• Usage of Restore CD might fail, if hardware has been changed since creation of
the CR QS Restore CD.
• Restore CD gives the status of the system when CD was created.
The original CR QS application CD is needed during the restore procedure. Use
the version that was installed at creation of the CR QS Restore CD.
1.2.4.2 Restrictions for Server
The restrictions for the server are:

• Information in configuration and/or study tree may get lost, if there were changes
meanwhile and no external copy is available.
• Restoring the image disk results in unrecoverable image data loss.
1.2.4.3 Restrictions for Client
The restrictions for the client are:

• Restoring system disk on client only gives the configuration of the time the restore
CD was created.


Repair and Service
1.2.5 Restore Procedure for Server and Client
NOTE:
Patient data will be lost after the restore procedure!
To restore a system from a Restore CD Set, follow these steps:
(1) Boot from the 1st CD of the set.

(2) Type <Y> to continue the restore procedure.
Note that the progress in Symantec Ghost window may not be shown.
*********** AGFA ADC-QS Restore *********************
This procedure restores an ADC-QS Server. The disks will be overwritten.
Do you want to continue ?! (Y/N)

Confirm:
figure 13
(3) When a popup in Symantec Ghost asks for a ‘new’ or ‘other’ or ‘next’ ‘media’ or
‘span’, insert the next CD of the set and click <OK>.
NOTE:
Be aware that these messages are not always as clear as they should be.
(4) After the restore of the system partition, you are prompted to insert the first disk
again.
*********** AGFA ADC-QS Restore *********************
Insert the 1st CD of the spanned set.
Press any key to continue...

figure 14
(5) Again at each ghost popup insert the next CD of the set and click <OK>.
(6) When the images are deployed to the disks, a message tells you that the procedure
has finished.
(7) Remove the CD from the drive and press <Ctrl-Alt-Del>
to restart the system.
(8) While the system is rebooting, insert the CR QS Application CD, which must be the
same version as the one when the Restore CD was created.


Repair and Service
(9) In Windows there is no action necessary, but be aware that some cleanup is done
after login.
On a CR QS server the processes and services for the QS take a bit more time to
startup; do not invoke them manually!
(10) After restart the following window appears.
Click <Yes> to continue with deleting all patient data!
figure 15
(11) A reboot request may appear. Be sure to finish all user interaction with other
dialogs first. Answer the reboot request as last one by clicking <Yes> to restart the
system.
(12) The restore procedure is completed.
1.2.6 Troubleshooting for Usage of a Restore CD
Symptom 1: After restoring a system with a RTK:

• When starting the application, several errors are shown and the application can not
be started.
• Every time an image comes in, an error message pops up and the image can not be
displayed.
Defect: The IPP library of the system is not installed any more.
Solution: Reinstall the IPP library:
Insert the QS Application CD.
Navigate to the \IPP folder and double click the w_ipp_ia32_itanium_p_4.1_RTI.msi file.
The IPP library installer is launched.


Repair and Service
Symptom 2: After restoring a system with a RTK:

• All printer layouts have disappeared.
• ID-Viewer and Config Viewer show error messages
Defect: Bug in the restore software
Solution: Re-import the configuration XML after the restore.
2 Export of Logfiles using the LogCollector Tool
Use the LogCollector Tool when you need to export the logfiles of the system. The
advantage of this tool is that you do not need to collect the files manually. The tool
automatically exports all files available on the system.
(1) Log in as administrator.
(2) Stop the CR QS cluster.
(3) Go to Start\Agfa CR QS 3.5\Tools\LogCollector.
(4) Click <GO!> to start the LogCollector.
figure 16
(5) The tool automatically zips the following applications, security and system
events logs into one file:
d:\agfa\adc-qs\config\settings\*.*
d:\agfa\adc-qs\log\*.* (our log location)
d:\agfa\adc-qs\bin\log\*.* (auditevent logger )
d:\agfa\adc-qs\improc\apncre\log\*.* (ImageProcessing logs) (only created
when errors occur)
d:\agfa\WDP\log (dicom printer logs )
d:\agfa\SEC\log (security proxy logs )
(6) The resultant file is stored under C:\CR QS 3.5 Logs on <SystemName>.zip. If
necessary you can change the file name.


Repair and Service
3 Remote Desktop Connection
NOTE:
Use the Remote Desktop Connection for remote configuration of the system and when
you want to take control over the system.
3.1 Preparation of the CR QS Server
NOTE:
Usually the remote desktop connection to a CR QS System is possible by default. No
actions are necessary on the CR QS System.
IMPORTANT:
Data may get lost!
Inform your customer, that you want to connect remotely to his
CR QS System.
The Remote Desktop Connection is possible to all XP-based QR QS server and

clients.
In order to make the Remote Desktop Connection to a CR QS System possible, the
system has to “allow” remote connection.
For a CR QS 3.5 System the Remote Desktop Connection is allowed by default.


Repair and Service
3.2 Preparation on your Service PC
NOTE:
• You can only access a windows-based system from another windows-based
system.
• If you do have a Windows XP based system, you do not need to prepare your
system.
• If you have a Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 98 Second Edition, Windows
Me, Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000 system, the remote connection to a CR
QS Win XP server needs to be made possible.
Follow these steps:
(1) The Remote Desktop Communication Software for Windows XP is available

on the Win XP installation CD or can be downloaded from the Microsoft
homepage.
(2) When the Welcome page appears, click Perform additional tasks, and then
click Setup Remote Desktop Connection.
(3) When the installation wizard starts, follow the directions that appear on your
screen.
3.3 Remote Desktop Connection
NOTE:
Remote desktop connection to a CR QS Win XP-based system:
Before you connect to your customer’s system, ask your customer to save all data and
log out. He should not log in again until you have finished your remote connection
session.
Unsaved data may get lost!
This is important as the user currently logged in is logged out automatically when you
connect to his system
Unsaved data may get lost!
At the same time, when a local user logs in to a system you are currently working on
via remote desktop, you are logged out automatically.


Repair and Service
3.3.1 Connect via “Remote Desktop Connection”
(1) Go to Start Æ All Programs Æ Accessories Æ Communication Æ Remote

Desktop Connection.
The following window pops up:
figure 17
(2) Type in the IP address or the host name of the CR QS server you want to
connect to.
(3) Click <Connect>.
(4) Remote desktop will start up. Login as administrator.
3.3.2 Connect via “Command Prompt”
(1) Open the command prompt window.

(2) Type in the following command:
mstsc –v:servername /F –console
figure 18
• mstsc is the remote desktop connection executable file

• -v indicates the server you want to connect to
• /F indicates full screen mode
• -console is the instruction to connect to the console session.
(3) Remote desktop will start up. Login as administrator.


Repair and Service
3.3.3 Connect to a Remote Desktop with SRSS
(1) Start the SNDB at your computer.

(2) In the left pane, select the site you want to connect to.
(3) Select remotedsk:// from the pull down menu.
figure 19
Mind:
Enter a Case_ID or a Reason. Otherwise it is not possible to continue.
(4) Click <Connect to> to start the remote desktop.
3.3.4 Close a Remote Desktop Connection
(1) Press CTRL+ multiplication sign on the numeric keyboard (QWERTY

keyboard).
(2) You automatically return to the original session on your PC.
4 PcAnywhere
NOTE:
Use pcAnywhere if you want to share information with your customer.
PcAnywhere client is available on the SRSS Citrix server.
In order to use pcAnywhere the Symantecs pcAnywhere software must be installed on
the local system (i.c. the SRSS Citrix server) and the
remote CR QS system.
NOTE:
In case your system has been installed with OS Installation CD 3.0.108 pcAnywhere
will be installed on the system together with the operating system and an administrator
and a crservice user account are automatically created. No additional actions are
required to make pcAnywhere ready for use.
You can directly go to section 4.2 for the description of how to connect to the remote
system.


Repair and Service
4.1 Preparation on the CR QS 3.5 System
4.1.1 Installation of Symantec´s pcAnywhere Software

(2) From the CD run the “Symantec pcAnywhere – Host Only.exe” installer.
(3) The installation doesn’t require any interaction. At the end, the system reboots
automatically.
(4) After reboot and logging in again the pcAnywhere icon will be displayed in the
toolbar:
figure 20
(5) For the creation of a user account refer to section 4.1.2.
NOTE:
In case pcAnywhere doesn’t start automatically, follow the procedure below.
(1) In the pcAnywhere Manager click on <Hosts>.

(2) Then right-click on Network, Cable, DSL and select Properties.
(3) Go to the Settinbgs tab.
(4) Check Launch with Windows.
figure 21


Repair and Service
4.1.2 Creating User Accounts
On the CR QS 3.5 system you have to create user accounts authorized to remotely
connect to the system.
(1) In the pcAnywhere Manager click on <Hosts>.
figure 22
(2) Then right-click on <Network, Cable, DSL> and select <Properties>.

(3) Go to the Callers tab.
(4) In the following window select Authentication type: Windows
figure 23
(5) Click on the icon to create a new user.


Repair and Service
figure 24
(6) Check User.

(7) In the field Domain select the name of the local PC (QSSERVER).
(8) In the field Account select Administrator and/or crservice.
(9) Click <OK>. The users will appear in the callers list.
(10) Reboot the system to make your changes effective.
4.2 Quick Connection to the Remote System
(1) Open the Symantecs pcAnywhere software.

(2) In the pcAnywhere Manager click on <Quick Connect>.
figure 25
(3) Manually enter the IP address. Click <Connect>.


Repair and Service
(4) The system starts the connection.

(5) Log in to the remote CR QS 3.5 system as administrator.
(6) In the right window the desktop of the remote CR QS system appears. On the
left you can perform various tasks.
figure 26


Repair and Service
5 Uninterruptible Power Supply
5.1 Important Remarks to be considered before Installation
NOTE:
When you receive the UPS, make sure the package is not damaged.
Refer to the following label on the package in case of damage.
! CAUTION IF DAMAGED
BATTERIES, NON-SPILLABLE
PACKEGES, CHRUSHED, PUNCTURED, OR TORN SUCH
THAT CONTENTS ARE REVEALED, SHOULD BE SET
ASIDE IN AN ISOLATED AREA AND BE INSPECTED Pb
BY A QUALIFIED PERSON. IF THE PACKAGE IS
DEEMED TO BE NOT SHIPPABLE, CONTENTS SHALL BATTERY IS NOT
CONNECTED
BE PROMPTLY COLLECTED, SEGRATED, AND EITHER
THE CONSIGNOR OR CONSIGNEE CONTACTED.
figure 27: warning label on the package of the UPS
NOTE:
• In compliance with transport regulations, all UPS must be shipped with
disconnected batteries.
• For the internal battery connection refer to the “Read Me First” file enclosed to
the UPS.


Repair and Service
5.2 Display and Connectors of Powerware 5115 UPS
Front view:
1. Main switch
1
2. Test- / Alarm reset
2
3. Operating indicator
4. Indicator battery operated
3
5. Overload indicator
4
6. Maintenance indicator, battery 5
6
figure 28
Rear view:
(Type PW 5115 750 VA)
1. Plug for non-heating apparatus
(10 A / IEC 320 input)
2. Overcurrent protection (input fuse)
3. Ventilator
4. Communication interface
5. DIP - switch
6. Network transient protection
7. Four sockets for non-heating
apparatus (10 A / IEC 320)
All other types of PW 5115 are described in the user manual, which is enclosed to the
UPS delivery.


Repair and Service
5.3 Cable Connection to UPS
(1) Check before the installation if battery of the UPS is loaded!

NOTE:
Battery test, see user manual which is enclosed to the UPS delivery
(2) Switch off the PC

(3) To connect the UPS to the CR QS 3.5 system use the cable labeled
A349050.0 or cable labeled A354684.1.
NOTE:
CR QS 3.5 runs on Windows XP. The UI is also from Microsoft
(i.e. the built-in power management tool). A special cable is required for the
communication between CR QS 3.5 and UPS.
A standard serial cable connection from UPS to PC does not work with
CR QS 3.5 and Windows XP.
figure 30: Pin Assignment for cable A349050.0
figure 31: Pin Assignment for cable A354684.1


Repair and Service
CAUTION:
When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical
environments a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in
different localities. If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can
cause a HAZARD for the OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
connected to the same power source.
Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power Source as
the PC .
(4) Switch on the PC and the UPS.
5.4 System Settings for UPS
NOTE:
The following section gives information about the system settings for the UPS on the
CR QS 3.5.
To run the UPS, no additional driver software needs to be installed, but the following
system settings are fundamental to be set correctly:
(1) Select Settings Æ Control panel Æ Power options

(2) Select UPS tab and click <Select> button.
figure 32


Repair and Service
(3) Enter the following values:
• Select manufacturer: Generic

• select model: Custom
• select the correct COM port:
figure 33
(4) Click <Next> to continue with the procedure.
(5) Check boxes according to the screenshot beside and click <Finish>.
figure 34


Repair and Service
(6) Select: Settings Æ Control panel Æ Power options

(7) Select UPS tab and click <Configure> button.
(8) Check boxes and set time durations according to the screenshot beside and click
<OK>.
figure 35
(9) To make the changes effective a restart of the system is necessary.


Repair and Service
5.5 Technical Data
5.5.1 Load Table
Load (%) Battery Run Time (min)

30 28
50 17
58 13
65 12
70 4
5.5.2 Measured Values for Power Consumption
Dell 420
Maximum 500 mA
Idle 450 mA
Optiplex GX110
Maximum 300 mA
Idle 200 mA
Monitor (19”)
Maximum 650 mA
Power save 50 mA
Monitor Siemens HB
Maximum 530 mA
Power save 25 mA


Repair and Service
5.6 Powerware Service Contact
5.6.1 New Return Addresses for Warranty Exchange of Powerware UPS Devices
shipped after May 2004
NOTE:
Warranty period is 24 months from delivery to Agfa.
To return Powerware UPS devices for warranty exchanges follow these instructions:
(1) Download the UPS Eaton Fax Notification form from MedNet.
MedNet path:
Computed Radiography/General CR Info/General Documentation
CR/Procedure/UPS – Eaton Fax Notification form
Link: click here
(2) Fill in all necessary information into the form.
(3) Send the notification form by Fax or E-mail to EPG.
You will find the Fax number on the form.
Alternatively the Fax Notification form can also be sent by E-mail to the
following addresses:
KarinKoerkel@eaton.com
ChristinaGrau@eaton.com
(4) After notifying EPG, the defective device must be send back to EPG in Achern,
Germany.
EPG address: Eaton Power Quality GmbH
Reparaturwerkstatt
Karl-Bold-Str. 40
77855 Achern
Germany
NOTE:
If defective UPS is not sent back within 20 days to Germany, the replacement unit will
be invoiced.


Repair and Service
By serial number:
For systems shipped after May 2004 and higher serial numbers as indicated
(underlined) in the table below have to be returned to the address of EPG Germany in
order to receive a warranty replacement unit.
Type Serial Number

PW 5115-750 VA / 230 V UX392A0 061
PW 5115-750 VA / 120 V UV037A0 008
UV155A0 122
UW074A0 209
UW235A0 237
UW353A0 293
UW373A0 549
UW411A0 155
UW445A0 001
UW502A0 361
UX052A1 321
UX095A0 346
UX103A0 013
UX133A0 291
UX174A0 057
UX194A0 061
UX215A0 017
UX232A0 091
UX351A0 129
PW 5125-2200 VA / 230 V UW101A0 103
UW335A0 028
UX044A0 025
UX173A0 013
UX195A0 091
PW 5125-2200 VA / 120 V UX012A0 213
UW374A0 060


Repair and Service
If you have additional questions, here the service contact at Eaton Power Quality
GmbH (Powerware Germany):
Mrs. Christina Grau
Tel.: +49 7841 604 - 323
Fax: +49 7841 604 - 5510
Email: ChristinaGrau@eaton.com
http://www.powerware.de
5.6.2 Warranty Exchange for Devices, shipped until May 2004 and for Systems used in
IMPAX
For systems shipped until May 2004 or for all systems used in IMPAX portfolio, please
return as before to the old address:
PK Electronics nv
Leuvensesteenweg 568
B-2812 Muizen (Mechelen)
Belgium
Tel.: +32 15 44 55 20
Fax: +32 15 44 55 59
Email: m.christien@pke.be
An RMA number is needed for that return address. You can request the RMA at:
http://www.rma.powerware.com
5.6.3 Disconnecting of an UPS

In order to avoid possible booting problems a deactivation of the UPS Software is
necessary before disconnecting the UPS. After installation of the new unit an activation
has to be done. For details refer to the respective Technical Documentation.
5.6.4 Powerware Contacts globally

In case of an UPS out of warranty it may be cheaper to call the nearest service center
and send the UPS there instead of sending it to Germany.
Addresses of all service centers see:
CR Serviceplan for UPS - Eaton Powerware


Repair and Service
6 List of Tested Storage Providers, DICOM MWL Connections and

Supported Printers in CR QS 3.5
This section lists the released printer definition files (ppd-files), tested
storage providers, and tested DICOM MWL connections for CR QS 3.5.
NOTE:
For the installation and configuration procedure of the storage providers, Dicom MWL
connections and printer definition files on CR QS system
refer to the respective Connectivity Release Document in MedNet, Healthcare Library.
6.1 Tested Storage Providers

All the storage providers listed below have been tested with CR QS software.
Supplier System Connectivity Release

Document
A.L.I. Ultra PACS 4.5 000717
Agfa IMPAX 4.1/4.5\Web1000 000506
Agfa IMPAX 4.5 SP4 001040
Agfa IMPAX 4.5 SP5 001040
Agfa IMPAX 5.2 001040
Agfa IMPAX 6.0 001040
Amicas Archive 000825
Cedara I-Store 000715
CPSI Image Link 001017
DR Systems Catapult V.4 B.117 and V.5 B57 000768
Emageon Image Archive 000716
GE Pathspeed 8.1 000697
GE Radworks 5.1 000697
Fuji Synapse PACS 000740


Repair and Service

Document
Inovit Inopacs 000950
Kodak Archive Manager 000613
Kodak AutoRad NT 4.0/4.1 000614
McKesson Horizon Medical Imaging 5.0 001014
Merge Fusion Server 1.27.0.41 000983
Philips Intellistore 000713/000714

(Marconi/Algotec)
Philips MxView 000712

(Marconi/Algotec)
Philips Easy Access 7.2, 8.2, 9.2, 10.1 and 000761

10.2
Philips iSite 3.3.1 001072
Philips iSite 3.5 001070
Siemens MagicView 300 VA42B 001032
Siemens MagicView 1000 VE50 001067
Siemens Sienet Cosmos VAB15A 001071
Siemens Sienet Sky VA50 001066
Storcomm Image Access 4.2 000765
US.Department of VistA 3.0 000767

Veteran Affairs
US.Department of VistA 4.1 000893

Veteran Affairs
Varian Vision 6.5 001042


Repair and Service
6.2 Tested Dicom MWL Connections

All the Dicom MWL providers listed below have been tested with CR QS software.

Document
A.L.I./McKesson Ultra PACS 4.6 000655
Agfa Agfa Qdoc 5.3.4 000992
Amicas Vision Server V3 and V4 000825
CPSI ImageLink RIS 042 001017
DR Systems Inc. DICOM Catapult Modality 00901

Worklist 5.0
IDX Imaging Suite MWS 4.0 000905
Inovit Inoris 000950
Shimadzu SiMWM 1.0 000990
Shimadzu SimClinic Future/i 2.0.0.6 000959
Siemens IWM VB20A 001071
Storcomm Inc. ImageAccess 4.3.2 000900
US.Department of Veteran Affairs VistA 000893


Repair and Service
6.3 Supported Printers

All the printers listed below have been tested with CR QS software.
Printers Connectivity Release Corresponding

Document ppd-files
AGFA DI2000 000503 AGDI2000.ppd
AGFA DI4500M 001077 AGD4500M.ppd
AGFA LR3300 000503 AGLR3300.ppd
AGFA LR5200 000503 AGLR5200.ppd
AGFA DRYSTAR SI100 000690 AGSI1001.ppd
AGFA DRYSTAR SI400 000690 AGSI4001.ppd
AGFA LP400 000620 AGLP4001.ppd
AGFA LR3300 (MG3000) 000964 AGLR3300.ppd
AGFA LR3300 (LRDC) 000503 AGLR3300.ppd
AGFA LR5200 (LRDC) 000503 AGLR5200.ppd
AGFA LR5200 (MG3000) 000964 AGLR5200.ppd
Codonics NP1600/1660M 000739 CODN1600.ppd

CODN1660.ppd
Codonics HORIZON 000857 CODNHRZN.ppd
Fuji CR-LP D 000730 FFCRLPD.ppd

(Japan only)
Fuji CR-LP 415 000730 FFCR415.ppd
(Japan only)
Fuji FL-IM D 000730 FFFLIMD.ppd
Fuji FL-IM DM 000730 FFFLIMDM.ppd
Fuji FL-IM 3543II 000730 FFIM3543.ppd
Fuji CR-DP L 000730 FFCRDPL.ppd
(Japan only)
Fuji FM-DP L 000730 FFFMDPL.ppd
Fuji CR-DP3543T 000730 FFCRDP.ppd
(Japan only)
Fuji CR-DP T 000730 FFCRDPT.ppd
(Japan only)


Repair and Service
Printers Connectivity Corresponding

Release Document ppd-files
Fuji FM-DP3543 000730 FFDP3543.ppd
Fuji FM-DP2636 000730 FFDP2636.ppd
Fuji Drypix 1000 000730 FFDP1000.ppd
KODAK Dryview IM8100 000449 KDIM8100.ppd

KODAK KELP1120 000448 KDLP2180.ppd
KODAK MLP190 000819 KDMLP190.ppd
KODAK 3M_8150 000449 KDIM8150.ppd
KODAK HQ969 000449 KDHQ0969.ppd
Konica DryPro 722 000720 KONIC722.ppd

Konica DryPro 751/752 000903 KONIC751.ppd
Konica DryPro 771 001027 KONIC771.ppd
Konica Printlink II 000902 KONIC722.ppd
Sony UP-DF500 001080 SONDF500.ppd
NOTE:
All Printer Definition Files and the printermodel.xml file can be downloaded from
MedNet, GSO Library under:
Computed Radiography Æ CR workstations Æ CR QS 3.5 Æ Freeware Æ Printer
Definition Files.


Repair and Service
DD+DIS302.05E Troubleshooting
Information sheet
The chapters
• 3.3 – Troubleshooting
• 3.9 – Frequently Asked Questions
of the complete Service Manual of CR QS 3.5 have been replaced by the

Troubleshooting Guide No. 1 for CR QS 3.5 – DD+DIS212.07E.
For any informational requests please refer to the above mentioned document.

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR Quality Systems 3.5 Chapter 3.3

Chapter 3.4
Imaging Services
Acceptance Test

Type 4406/421

This document describes the Acceptance Test Procedures for the CR QS 3.5 Server
and Client and contains the Acceptance Test Protocols.
Revision Date
2.0 01-2008 Initial Release
Document Title
n.a. n.a.


eq_03-5_replacements_e_template_v02
Repair and Service
DD+DIS167.07E Acceptance Test
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURE OF CR QS 3.5 – SERVER............................................5

1.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................................5
1.1.1 Customer Information ...............................................................................................................6
1.1.2 Installer Information ..................................................................................................................6
1.2 Inventory ...................................................................................................................................7
1.2.1 Software Inventory ....................................................................................................................7
1.2.2 Hardware Inventory...................................................................................................................7
1.3 Checklist....................................................................................................................................8
1.3.1 Preliminary Checks ...................................................................................................................8
1.3.2 Establish/Test Network Connectivity ........................................................................................8
1.3.3 Testing of CR QS Server ..........................................................................................................9
1.4 Remarks..................................................................................................................................10
1.4.1 Remarks of the Field Service Engineer ..................................................................................10
1.4.2 Remarks of the Application Specialists...................................................................................10
1.4.3 Remarks of the Customer Representative..............................................................................10
1.4.4 Open issues are escalated .....................................................................................................11
1.5 Satisfactory Completion of System Acceptance Test .............................................................11
2 ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURE OF CR QS 3.5 - CLIENT.............................................12

2.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................12
2.1.1 Customer Information .............................................................................................................13
2.1.2 Installer Information ................................................................................................................13
2.2 Inventory .................................................................................................................................14
2.2.1 Software Inventory ..................................................................................................................14
2.2.2 Hardware Inventory.................................................................................................................14
2.3 Checklist..................................................................................................................................15
2.3.1 Preliminary Checks .................................................................................................................15
2.3.2 Establish/Test Network Connectivity ......................................................................................15
2.3.3 Testing of CR QS Client..........................................................................................................16
2.4 Remarks..................................................................................................................................17


Repair and Service
2.4.1 Remarks of the Field Service Engineer ..................................................................................17
2.4.2 Remarks of the Application Specialists...................................................................................17
2.4.3 Remarks of the Customer Representative..............................................................................17
2.4.4 Open issues are escalated .....................................................................................................18
2.5 Satisfactory Completion of System Acceptance Test .............................................................18


Repair and Service
DD+DIS167.07E Acceptance Test - Server
1 Acceptance Test Procedure of CR QS 3.5 – Server
1.1 Introduction
The objective behind an Acceptance Test Protocol (ATP) is to verify that a system has
been installed and configured correctly and that it meets performance specifications.
The ATP is not designed to test the features & functionality unless the environment in
which the device is installed can affect the functionality. For example, if one of the
specifications for a device is to transfer certain files over the network in a given time,
tests must be designed into the ATP to test the integrity of the network and the meeting
of this specification.
The ATP can be used as a manufacturer's tool to help meet a critical FDA regulation:
Sec. 820.170 "Installation" of the US Food & Drug Administration states:
(a) Each manufacturer of a device requiring installation shall establish and maintain
adequate installation and inspection instructions, and where appropriate test
procedures. Instructions and procedures shall include directions for ensuring
proper installation so that the device will perform as intended after installation. The
manufacturer shall distribute the instructions and procedures with the device or
otherwise make them available to the person(s) installing the device.
(b) The person installing the device shall ensure that the installation, inspection, and
any required testing are performed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and procedures and shall document the inspection and any test results
to demonstrate proper installation.


Repair and Service
DD+DIS167.07E Acceptance Test Server
1.1.1 Customer Information
Site Name
Street Address
City, State, Zip
Contact Name & Title
Contact Phone
Contact Email
Purchase Order #
1.1.2 Installer Information
Installer Name & Title

Installer Phone
Installer Email


Repair and Service
1.2 Inventory
1.2.1 Software Inventory
Gather shipped software and store in a secure location.

Record of installed software at time of installation
NOTE:
It is important to refer to the MedNet immediately prior to any installation as there may
be late-breaking information that applies to your installation.
NOTE:
If software is to be left in the possession of the customer. Please enter the name of the
individual to which the software has been given under "Guardian" and the location at
which the software will be stored for safe keeping.
Software Version Guardian
1.2.2 Hardware Inventory
Record of installed Hardware at time of installation
PC make & type

CPU type
Clock Speed
Ram
Disks
Graphic card
Monitor
UPS


Repair and Service
1.3 Checklist
1.3.1 Preliminary Checks
Test Confirmed
Unpack; check consignment for damage and completeness
Make electrical connections and terminations
Check/set date, time and time zone settings
1.3.2 Establish/Test Network Connectivity
Obtain an IP address, subnet mask for the CR QS 3.5 Server from the network
administrator. If DNS is to be used, obtain the DNS server IP address and request that
the CR QS 3.5 Server IP address be entered into the DNS server.
IP Address: ____:____:____:____
Subnet Mask: ____:____:____:____
Gateway: ____:____:____:____
Workgroup Name:
Test Confirmed
Enter the IP address, subnet mask, etc via the install script (see
installation manual).
Check for successful Ping of the Network Switch and/or other systems


Repair and Service
1.3.3 Testing of CR QS Server
Test Confirmed
Check/adapt GUI layout
Import ‘Starter’ XML file via Configuration viewer
Check/install devices via configuration viewer
Check/install GUI templates
Check/install all purchased software licenses
Check/configure RIS (if applicable)
Check/configure ADB (if applicable)
Check monitor calibration using the SMPTE pattern
Check basic functionalities of the CR QS 3.5 Server
Test ID Tablet for connectivity (if applicable)
Test of Remote Service Capability (Check here if not applicable )
Test Confirmed
Test accessibility over the network for Remote Desktop
Test accessibility over the network for PCAnyWhere
Test accessibility over the network for the FTP-server
Test the remote service connection by connection through the SRSS
and/or other connection type (remote desktop, FTP, ping, …)
Test of UPS (Check here if not applicable )
Test Confirmed
• Allow UPS to build up a full charge
• Check the configuration of the Windows Power Option
• Check the serial cable which connects the server and the UPS
Disconnect external power to the UPS and ensure that the UPS continues
to power the system.
After the configured minutes of removing external power to the UPS,
ensure that the Windows Power option performs an orderly shutdown of
the system


Repair and Service
1.4 Remarks
1.4.1 Remarks of the Field Service Engineer
1.4.2 Remarks of the Application Specialists
1.4.3 Remarks of the Customer Representative


Repair and Service
1.4.4 Open issues are escalated
Ensure that all open topics which can not be solved on-site are escalated via
the standard Service Escalation channels.
Review all open topics of the site and check if cases have been placed in the
AGFA service tracking tool (Powerhelp).
1.5 Satisfactory Completion of System Acceptance Test
The tests outlined in this document have all been executed and have all
passed successfully indicating that the product is installed and configured
correctly.
AGFA Service and Applications representative has reviewed with us the
procedures by which our institution shall contact Agfa for warranty & post
warranty support.
Name of Agfa Field Service Responsible Title
Signature Date
Name of Agfa Applications Responsible Title
Signature Date
Name of Customer Responsible Title
Signature Date


Repair and Service
DD+DIS167.07E Acceptance Test - Client
2 Acceptance Test Procedure of CR QS 3.5 - Client
2.1 Introduction
The objective behind an Acceptance Test Protocol (ATP) is to verify that a system has
been installed and configured correctly and that it meets performance specifications.
The ATP is not designed to test the features & functionality unless the environment in
which the device is installed can affect the functionality. For example, if one of the
specifications for a device is to transfer certain files over the network in a given time,
tests must be designed into the ATP to test the integrity of the network and the meeting
of this specification.
The ATP can be used as a manufacturer's tool to help meet a critical FDA regulation:
Sec. 820.170 "Installation" of the US Food & Drug Administration states
(c) Each manufacturer of a device requiring installation shall establish and maintain
adequate installation and inspection instructions, and where appropriate test
procedures. Instructions and procedures shall include directions for ensuring
proper installation so that the device will perform as intended after installation. The
manufacturer shall distribute the instructions and procedures with the device or
otherwise make them available to the person(s) installing the device.
(d) The person installing the device shall ensure that the installation, inspection, and
any required testing are performed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and procedures and shall document the inspection and any test results
to demonstrate proper installation.


Repair and Service
2.1.1 Customer Information
Site Name
Street Address
City, State, Zip
Contact Name & Title
Contact Phone
Contact Email
Purchase Order #
2.1.2 Installer Information
Installer Name & Title

Installer Phone
Installer Email


Repair and Service
DD+DIS167.07E Acceptance Test Client
2.2 Inventory
2.2.1 Software Inventory
Gather shipped software and store in a secure location.

Record of installed software at time of installation
NOTE:
It is important to refer to the MedNet immediately prior to any installation as there may
be late-breaking information that applies to your installation.
NOTE:
If software is to be left in the possession of the customer. Please enter the name of
the individual to which the software has been given under "Guardian" and the location
at which the software will be stored for safe keeping.
Software Version Guardian
2.2.2 Hardware Inventory
Record of installed Hardware at time of installation
PC make & type

CPU type
Clock Speed
Ram
Disks
Graphic card
Monitor
UPS


Repair and Service
2.3 Checklist
2.3.1 Preliminary Checks
Test Confirmed
Unpack; check consignment for damage and completeness
Make electrical connections and terminations
Check/set date, time and time zone settings
2.3.2 Establish/Test Network Connectivity
Obtain an IP address, subnet mask for the CR QS 3.5 Client from the network
administrator. If DNS is to be used, obtain the DNS server IP address and request that
the CR QS 3.5 Client IP address be entered into the DNS server.
IP Address: ____:____:____:____
Subnet Mask: ____:____:____:____
Gateway: ____:____:____:____
Workgroup Name:
Test Confirmed
Enter the IP address, subnet mask, etc via the install script (see
installation manual).
Join the client to workgroup (see installation manual).
Check for successful Ping of the Network Switch and/or other systems
(especially the domain server)


Repair and Service
2.3.3 Testing of CR QS Client
Test Confirmed
Check/adapt GUI layout
Check/install all purchased software licenses
Check monitor calibration using the SMPTE pattern
Check basic functionalities of the CR QS 3.5 Client
Test ID Tablet for connectivity (if applicable)
Test of Remote Service Capability (Check here if not applicable )
Test Confirmed
Test accessibility over the network for Remote Desktop
Test accessibility over the network for PCAnyWhere
Test the remote service connection by connection through the SRSS
and/or other connection type (remote desktop, ping, …)
Test of UPS (Check here if not applicable )
Test Confirmed
• Allow UPS to build up a full charge
• Check the configuration of the Windows Power Option
• Check the serial cable which connects the server and the UPS
Disconnect external power to the UPS and ensure that the UPS continues
to power the system.
After the configured minutes of removing external power to the UPS,
ensure that the Windows Power option performs an orderly shutdown of
the system


Repair and Service
2.4 Remarks
2.4.1 Remarks of the Field Service Engineer
2.4.2 Remarks of the Application Specialists
2.4.3 Remarks of the Customer Representative


Repair and Service
2.4.4 Open issues are escalated
Ensure that all open topics which can not be solved on-site are escalated via
the standard Service Escalation channels.
Review all open topics of the site and check if cases have been placed in the
AGFA service tracking tool (Powerhelp).
2.5 Satisfactory Completion of System Acceptance Test
The tests outlined in this document have all been executed and have all
passed successfully indicating that the product is installed and configured
correctly.
AGFA Service and Applications representative has reviewed with us the
procedures by which our institution shall contact Agfa for warranty & post
warranty support.
Name of Agfa Field Service Responsible Title
Signature Date
Name of Agfa Applications Responsible Title
Signature Date
Name of Customer Responsible Title
Signature Date


Repair and Service
DD+DIS302.05E Replacement / Repair Procedures
Chapter 3.5
Chapter 3.5 is not applicable for CR Quality System 3.5.
Printed copies of this document are not controlled.

The reader should always refer to MedNet to ensure that they are working with the latest copy of this document.
Repair and Service
DD+DIS302.05E Adjustments and Calibrations
Chapter 3.6
List of Contents
1 “Barco Optimizer” Calibration Tool ................................... 1

1.1 About the “Barco Optimizer”................................................................1
1.2 Get to know the “Barco Optimizer”......................................................2
1.2.1 System Function ......................................................................................3
1.2.2 The Graph Luminance / Video Level .......................................................3
1.2.3 The Information Field ...............................................................................4
1.2.4 Grayscale Bar ..........................................................................................4
1.2.5 Optimize Screen ......................................................................................5
1.3 Installation of the “Barco Optimizer” ...................................................5
1.4 Monitor Calibration with the “Barco Optimizer” .................................6
1.4.1 Requirements ..........................................................................................6
1.4.2 Calibrate the Monitor................................................................................7
2 Barco “NioWatch” Tool ....................................................... 9

2.1 About the Barco “NioWatch”................................................................9
2.2 Get to know the “NioWatch” ...............................................................10
2.3 Installation of “NioWatch” ..................................................................10
2.4 Monitor Calibration with the “NioWatch” ..........................................11
2.4.1 Requirements ........................................................................................11
2.4.2 Monitor Calibration.................................................................................12
3 Support of LUT Access...................................................... 14

Repair and Service
1 “Barco Optimizer” Calibration Tool
1.1 About the “Barco Optimizer”

“Barco Optimizer” is a tool that enables you to adjust your monitor system
according to the DICOM Grayscale Display Function Standard specification
without the need for a measurement device.
The tool only works in combination with Barco monitor MFCD1218.
Depending on the settings (e.g. brightness and contrast) of your monitor, the
representation of a grayscale will differ considerably from what is specified in
the DICOM standard.
The “Barco Optimizer” corrects this difference and optimizes the system’s
monitor to obtain DICOM compatibility.
Based on an interactive visual procedure, the “Barco Optimizer” determines

the characteristic display curve and adjusts the entries in the graphics board
LUT (Look Up Table).
NOTE:
Any change in contrast / brightness settings of the monitor makes an
optimization necessary.
Although the “Barco Optimizer” corrects for saturation in black and white, it
is advised to minimize these effects by setting the contrast and brightness to
'acceptable' levels.
A good practice is to adjust contrast and brightness in such a way that you
have a minimum of saturation in black and white for the 'Uncorrected mode'.
Correcting saturation leads to very inefficient use of the look-up table
entries, causing a decrease of the colors that will actually be shown on the
monitor.

Repair and Service
Replacements /Repair Procedures DD+DIS302.05E
1.2 Get to know the “Barco Optimizer”

The tool looks as follows:
figure 1

Chapter 3.6 / 2 CR Quality System 3.5 Edition 2, Revision 0
Repair and Service
1.2.1 System Function

In the System Function field you can choose between the following three
options:
Uncorrected
The LUT on the graphics board (display adapter) is
filled with a linear function. The data written in the
memory of the graphics board is transferred to the
monitor without correction.
DICOM Optimized
The LUT is filled with correction data calculated from
the data gathered during the 'Optimize' procedure. All
data coming from the graphics board memory is
'translated' before being sent to the monitor. Complete
system (graphics board + monitor) behaves according figure 2
to the DICOM Grayscale Display Function Standard.
Gamma 2.2
calculates the LUT table entries to end up with a
Gamma 2.2 system response.
Selecting the ‘Uncorrected’ or ‘Gamma 2.2’ curve results in a brighter image

but some gray levels in the grayscale bar aren’t visibly displayed.
1.2.2 The Graph Luminance / Video Level

The graph shows the System Function
(green) and the Display Function (red).
A graph in this field is shown after the first

calibration process because the Display
Function is calculated based on the
calibration procedure.
When 'Uncorrected' is selected, both

functions are the same. The system
(monitor adapter + monitor) behaves like
the monitor because no correction is done
figure 3
in the look-up table.

Repair and Service
1.2.3 The Information Field

In the “User Info” the name and rights of the person currently logged in are
displayed.
In the “Optimizer Status / Context Sensitive Information” information about the
status of the Optimizer is given. Here, you will also read information on the
different parts of the Optimizer tool as you roll over them with your mouse.
figure 4
1.2.4 Grayscale Bar

On the left side of the “Barco Optimizer” you find the
grayscale bar.
It consists of 21 patches (20 steps) starting from 0%

video to 100% video in steps of 5%.
In 'DICOM Optimized' mode, all 21 patches should be

clearly visible. If this is not the case an optimization is
needed.
After DICOM calibration more gray levels are

visualized.

Repair and Service
1.2.5 Optimize Screen

This is the field where you actually make the
calibration.
figure 5
1.3 Installation of the “Barco Optimizer”
NOTE:
The “Barco Optimizer” tool is delivered on CD together with the Barco
monitor MFCD1218.
(1) Insert the Optimizer CD in the system.

If autorun is enabled, the setup application will start.
If autorun is not enabled, browse the CD-ROM and double-click
the setup.exe.
(2) Click <Next> to start the procedure.
(3) Click <Yes> to accept the License Agreement.
(4) Select the folder where you want to store the software.
(5) Click <Next>.
(6) Click <Finish>.

The DICOM Optimizer is now installed and appears as a separate
tab in the Display Properties Control Panel (right-click desktop Æ
settings Æ advanced Æ tab Barco Dicom Optimizer).

Repair and Service
1.4 Monitor Calibration with the “Barco Optimizer”
1.4.1 Requirements
Make sure your system fulfils the following requirements:
• Windows XP as operating system

• A true color monitor adapter (graphics board) that supports LUT access.
Refer to section 3 for an overview of systems and video cards which
support LUT access.
• Barco monitor MFCD1218 (“Barco Optimizer” only works with this
monitor)
• “Barco Optimizer” installed on the system
Make sure the following conditions are fulfilled during the calibration process:
• Log in with an account with administrative rights.

• Sit in a working position in front of the monitor.
• Directly look a the monitor.
• Constant ambient light intensity in the room where QS is set up.

Repair and Service
1.4.2 Calibrate the Monitor

(2) Go to Display Properties Æ Settings Æ Advanced Section.
(3) Select tab Barco DICOM Optimizer.
figure 6
(4) Check DICOM Optimized in the field System Functions.

Repair and Service
(5) Click <Optimize…>

The following window opens. Follow the instructions “How to use the
Optimizer”.
figure 7
NOTE:
It will take some exercise to get used to the adjustment procedure, take the
time to become familiar with it.
Slightly closing the eyes to unsharpen your view as well as increasing the
viewing distance can make the adjustment easier (especially the middle
tones - the first point is the most difficult one to adjust).
Be sure to look as perpendicular as possible to the screen, especially when
adjusting the darker tones.

Repair and Service
2 Barco “NioWatch” Tool
2.1 About the Barco “NioWatch”

“NioWatch” is a tool that enables you to adjust your monitor system according
to the DICOM Grayscale Display Function Standard specification without the
need for a measurement device.
The “NioWatch” tool is delivered together with the Barco MFCD1219

touch screen monitor.
Depending on the settings (e.g. brightness and contrast) of your monitor, the
representation of a grayscale will differ considerably from what is specified in
the DICOM standard.
The “NioWatch” corrects this difference and optimizes the system’s monitor to
obtain DICOM compatibility).
Based on an interactive visual procedure, the “NioWatch” tool determines the

characteristic display curve and adjusts the entries in the graphics board
LUT (Look Up Table).
NOTE:
Any change in contrast / brightness settings of the monitor makes an
optimization necessary.
Although the “NioWatch” tool corrects for saturation in black and white, it is
advised to minimize these effects by setting the contrast and brightness to
'acceptable' levels.
A good practice is to adjust contrast and brightness in such a way that you
have a minimum of saturation in black and white for the 'Uncorrected mode'.
Correcting saturation leads to very inefficient use of the look-up table entries,
causing a decrease of the colors that will actually be shown on the monitor.

Repair and Service
2.2 Get to know the “NioWatch”

In the “NioWatch” you can view information about your monitor and monitor
controller. Here you can also select a monitor function, control monitor
luminance and calibrate the monitor.
2.3 Installation of “NioWatch”

NOTE:
The “NioWatch” tool is delivered on CD together with the Barco monitor
MFCD1219.
(1) Insert the “NioWatch” CD in the system.

If autorun is enabled, the setup application will start.
If autorun is not enabled, browse the CD-ROM and double-click
the setup.exe.
(2) Check the “NioWatch” Setup checkbox (uncheck all the other
checkboxes (BarcoMed Driver and Manuals and Release Notes).
(3) Click <Install>.
(4) Click <Next> on the welcome screen.
(5) Click <Yes> to accept the License Agreement.
(6) Click <Next> (user name, organisation, anyone who uses this
computer).
(7) Select Complete installation and click <Next>.
(8) Click <Install> to begin the installation.
(9) Click <Finish> and restart the system.

After a successful installation the “NioWatch” logo appears in the
status bar:
On a PC with Matrox video card you can start monitor calibration now.

Repair and Service
On a PC with nVidia video card an additional patch has to be installed on the

PC in order to make the “NioWatch” calibration tool run on the system. Follow
the instructions below to install the patch.
(1) On MedNet GSO Library go to

Computed Radiography\CR workstation\QS 3.0\Freeware\
Patch for NioWatch with nVidia card.
(2) Unzip the zip file.
(3) Double-click on K5401892_02_v01_04_applicationsw.exe file.
(4) Click <Next> to start the installation of the patch.
(5) Click <Finish> to confirm installation of the patch.
Now the monitor calibration is also possible on a system with

nVidia video card.
2.4 Monitor Calibration with the “NioWatch”
2.4.1 Requirements
Make sure your system fulfils the following requirements:
• Windows XP as operating system

• A true color monitor adapter (graphics board) that supports LUT access.
Refer to section 3 for an overview of systems and video cards which
support LUT access.
• Barco monitor MFCD1219 (“NioWatch” only works with this monitor)
• “NioWatch” installed on the system
Make sure the following conditions are fulfilled during the calibration process:
• Log in with an account with administrative rights.

• Sit in a working position in front of the monitor.
• Directly look at the monitor.
• Ensure constant ambient light intensity in the room where QS is set up.

Repair and Service
2.4.2 Monitor Calibration

NOTE:
It will take some exercise to get used to the adjustment procedure, take
the time to become familiar with it.
Slightly closing the eyes to unsharpen your view as well as increasing
the viewing distance can make the adjustment easier (especially the
middle tones - the first point is the most difficult one to adjust).
Be sure to look as perpendicular as possible to the screen, especially
when adjusting the darker tones.
(1) Right-click on the “NioWatch” icon in the status bar and select the
“Display settings” option.
The following window opens:
figure 8
(2) Go to tab Calibration and click <Calibrate>.

Repair and Service
(3) In the following window choose „Visually”.
figure 9
(4) Use the slider to equalize the intensity of the box to the bitmap.
When you feel that the bitmap disappears in its background, click
<Set point 1 of 20>.
figure 10
(5) Repeat the process until all 20 set points are set.
(6) Click <Ok> to save the calibration settings and close the window.

Repair and Service
3 Support of LUT Access
Refer to this list for CR QS 3.5 server systems (upgraded systems and
systems staged in production):
Model Video card LUT

support
Dell Precision WS420 MATROX MILLENIUM no
G400 DH 16MB
Dell Precision WS420 MATROX MILLENIUM no
+ CD R/W G400 DH 16MB
Dell Precision WS420/933 MATROX G450 yes
+ CD R/W MAX DH 32MB
Dell Precision WS 530 nVidia GForce2 GTS Plus no
1.7 GHz 32MB DDR
DELL PRECISION WS530 ATI RADEON VE yes
2.0 GHz 32MB VRAM
2 GHz / COM3 32MB VRAM
2.4 GHz 32MB VRAM
DELL PRECISION WS650 nVidia Quadro yes
2.8 GHz / 1 GB RAM 280NVS DVI/VGA
DELL PowerEdge 700 Millenium G450 yes
2.8 GHz / 1 GB PCI 32Mb DDR memory
DELL Precision WS 670 Matrox G550 PCI yes
Precision WS670 nVidia NVS280 PCI-e yes
3.4 GHz / 2 MB / nVidia

Repair and Service
Refer to this list for CR QS 3.5 client systems (upgraded systems and systems
staged in production):
Model Video card LUT

support
Dell Optiplex Gx110+ MATROX G200 no
733/MDT 8 MB PCI VIDEO
Dell Optiplex Gx110+ MATROX G200 no
866/MDT 8 MB PCI VIDEO
Dell Optiplex Gx150+ MT onboard Intel 815 no
Dell Optiplex Gx150+/1 GHz SFF onboard Intel 815 no
Dell Optiplex Gx260+ 32 MB 4 XAGP ATI yes
2.4 GHz SFF Radeon VE Multi Monitor
with DVI Out
DELL Optiplex GX260 32 MB 4 XAGP ATI yes
2.4 GHZ / SMT Radeon VE Multi Monitor
with DVI Out
Dell Gx270 SFF on board + DVI adaptor no
256 MB Intel(R) 82865G Graphics
Controller
Dell Gx270 SMT DVI adaptor no
256 MB Intel(R) 82865G Graphics
Controller
Dell Gx270 SFF Intel(R) 82865G Graphics no
1 GB Controller
Dell Gx270 SMT Intel(R) 82865G Graphics no
1 GB Controller
Dell Gx270 SFF Matrox G450 yes
1 GB - Matrox G450 DVI Low Profile AGP
Dell Gx270 SMT Matrox G450 video card yes
1 GB - Matrox G450
Dell Gx620 SMT Integrated Intel Media yes
1GB/on board video/no serial ports Accelerator 950

Chapter 3.7
Imaging Services
Software Menus, Settings

4406/421

This document describes the menus and settings of operating system and application
software of a CR QS 3.5.
TIP:
If you view this document on a PC, arrows are displayed:
Use those for navigating within the document.

2.1 01-2008 • Added safety note for ID-Tablet, details see
section 5.4.1.
• Added information concerning the partial XML import,
details see section 5.1.18.
Document Title
n.a. n.a.


eq_03-7_menus-setting_e_template_v02
Repair and Service
DD+DIS302.05E Software Menus, Settings
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


01-2008 4406/421 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................6
2 HARDWARE.............................................................................................................................7
3 INTEGRATION OF A CR QS SERVER OR CLIENT INTO A DOMAIN ...................................8
3.1 Information Gathering ...............................................................................................................8
3.2 Checklist....................................................................................................................................8
3.3 Workgroup and Domain Configuration ...................................................................................11
3.3.1 Configure Workgroup..............................................................................................................11
3.3.2 Rename the QS Computers....................................................................................................14
3.3.3 Integrate QS Computers into a Domain..................................................................................16
3.3.4 Verify if the Changes have been effective ..............................................................................19
4 STARTUP OF THE SYSTEM .................................................................................................20

4.1 How to log on and start up the QS..........................................................................................20
4.2 User Configuration ..................................................................................................................21
4.2.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................21
4.2.2 Create New Users...................................................................................................................22
4.3 Control Center (CC) ................................................................................................................28
4.4 QS Monitor ..............................................................................................................................29
4.5 Message Console ...................................................................................................................30
4.6 SQL Server .............................................................................................................................30
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION..................................................................................................31
5.1 Configurations via Configuration Viewer.................................................................................31
5.1.1 Change Body Part containing non-DICOM conform Characters ............................................32
5.1.2 Configure Digitizer ..................................................................................................................33
5.1.3 Configure ID Viewer................................................................................................................34
5.1.4 Configure Medical Printers......................................................................................................35
5.1.5 Configure Destinations............................................................................................................39
5.1.6 Configure OD and P-value......................................................................................................41
5.1.7 Configure Fast Preview...........................................................................................................49
5.1.8 Import a Hospital Logo............................................................................................................49


Repair and Service
5.1.9 Selecting Option “Auto-delete studies containing rejected Images“ .......................................50
5.1.10 CR Settings .............................................................................................................................51
5.1.11 System Settings - Regional Settings ......................................................................................51
5.1.12 System Security ......................................................................................................................52
5.1.13 License Management..............................................................................................................53
5.1.14 CCCommander .......................................................................................................................55
5.1.15 Quality Monitoring ...................................................................................................................55
5.1.16 System Tools ..........................................................................................................................55
5.1.17 Test all Devices.......................................................................................................................56
5.1.18 Import Partial XML - Adding Study Groups.............................................................................57
5.1.19 Configuration via Cloning........................................................................................................57
5.1.20 Accessing BOExplorer for ASPRO Settings ...........................................................................59
5.1.21 Configuration of Planmed Sophie X-Ray Generators .............................................................60
5.2 Configurations via Image Viewer ............................................................................................61
5.2.1 Select a Hospital Logo ............................................................................................................61
5.2.2 Mark a Study as READ ...........................................................................................................62
5.2.3 Limited Delete Access ............................................................................................................62
5.2.4 Multiple Transmission of one Image to the Same Destination ...............................................63
5.2.5 Draw Horizontal and Vertical Lines.........................................................................................63
5.2.6 Configuration of the Print Composer ......................................................................................63
5.2.7 Reject an Image......................................................................................................................64
5.2.8 Export of an Image/a Study ....................................................................................................65
5.2.9 Import of a Study.....................................................................................................................66
5.3 Export Images in DICOMDIR Format .....................................................................................66
5.4 Configuration via ID Viewer ....................................................................................................67
5.4.1 ID Tablet..................................................................................................................................67
5.5 RIS Configuration....................................................................................................................68
5.5.1 General ...................................................................................................................................68
5.5.2 Configure RIS Connection ......................................................................................................68
5.5.3 Configure RISLink using a Data File.......................................................................................69
5.5.4 Configure RISLink using Call User Program ..........................................................................69


Repair and Service
5.5.5 Configure RISLink using a delimited Worklist.........................................................................70
5.5.6 Configure RISLink using Accession Number..........................................................................70
5.5.7 Configure RISLink using XML Worklist...................................................................................70
5.5.8 RISLink using DMWL Worklist ................................................................................................71
5.5.9 Use RIS as Study Data ...........................................................................................................74
5.5.10 Use automatic Study Selection ...............................................................................................74
5.6 Configure Desktop ..................................................................................................................80
5.6.1 Screensaver ............................................................................................................................80
5.6.2 Desktop Background...............................................................................................................81
5.7 Configure System Settings .....................................................................................................82
5.7.1 Enable/Disable FTP Server ....................................................................................................82
5.7.2 Optimize System Performance ...............................................................................................82
6 AUDIT TRAIL LOGGING ........................................................................................................83

6.1 General ...................................................................................................................................83
6.2 Configure Audit Trail Logging .................................................................................................84
6.3 Configure Security Proxy ........................................................................................................85
6.4 Configure ADB – Tool .............................................................................................................86


Repair and Service
1 Introduction
The CR QS 3.5 is based on the CR QS 3.0. The main changes compared to the
CR QS 3.0 are:
• Windows XP operating system for server and client.
• CR QS 3.5 systems can be operated in a standalone workgroup or be integrated
into an existing hospital domain. The following scenarios are supported:
o Integration of more than five CR QS workgroups in one hospital domain:
For the procedure refer to section 3.
o Integration of CR QS workgroups in several hospital domains more than

five CR QS workgroups per domain possible:
Setting up trusts between the domains will be necessary. Ask the
hospital administrator.
o Integration of CR QS workgroups in several hospital subdomains more than

five CR QS workgroups per subdomain possible:
Setting up trusts between the domains will be necessary. Ask the
hospital administrator.
o Integration of more than five workgroups in a hospital environment:

Configure each CR QS workgroup as destination using the
configuration tool (refer to section 5.1.5).
• ADC QS 2.1 MR4 functionalities:

o Cleanup Studies including Failed Studies (Diskmon)
o Patient Orientation for sending out to PACS Systems changed
o QC Viewer: Combined Force Release
o Print Composer


Repair and Service
• new functionalities:
o fast preview (refer to section 5.1.7)
o DICOM export
o extended storage
o P-values (refer to section 5.1.6)
o extended character set
o improved selection
• changed functionalities:
o black border
o reject analysis toolset
o GUI customization
2 Hardware
The supported hardware for Windows XP-based servers is:

• Dell Precision WS650 midsize tower
• Dell Precision WS670 midsize tower
• Dell Poweredge 700
• or higher
The supported hardware for related clients is:

• Dell Optiplex GX260+ (SMT or SSF)
• Dell Optiplex GX270
• Dell Optiplex GX 620
• or higher
Older hardware versions are not supported because they do not meet the CR QS
application requirements.


Repair and Service
3 Integration of a CR QS Server or Client into a Domain
3.1 Information Gathering
If you want to integrate the CR QS 3.5 workgroup into a hospital domain, you will not
be able to have administrative rights for the hospital domain and thus an effective
cooperation with the hospital’s system administrator is important.
For this, refer to the checklist given below.
3.2 Checklist
NOTE:
• This checklist needs to be used in case a workgroup will be integrated into a
hospital domain.
• In case one or more of the prerequisites on the checklist can not be fulfilled, it is
not possible to integrate the CR QS 3.5 system into the hospital domain.
For the checklist, see following pages.


Repair and Service
Checklist before the integration of a CR QS 3.5 workgroup

into a hospital domain
Site: Pages: 1 of 2
Location: Date:
Goal:
The hospital’s system administrator has all the information he needs from the FSE so the CR QS
workgroup operation is possible within the domain.
The FSE has all the information he needs to integrate the CR QS workgroup into the domain.
Timing:
The checklist has to be worked trough before starting with the integration process.
Prerequisites
Does the domain policy of the hospital domain allow adcqsacct to have
administrative rights on the QS System?
Note: Administrative rights on the domain are not required.
Does the account policy of the hospital domain allow adcqsacct to have no complex

passwords that do not expire?
Does the group policy of the hospital domain allow that the domain’s Firewall will be

disabled for the CR QS?
What needs to be done by the system administrator

Create the following CR QS user groups *:
Group Name Group Scope Group is Has Following
Member of Members
QS Admins domain - gsQSAdmins group
gsQSAdmins global QSAdmins Domain Administrator
user (e.g.
Administrator)

QSServices domain - gsQSServices group
gsQSServices global QSServices Crservice user,
adcqsacct user
QSUsers domain - gsQSUsers group
gsQSUsers global QSUsers …
*The group type should be security group for all groups.
continue next page


Repair and Service
Checklist before the integration of a CR QS workgroup into a

hospital domain
(2 of 2)
Create the following CR QS users (passwords are free, but if allowed, these defaults
can be used):
• adcqsacct (member of group ADCQSacct);
default password: Burrewala
• crservice (member of group QSService);
default password: Agsrvc2ls
• qsuser (member of group QSUsers)
Apply the following settings for the accounts:
User does not have to change the password at the next login.
User can not change password.

Password never expires.
No complexity rules have to be applied for the password.
User account is enabled.
Set up trusts between domains if needed
Information needed from the system administrator

domain name of the domain __________________
user account and password of a domain user which has
the right to integrate computers into the domain __________________
name and IP address of the DNS server __________________
IP address and gateway for the CR QS computers __________________
naming conventions for the CR QS computers __________________
password of the adcqsacct user __________________
password of the crservice user __________________
password of the qsuser user __________________
Remarks:


Repair and Service
3.3 Workgroup and Domain Configuration
REQUIRED TIME:
To integrate a system into a domain: Approx. 20 to 30 min.
NOTE:
f you want to work in a workgroup environment only carry out procedures described
in section 3.3.1 and 3.3.4.
If you want to work in a domain environment carry out all procedures described
in section 3.3.
3.3.1 Configure Workgroup
Carry out the following steps if you want to configure a workgroup.

In case you integrate the QS computers into a domain, the network settings have to be
verified and corrected if necessary. Special attention should be paid to the DNS
settings. If these are wrong, joining the domain may become very hard. The following
steps have to be repeated for every computer that will join the domain.
(1) Go to Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Network and Internet Connections.
figure 1


Repair and Service
(2) Click on the Network connections icon.
figure 2
(3) Right-click on Local Area Connection and choose Properties.
figure 3


Repair and Service
(4) Select Internet Protocol and click on <Properties>.
figure 4
(5) The current IP settings are displayed. Enter the new IP address of the CR QS
server and the Default gateway. Click <OK>.
figure 5
(6) In the next window click <Close> to activate the settings. No reboot is needed to
change the IP settings.


Repair and Service
3.3.2 Rename the QS Computers
In case there is a naming convention for the hospital domain, the name of the
computers will have to be changed before joining the domain. If this is the case repeat
the following steps for every computer that needs to change computer name.
(1) Right-click on the My Computer icon and choose Properties.
(2) Select the tab Computer Name. Here you see the current computer name and
that the computer is member of a workgroup.
Click <Change> to change the computer name.
figure 6


Repair and Service
(3) Enter the new computer name and click <OK>.
figure 7
(4) Confirm the following message with <OK>.
figure 8
(5) Click <Yes>.
figure 9

The Computer name and IP settings have been changed now. Note that the computer
is still member of the workgroup.

Repair and Service
3.3.3 Integrate QS Computers into a Domain
Now that the preparation work has been completed, the computers can be integrated
into a domain.
As example the domain xray.hosp.com, and QS computer Qsserver1 are used. There
is no order in which the computers have to be integrated into the domain. Just
remember to integrate them all.
(1) Right click on the My computer icon and choose properties.

(2) Select the tab Computer Name
(3) Click on <Change> to join the domain.
figure 10


Repair and Service
(4) Check Domain and fill in the domain name of the domain that will be joined.
figure 11
(5) Click on <OK>.

(6) A request for an account with the necessary permissions on the domain will pop
up.
figure 12
(7) Fill in the domain user name and the corresponding password.


Repair and Service
(8) The domain has been joined. Click <OK>.
figure 13
(9) A reboot is needed to activate the change from workgroup to domain

membership.
figure 14
(10) Click <OK> to reboot and log in again as administrator.

(11) Go to D:\AGFA\ADC-QS\Bin. Run SecSet.exe.
You will need the passwords obtained from the Checklist.
(12) Reboot the system


Repair and Service
3.3.4 Verify if the Changes have been effective
(1) Select My Computer Æ Properties Æ tab Computer Name.

Check, if the workgroup/domain name has been changed correctly.
figure 15
(2) Click <OK>.
NOTE:
Repeat the process with all computers which are part of the workgroup.


Repair and Service
4 Startup of the System
Start up System with boot-floppy or CD-ROM

It is the hospital system administrator responsibility to prevent boot-floppy start-up by
non-authorized persons. Possible solution can be a mechanical lock.
Auto-run of CD-ROM drive will be disabled to prevent non-authorized software
installation.
Store Configuration Settings

All configuration settings are stored on a central place. There will be no need to copy
settings to client systems.
4.1 How to log on and start up the QS

For normal QS use you have to log on with a validated username and password and
this on the domain (see log on options). If you log on locally
(on this machine) the client will not find the server.
NOTE:
The gateway is running as soon as the server is powered on, you do not need to be
logged on in order to send images to the server. After log off
(due to time out or intentionally) the QS is still running in the background, images can
still come in.
Log off on the server has no implication on its clients.
When you log on to the system, the QS cluster is activated automatically and the QC
Viewer will be opened. No user identification is needed anymore. The different
components can be opened without authentication. The log on authentication of
windows is used by the QS.
The way you log on will determine what you will be able to do. If you have not enough
rights to do certain things, you have to log off and log on again as a different user with
more rights.


Repair and Service
4.2 User Configuration
4.2.1 Introduction
The CR QS cluster is configured as a workgroup. Each workgroup has three
predefined user groups:
Local Groups
• QSServices
• QSAdmins
• QSUsers
Users are individual members of one of the local groups. On delivery there are only two
users created:
• one in the administrator group and
• one in the service group.
A QSuser is not available and has to be created on site (see 4.2.2).
When a user is not part of any of the groups, the QS Applications won’t start.
Group Privileges
The group privileges of the local groups in a workgroup are the same as described
above.
NOTE:
In CR QS 3.5 there are no global user groups created. If the workgroup is moved to a
domain, global user groups and users will have to be created.
When moving to a CR QS domain, the global user groups QSAdmins, QSServices and
QSUsers already exist. You will only have to add users to the groups (see 4.2.2.1 and
4.2.2.2).
When moving to a hospital domain, the global user groups QSServices and QSUsers
need to be created by the hospital’s system administrator. For this, give all necessary
information to the system administrator
(see section 3.2, checklist).


Repair and Service
4.2.2 Create New Users
NOTE:
There are different procedures to create a user in a workgroup environment and to
create a user in a domain environment.
To create a normal user in a domain environment refer to section 4.2.2.1.
To create a normal user in a workgroup environment refer to
section 4.2.2.3.
4.2.2.1 Create a normal QSUser in a Domain Environment
(1) The window below, where you can manage the users, can be opened via
Configuration Viewer Æ Tools Æ System Tools Æ Active Directory Users and
Computers.
figure 16
(2) Right-click on folder: Users.


Repair and Service
(3) Select <new user>.

A wizard leads you through the details:
• Only user logon name and one of the two: first / last name is mandatory
• Fill in a password and its options. When giving a password there are some
complexity rules to follow:
o Must not contain all or part of the user's account name
o Must be at least nine characters in length
o Must contain characters from three of the following four categories:
English uppercase characters (A through Z)
English lowercase characters (a through z)
Base 10 digits (0 through 9)
No alphanumeric characters (e.g., !, $, #, %)
Make the user a member of one of the global groups:
(4) Right click on the new users you added and open its properties.
(5) Go to tab Member Of.
(6) Click <Add>.
(7) Type in the name of the global group for users: gsQSUsers.
(8) Click <Apply>.
(9) Click <OK>.


Repair and Service
4.2.2.2 Create an Administrator in a Domain Environment
The easiest way to add a new administrator is to copy the existing one. The
administrator has to be member of several user groups to be a full administrator.
(1) Right click on the existing administrator.
figure 17
(2) Select <Copy>. Follow the wizard (as for a QSuser).
figure 18


Repair and Service
4.2.2.3 Create a normal QSUser in a CR QS 3.5 Workgroup
In order to add one or more users (e.g. qsuser) to the workgroup, follow the instructions
given in section 4.2.2.1.
(1) Right-click on My Computer and select Manage. You get the following window.
figure 19

figure 20


Repair and Service
(4) Fill in User name, Full name, Description and Password. Check User can not
change password and Password never expires.
figure 21
(5) Click <Create>.
NOTE:
(6) The user qsuser has been created. You now will have to add him to a group
(e.g. QSUsers).


Repair and Service
(7) Double-click on qsuser. A window pops up. Select Member Of tab.
figure 22
(8) Click <Add…>.

(9) In the window appearing next click <Advanced>.
(10) In the new window click <Find Now> to display all groups.
figure 23


Repair and Service
(11) Select the desired group (e.g. QSUsers) by double-clicking on it.

figure 24
(13) Click <OK>.The qsuser has been added to the group QSUsers.
(14) Repeat this procedure on all clients which are part of the workgroup.
4.3 Control Center (CC)

The control center is the software module that:
• you only can find on server: it schedules tasks on the server (replaces task
manager in former versions).
• is responsible for job queuing for server components.
• starts and stops the QS cluster.
• controls the ASPRO´s.
The icon can be found on the taskbar at the right. Depending on the status it will have a
different color.
CR QS 3.5 Control Center STOPPED (red cross)
CR QS 3.5 Control Center RUNNING (green check mark)
Right clicking on the icon gives you the option to select: start, stop or restart of the CR
QS cluster.
Stopping the Control Center stops QS applications on the clients as well.


Repair and Service
4.4 QS Monitor
The QS monitor is the software module that:

• runs as a service (ADCQSMonitor)
• you can find on server and client.
• controls the log on screen saver.
• checks the user profile and the permissions.
• controls the client components (the viewers).
The icon can be found on the taskbar at the right. Depending on the status it will have a
different color.
figure 25
Icon Tool Tip

(Grey) ADC-QS Monitor Manager
Running – ADCQSMonitor [Starting]
Running – ADCQSMonitor [Stopping]
(Red) Stopped – ADCQSMonitor
Running – ADCQSMonitor [Stopped]
Running – ADCQSMonitor [Error]
Running – ADCQSMonitor [Started]
(Green)
Running – ADCQSMonitor [Logging on]
Running – ADCQSMonitor [Logged on]
Running – ADCQSMonitor [Logging off]
Right-click the icon to manage: open (the GUI), start / stop / restart
If a viewer hangs or behaves abnormally restart the monitor and the viewer will be
reset. This does not affect the gateway or other server components. Only the viewers
on the local machine will be reset.


Repair and Service
4.5 Message Console
The info icon can be found on the taskbar at the right. Depending on the status it will
have a different color:
• Blue, when no new message is available since when the console has been
opened last time.
• Red, when a new message has arrived
Open the window by a double-click.
In this window you can find all messages coming from automated processes
(auto routing, printing…).
4.6 SQL Server
The icon can be found on the taskbar at the right. This item allows you to
start and stop the SQL server. The status of the icon arrow should be
green (= running).
If you stop this server, you will stop the control center and the monitor as
well.


Repair and Service
5 System Configuration
There are several possibilities to configure CR QS 3.5. All possibilities have their
justification if they are applied for the purpose they are designed for:
• Configuration Viewer Æ Standard configuration tool for the CR QS for onsite
configuration, configuration changes and enhancements.
• Image Viewer
• ID Viewer
5.1 Configurations via Configuration Viewer

The Configuration Viewer is the ideal tool on CR QS 3.5 to change or modify the
configuration of the system.
In the following screen an overview of the Configuration Viewer structure is given:
figure 26


Repair and Service
5.1.1 Change Body Part containing non-DICOM conform Characters

According to the DICOM regulations, the usage of e.g. German Umlaute and
accentuated characters should not be supported as was the case in previous QS
systems.
CR QS 3.5 SP1 does not support sending studies containing non-DICOM conform
characters any more. Because of this, all body parts of the default exam tree or an
exam tree configured on a previous QS version, which contain non-DICOM conform
characters, must be changed.
The table gives an overview of all supported characters:
(1) Open the Configuration Viewer and go to the study types.

(2) Open the tree until the level of the sub-studies is reached.On this level, the body
parts are displayed.
(3) Click <Edit>.
(4) Select the body part containing not allowed characters.
(5) Click <Delete>.
(6) Select the new body part in the drop drown menu.
(7) Save your changes.


Repair and Service
5.1.2 Configure Digitizer
5.1.2.1 Digitizer Selector Page
When you open the properties of a

digitizer (right-click and select
Properties) you can click on a
button Open digitizer selector page
which will open the internet
explorer.
On the digitizer page you can
configure the digitizer.
NOTE:
For this, the digitizer
must be switched on.
Otherwise the Internet
Explorer can not open
the page.
figure 27
5.1.2.2 Create a Digitizer CPF-File (also called partial CPF-File)

The reason why a Digitizer CPF file is needed, is that digitizer and CR QS station are
configured separately. In a CR QS 3.5 environment the Configuration Viewer is used to
configure CR QS 3.5. The CR Digitizers are configured using this CPF file.
The CPF file is produced by the CR QS 3.5. It must only be used for Digitizers, as it
contains only part of the information a CCM created CPF file contains.
To create a Digitizer CPF-file you have to perform the following steps:
(1) Carry out Configuration work with Configuration Viewer.

(2) Insert an empty floppy into the floppy drive of CR QS 3.5 station.
(3) In the menu bar go to File\Export AGFA DICOM Digitizer CPF.
(4) Click <Export CPF> and choose A:\ to save CPF file on floppy.
(5) Install the CPF file from floppy in the digitizer.


Repair and Service
5.1.2.3 Upload Partial CPF
When you open the properties of a digitizer (right-click and select properties), in the
network tab you have the option to upload a partial .cpf– file into the digitizer.
NOTE:
This is only possible if the IP address of the digitizer is in the same subnet as the QS.
5.1.3 Configure ID Viewer
NOTE:
• Select only one ID station in a cluster for DirectID. To communicate the
ID Viewer to run DirectID on ADC SOLO or CR 25.0 digitizer, a digitizer CPF-file
(partial CPF File) has to be created and imported on the digitizer.
DirectID has to be activated also in the ADC SOLO/CR 25.0 digitizer to make it
working.
• It is not allowed to configure an ID station for DirectID and connect an
X-ray generator to the same QS station.
(1) To Configure ID Viewer select

Setup\Devices\Identification
Devices\ID Viewers.
(2) Double-click on
<Add new ID Viewer>.
(3) Enter Host Name in caps

(key sensitive), IP-Address and Name.
figure 28


Repair and Service
(4) Check/uncheck
Use Direct-ID check box and click
<Finish>.
figure 29
5.1.4 Configure Medical Printers
(1) To Configure Medical Printers in the Configuration Viewer go to

Setup/Devices/Medical Printers.
(2) Double-click on <Add new medical printer>.
(3) Select printer model, click <Next>.
figure 30


Repair and Service
(4) Enter hostname, IP address and a individual name of printer, click <Next>.
figure 31
(5) Enter AE Title and Port Number. Click <Next>.
figure 32


Repair and Service
(6) Select Supported Film Formats and Medium Type, click <Next>.
figure 33
(7) Change density parameters and image quality settings. Click <Next>.
figure 34


Repair and Service
(8) Select Rescale Type and previously checked film formats.
figure 35
(9) Click <Finish> to confirm medical printer configuration.

(10) On an CR QS Client Station the printers have to be installed as NT-Network
Printers.
NOTE:
To get True Size prints you have to adapt QS station to your AGFA printer. The file
pms.ini has to be created/modified.
Add the following entry to this file:
[ADC_QS1]
IDF=C:/PMS2000.IDF
In the example above the AE Title of the Processing Station is [ADC_QS1]. For each
Processing Station which uses Smart Print you have to create these two lines in your
pms.ini file. Otherwise true size printing will not give true size on film (deviation from
true size is about 10 %).


Repair and Service
5.1.5 Configure Destinations
NOTE:
For each DICOM Storage SCP destination you can enable/disable the use of ADB-tool.
Also you can enable/disable the use of secure proxy for each DICOM Storage SCP
destination.
(1) To Configure Destination select

Setup\Devices\
Destinations.
(2) Double-click on <Add new

destination>.
(3) Select destinations type (ADC_QS,

ARCHIVE or SOFTCOPY).
figure 36
(4) Enter IP Address and an individual

name of the destination.
(5) Click <Next>.
figure 37


Repair and Service
(6) Enter AE Title and select DICOM

version.
(7) Click <Finish> for QS Server as

new destination; for Archive (step 8)
and Softcopy (step 9) one dialogue
more will appear.
figure 38
(8) Archive:
Check Full Resolution.
Select the desired Post Processing
Click <Finish>.
figure 39


Repair and Service
(9) Softcopy:
Enter display settings.
(10) Click <Finish>.
figure 40
5.1.6 Configure OD and P-value

For a functional description of the P-values refer to chapter 2
in this service manual.
NOTE:
• The P-values are not a good choice if the customer does work with either only
hardcopy or softcopy reporting. In this case the use and configuration of OD
values is more appropriate.
• In case the connected printer does not support P-Values or
system performance is an issue; OD gives slightly better performance.
5.1.6.1 Supported Print Modes

There are two print modes supported:
OD values P values
Type = OD-values Type = PERCEPTION
8 bit 8 bit
8 bit
Dmin / Dmax --
Luminance values --


Repair and Service
5.1.6.2 Supported scenarios using OD values
OD values are applied in case the customer only works with either hardcopy or
softcopy reporting.
In this case the following steps have to be performed before the OD values on the
printer and the softcopy monitor are configured:
CR QS 3.5 GenRad (Musica 1):

(1) Adapt the default settings: viewbox luminance = 2000/ambient luminance = 10
NOTE:
Changing of viewbox settings is only possible if DICOM
Configuration Information (DCI) = PERCEPTION_LUT = LINEAR
CR QS 3.5 Mammo (Musica 1.13):

(1) Adapt the default settings: viewbox luminance = 4000/ambient luminance = 1
NOTE:
OD values are only supported with PERCEPTION_LUT = LINEAR
and Lo = 4000, La = 1
OD values are not supported with KANAMORI_LUT.
5.1.6.3 Supported Scenarios using P-values
P-values are applied in case customer wants to match hardcopy with softcopy.
In this case the following steps have to be performed before the P-values on the printer
and the softcopy monitor are configured:
CR QS 3.5 GenRad (Musica 1):

In case of a new installation:
(1) Measure and configure Lo en La manually.
(2) Apply the default settings: viewbox luminance = 2000 / ambient luminance = 10


Repair and Service
In case of an upgrade:
(3) Adapt viewbox settings in order to keep hardcopy and softcopy consistent.
CR QS 3.5 Mammo (Musica 1.13):

In case of a new installation:
(1) Measure and configure Lo en La manually.
In case of an upgrade:
(1) Adapt viewbox settings in order to keep hardcopy and softcopy consistent.
(2) Apply the default settings: viewbox luminance = 4000 /
ambient luminance = 1
5.1.6.4 Configure OD values on a Medical Printer
(1) Open the Configuration Viewer.

(2) Go to Setup Æ Devices Æ Medical Printers.
(3) Click on the printer you want to configure.
(4) Select tab Output.
(5) Set Rescale type to <OD>.
(6) Click <Finish>. No further actions are necessary.
5.1.6.5 Configure P-Values on a Medical Printer

(2) Go to Setup Æ Devices Æ Medical Printers.
(3) Click on the printer you want to configure.


Repair and Service
(4) Select tab Image.

Set the following parameters:
o Minimum Density = 0.2
o Maximum Density = 3.7
o Magnification Type: Cubic
o Smoothing factor = 125
o Configuration Information = PERCEPTION_LUT=LINE
o Uncheck Print Ruler
3.7
figure 41
(5) Go to tab DICOM. Enter the AE Title defined in the printer host profile for the QS.


Repair and Service
(6) Go to tab Output. Set Rescale type to Perception.
figure 42
(7) Switch on the viewbox and wait about 5 min.

(8) Remove any film and collimate.
(9) Measure the luminance in the center of the area and in each corner 10 cm from
the edges. Build a median and enter this value (cd/m2).
NOTE:
General Radiology:
The viewbox luminance should range 800 – 3.000 cd/m²
(about 2.500 – 10.000 lux measured on the window pane of the
viewbox luminance).
The optimum values for the viewbox luminance is 2500 cd/m².
Mammography:
The viewbox luminance should range 2.000 – 6.000 cd/m²
(about 6.000 – 18.000 lux measured on the window pane of the
viewbox luminance) (European guideline= 3.000 – 6.000 cd/m².).
The optimum values for the viewbox luminance is 4000 cd/m².


Repair and Service
(10) Switch off the viewbox and put on a film in the position used for reporting.
(11) Measure the reflected ambient light in the center of a film with a distance of about
60 cm (normal reporting distance) and enter this in box as Ambient Luminance
(cd/m2).
NOTE:
General Radiology:
The optimum value for the ambient luminance is 2 cd/m².
Mammography:
The optimum value for the ambient luminance is 1 cd/m².
(12) Ensure the printer has been properly calibrated.

(13) Print a prior diagnostic study.
(14) Click <Apply>.
(15) Click <OK>.
(16) Validate the image quality with the radiologist.
(17) Use the text box editor in the QS to add the measured values for viewbox
intensity and reflected ambient light to the printed film. The diagnostic value of
the hardcopy is only guaranteed when viewed under these conditions.
(18) Insert a cell in the text box and populate the cell with the field “CRImage info 1”.
Enter as label text: “Viewing conditions= “(translate in local language).Insert a
second cell and populate the cell with the field “CRImage Info 2”.


Repair and Service
(19) Enter the measured values as label text, see following screen:
figure 43
The measured values for viewbox intensity and reflected ambient luminance
should be visible in the bottom right corner of the hardcopy image.
NOTE:
The name of the printer is the reference between sub-studies and printer. Keep in mind
you have to reconfigure each sub-study when you change the printer name.
5.1.6.6 Configure P-values on a Softcopy Monitor
NOTE:
For a functional description of the P-values refer to chapter 2 in this service manual.
For local display images on CR QS 3.5, P-values are supported if using an appropriate
monitor system. In this case, the QS needs to be configured to output P-values and the
monitor needs to be calibrated accordingly. For the calibration process of the Barco
monitor MFCD1218 refer to chapter 3.6 in this manual.

(2) Go to Setup Æ Devices Æ Monitors.
(3) Select the softcopy reporting station you want to configure for P-values.


Repair and Service
(4) In the tab Network/Interface check P-Values.
figure 44
The monitor is configured.

Now the monitor calibration needs to be done. Please refer to chapter 3.6 in this
service manual for the calibration procedure.


Repair and Service
5.1.7 Configure Fast Preview
In order to enable the fast preview window in the QC Viewer follow the instruction
below:
(1) Go to Setup Æ Devices Æ CR QS Æ Fast Preview Gateway.

(2) Check Enabled.
(3) Click <OK>.
(4) Upload the CPF to the Dicom digitizer (see section 5.1.2.2).
(5) In the QC Viewer go to View/Preview/Fast Preview.
(6) Insert a cassette into the digitizer in order to verify that a preview of the image is
shown during the scan process.
5.1.8 Import a Hospital Logo
(1) Import a hospital logo via the

menu bar item tools.
(2) Go to SetupÆ
Site Information Æ
Administration.
(3) Select the hospital logo in the
drop down menu.
Allowed formats are 8/16 bit
BMP, JPEG or GIF.
(4) This logo can be added to the
textbox via the textbox editor.
For the procedure refer to
section 5.2.1.
figure 45


Repair and Service
5.1.9 Selecting Option “Auto-delete studies containing rejected Images“
See also section 5.2.7: Reject Image. If the option is checked, studies containing
rejected images will be treated as normal studies with status VERIFIED (with the FIFO
rule). If the option is not checked, studies containing rejected images will NOT be
deleted, until an administrator checks and deletes them.
NOTE:
It is highly recommended to check this option. Otherwise studies containing rejected
images will fill up the hard disk and thus studies coming in recently will be deleted
earlier than expected.
(1) To enable/disable auto-delete of rejected images go to Setup Æ Site Information

Æ Administration.
(2) Check/uncheck the box: Auto delete studies containing rejected Images.
figure 46
NOTE:
If the option is checked, the aspro (task) DiskMon, which cleans up the harddisk, will
delete all rejected images independent of their creation time and as soon as the script
runs. If the option is not checked the rejected images are treated as normal images
(with the FIFO rule)


Repair and Service
5.1.10 CR Settings
When you go to Setup Æ Site Information Æ CR Settings you can select the exposure
classes (also known as speed class) required at the site.
figure 47
5.1.11 System Settings - Regional Settings

The regional settings are accessible via the system tools in the menu bar or via:
<Setup>
<Site Information>
<System Settings>
Here you can change the menus and dialogues into the local language.
This is also the place to change the keyboard settings
(via the tab languages option details).
Settings have to be made separately for each group of users.


Repair and Service
5.1.12 System Security
In this part of the Configuration Viewer you can configure the HIPAA functionality which
has to do everything with security issues. One part of the HIPAA is the authentication
(accounts and passwords) but this can be configured with the system tools (see section
5.1.16) and is not linked to the license of HIPAA support (it is always active).
Configurable items:
• Audit Trail Repository
Here you can configure the path to the external audit log tool. The logging tool (tool to
accept and store all the loggings) is not part of QS and is the responsibility of the
customer to provide it. The data are only “dumped” (via UDP protocol) without verifying
if the data are stored correctly (see also section 6).
• Login
Here you determine the banner text that has to come on the screen; this feature is
linked with the desktop screensaver (see section 5.6.1). You can set the non-activity
timeout (time before you are logged out automatically).
figure 48
• Certificates
Here you have the tools in order to set up a secure connection (based on
certificates).
In order to make a secure connection you have the possibility to select the option “use
secure proxy” for printers, ID Viewers and destinations.
Right-click on a device, open the properties and mark the option.


Repair and Service
5.1.13 License Management
5.1.13.1 Overview of available Licenses

For CR QS 3.5 the following licenses are available. The licenses written in bold letters
are new compared to CR QS 3.0.
License Overview Type Server License Client License
CR Online-Processing Software M X
CR ID Viewer Software M X
CR IPD Viewer Software M X
CR QC Viewer Software (advanced) M X
CR Black Border Software O X
CR Smart Print Software O X
CR Autorouting Software O X
CR Annotation Software O X
CR Pediatric Software O X
CR Uro/Tomo Software O X
CR Dental Software O X
CR DICOM-Store Connection O X
CR Multi Format Import/Export O X
CR Full Leg/Full Spine Software O X
CR Rislink Toolkit Software O X
CR Dose-Monitoring Software O X
CR Auto QC Software O X
HIPAA Support O X X
CR X-ray Connectivity O X
CR Manual X-ray Parameter Input O X
Reject Analysis Toolset O X
CR Mammo Software O X
CR Radiotherapy Software O X
ADR Connectivity Software O X
Licenses type “M” are mandatory software packages which are necessary in order to
be able to work properly with the CR QS workstation.
Licenses type “O” are options on mandatory SW. These are only necessary in case
additional applications or special configurations are required by the customer.


Repair and Service
From a commercial point of view it is distinguished between server license and client
license.
A server license has to be acquired once for the whole CR QS 3.5 cluster, while a
client license has to acquired for each PC it should run on. Therefore, the following has
to be regarded when adding a new license:
• A server license has to be activated on each PC in the cluster. The same license
ID can be used throughout the cluster.
• A client license must only be activated on the PC(s) the SW option is bought for.
For each PC a different license ID must be used.
5.1.13.2 Adding Licenses

(1) To activate a licensed SW option select at Configuration Viewer
<Monitoring>
<Software Management>
< License Management >
(2) Double-click on <Add License>.
figure 49
(3) The following window pops up. Select License type

(„Full License“ or „Demo License “).
figure 50
• If you select “Demo License“, a list of not yet activated SW-Options

appears at “Module“. A “Demo License“ expires after 90 days (without
previous warning).
• If you select „Full License“ enter „License Code“ and your name. The SW
option is identified and activated by means of the license code.
(4) Click <OK> to finish.


Repair and Service
5.1.14 CCCommander
Under Monitoring you find the CCCommander.
figure 51
The ASPRO´s (tasks) are controlled by the Control Center.

Some ASPRO´s are triggered on a time base. This time can be consulted and edited
via the BOExplorer (see section 5.1.20).
5.1.15 Quality Monitoring

CR QS 3.5 offers two tools for quality monitoring. These are:
• Qc Tools
• Dose Monitoring
5.1.16 System Tools

Via the menu bar in the
Configuration Viewer you can
select the item Tools\System
Tools. This will open a window
where you can do some
customization and configuration of
the workstation and the domain.
The system tools are opened in a
separate window.
figure 52


Repair and Service
5.1.16.1 Computer Management

This module has four main functions:
• Device Manager on local computer
• Disk Management (Local)
• Event Viewer (Local)
• Services (Local)
5.1.16.2 Active Directory Users and Computers

Here you can manage the different users and their permissions
(see also section 4.2.2).
5.1.16.3 Utilities
Here you can access:
• regional settings
• CR QS log files
• terminal services manager (here you can check if other remote sessions are
active, disconnect them, ask control over the remote desk Æ a service tool)
• network report (to consult network settings)
• change IP address (the OS CD is needed, active directory will be removed
temporarily)
5.1.17 Test all Devices

Test all devices is available via Configuration Viewer Æ Tools.


Repair and Service
5.1.18 Import Partial XML - Adding Study Groups

It is possible to import study groups without overwriting the existing exam tree and
configuration (e.g. a customer buys pediatric software, a pediatric exam tree can be
imported in the present exam tree without overwriting anything: real adding).
(1) To import partial XML or Add Study Group in the Configuration Viewer go to: File
Æ Import XML Æ Add Study Group.
figure 53
Import XML ‘Full Configuration’.

• A check is done!
• Old configuration stays until import is successful.
Import XML ‘Add Study Group’

• Adding examinations.
• You can use also a Full Configuration XML.
IMPORTANT:
After importing the XML file, the print layouts of each new exam have to be
reconfigured even if they look ok!
5.1.19 Configuration via Cloning

Depending what is to be done two procedures to clone CR QS 3.5 devices may be
applied. They also can be used in combination.
5.1.19.1 Cloning a CR QS Server

This is normally done when configuration from one server should be transferred to
another server, i.e. into another cluster. Here, only the configuration data kept in the
database are transferred. The procedure is as follows:


Repair and Service
(1) Start Configuration Viewer on source server(*).

(2) Select File Æ Export xml.
(3) Save the resulting file. This may take some minutes depending on the size of the
configuration.
(4) Start Configuration Viewer on target server.
(5) Select File Æ Import xml Æ full configuration.
(6) Select the file you saved before.
(7) When you are asked if you want to overwrite the existing configuration settings.
Click <Yes>.
(8) This may take some minutes depending on the size of the configuration; app. 5
min per 0.5 Mb size of XML file.
(9) Check Gateway configuration in Configuration Viewer and adapt if necessary to
the requirements on the Target Server (Setup Æ Devices Æ CRQS Æ
<Server name>). Parameters to be adapted maybe hostname, IP address and
DICOM AE title.
(10) Go to Setup Æ Devices Æ Destinations and delete the target server from the list
of possible destinations (to avoid sending to itself).
(11) Select
<Setup>
<Devices>
<Destinations>
and add the source server to the destination list, if it is requested to send studies
to the source CR QS 3.5.
(*) In the above text the source server is always the server which provides the
configuration to be duplicated, while the target server is the one to receive this
configuration.
5.1.19.2 Cloning User Setting of Viewers (GUI)

This is normally done if you wish to have the same user settings on all systems in a
domain. This procedure saves you time as you do not have to repeat the settings
configuration on every system but you do it only once and copy them to the other
systems.
(1) Log on to QC server with a QSAdmin account.

(2) Modify QC Viewer GUI as per customer requirements.
(3) Close all QS Viewer applications, IPD and QC Viewer (do not log off).


Repair and Service
(4) Copy the file below to a floppy or other media (USB memory stick).
D:\Software\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config\Settings\Agfagui.cpx (file size should be
around 30 Kbytes).
(5) Logon to a QC client within the domain (that requires a copy of the new GUI
settings) with the QSAdmin account.
(6) Close all QC Viewer applications (but do not log off).
(7) Copy the files below from the floppy or other media to overwrite:
D:\Software\Agfa\ Adcqs\Config\Settings\Agfagui.cpx.
(8) Restart the QC Viewer applications. (IPD or QC Viewer).
(9) GUI settings are now copied and should reflect the QC Viewer they were copied
from.
5.1.20 Accessing BOExplorer for ASPRO Settings
For the BOExplorer go to Start Æ Programs Æ Agfa CR QS 3.5 Æ Tools\BOExplorer.

Here you can check and edit the settings of the available ASPROs. To edit be logged
in as crservice and check the update on.
NOTE:
For time based event it is good to check that the event is not scheduled on a time when
the system is never powered on (e.g. in the evening when the department is closed
and all systems are turned off).
To check or edit the ASPRO settings proceed as follows:

(1) Click on <CC> in the toolbar.
(2) Click on the desired ASPRO on the left. On the right an overview of the settings
appears.
(3) To edit one of the settings double-click on the desired item and make your
changes.
NOTE:
After first setup of the system check CleanDangling; DiskMonDaily and Backup
ASPRO.
It is mandatory that the Backup ASPRO runs on a regular base.


Repair and Service
figure 54
5.1.21 Configuration of Planmed Sophie X-Ray Generators
Planmed Sophie and Planmed Sophie Classic X-ray generator need to be configured
on the CR QS 3.5 system. For the configuration please refer to the Connectivity
document on MedNet. Healthcare Library:
General Info/Connectivity & Application.
NOTE:
It is not allowed to configure an ID station for DirectID and
connect an X-ray generator to the same QS station.


Repair and Service
5.2 Configurations via Image Viewer
5.2.1 Select a Hospital Logo
(1) A hospital logo can be added to the textbox. First import the logo in the
Configuration Viewer (see section 5.1.8).
(2) Go to Tools Æ Text Box Editor….
(3) Then check the box with Display Logo (see rectangle) and you see the logo
appear to the right of the textbox (where the red cycle is).
figure 55


Repair and Service
5.2.2 Mark a Study as READ
Status READ can be selected for a study. This button works on study level. If you press
the button status READ is applied to the whole selected study. To see this status add
the “CRProcedureStep Status” field to the list view pane.
The smiley icon to mark studies as READ can be made available in the taskbar.
figure 56
This feature can be used to create a kind of “to-do list”. (e. g. a quality control of all
verified studies by a central person in the radiology department. Each time he looks at
the images of a study and they are ok, he clicks the button and the study will disappear
from the list in the IPD selector with selection criterion: VERIFIED).
5.2.3 Limited Delete Access

A QSUser cannot delete an image, he can only reject them. Deleting is on
administrator level (or service).


Repair and Service
5.2.4 Multiple Transmission of one Image to the Same Destination

With the CR QS 3.5 it is possible to send one image to the same destination more than
once. In this way you can have copies of the same image on a PACS system. Each
time you transmit the image it will get a different instance UID.
Procedure:
(1) Transmit the first “version” of an image manually or via Autorouting.
(2) Change the image (adding annotations, zoom in, different processing).
(3) Save the image.
(4) Transmit the image manually to the same destinations.
5.2.5 Draw Horizontal and Vertical Lines

Horizontal and vertical lines can easily be drawn on an image using the tools available
in the annotation toolbar:
figure 57
When you press the <shift> button after you started drawing a line, the line will snap
to the closest predefined angle (a common technique in graphical packages). The
angle will change per 15°.
This feature is applicable to the following annotations functions:
• Draw line
• Measure distance
• Perform line calibration
5.2.6 Configuration of the Print Composer

It is advised that you disable the ruler in the Print Composer. If the customer requires
the ruler in his workflow, remove the “roam over image” button. Otherwise, the image
appears oddly positioned in the Print Composer and on film.


Repair and Service
5.2.7 Reject an Image

When logged in as a QSUser you can not delete images, but only reject them. Deleting
an image is only allowed to administrators. When an image is rejected:
• image status is set to REJECTED
• no Auto Routing possible
• no Auto Printing possible
• not removed automatically
• “unreject” images is possible when the reject analysis toolset license is activated
NOTE:
The reject analysis toolset has been changed in CR QS 3.5 compared to
CR QS 3.0. For the description of this functionality refer to chapter 2 in this service
manual.
On the left side where the “Favorite” folder is, you can also find a folder “Rejected”.
Click on the folder and enter the desired search criteria. All rejected images which
match your search criteria will be listed in the Selector. This feature gives you a limited
way of doing some reject analysis.
figure 58


Repair and Service
You can enable/disable auto-delete of rejected images in the Configuration Viewer:

(1) Go to Setup Æ Site Information Æ Administration.
(2) Check/uncheck the box auto-delete studies containing rejected images.
If the option is checked, studies containing rejected images will be treated as normal
studies with status VERIFIED (with the FIFO rule).
If the option is not checked the rejected images are treated as normal images (with the
FIFO rule).
5.2.8 Export of an Image/a Study

To export a study go to File\Export.
A complete study can only be exported in *.qse format.
A *.qse file can be compared with a *.zip file. It contains a set of files bundled together
into one singe file. QSE files can be unzipped using any unzip tool.
Use the “Export Study” functionality in case the whole study needs to be exported, e.g.
in case it will be sent to Service for analysis.
When you export a single image you have multiple options on format:
figure 59
When exporting a study or an image, you have the possibility to give a name to the file.
There is already a default name that starts with the patient name.


Repair and Service
5.2.9 Import of a Study

When you import a study the “Study Object Creation Date Time” will be set to actual
date/time.
This is done in order to avoid that an “old” imported study gets deleted almost
immediately by the diskmon ASPRO.
5.3 Export Images in DICOMDIR Format
To export images in DICOMDIR format procede as follows:
(1) In the IPD Viewer select the images you want to export.
(2) Go to File Æ DICOM Export.
figure 60
(3) The images will automatically be exported to CD.

(4) Click <Ok>. The images are exported and written to CD.


Repair and Service
5.4 Configuration via ID Viewer
5.4.1 ID Tablet
CAUTION:
Images can get lost!
Instruct the customer to identify all cassettes of one study always on one and the same
cluster and on one and the same ID station.
The ID Tablet works with usual ADC cassettes as well as with DX-S cassettes
(needle IP).
NOTE:
• The tablet shall be connected to the QS 3.0 station via USB connection and
power supply.
• When connected via USB, the settings in the Configuration Viewer for the
ID Viewer (Baud rate and port) have no meaning (dummies, only valid when
connected via RS232).
• Make sure you have the latest version of the ID Tablet firmware installed. For
information and download of the latest ID Tablet firmware version refer
to MedNet.


Repair and Service
5.5 RIS Configuration
5.5.1 General
RISLink is a licensed option making it possible to optimize the Hospital workflow.
Patient and examination data are sent from the Radiology Information System (RIS) to
the modality in a way that the typing and selecting effort necessary to identify
exposures, is minimized.
In the ID Viewer data coming from the RIS can directly be merged with the images in a
way that modifications on the customers’ side are minimal.
A RISLink is set up using the DICOM Modality Work List (DMWL).
5.5.2 Configure RIS Connection
(1) In the ID Viewer go to Settings, tab Non DICOM-Ris.
figure 61
(2) Select the desired Ris type

o Data file
o Call user program
o Delimited worklist
o Accession Number
o XML Worklist
(3) Click <OK>.

Repair and Service
5.5.3 Configure RISLink using a Data File
NOTE:
Note that because of the structure of the RIS data file only one patient with one
exposure per one study or substudy can be identified. The study and substudy are
looked up in the Configuration Viewer Exposure Tree and the exposure to be
performed is derived from the tree.
When more than one exposure per substudy type needs to be defined, the RIS concept
with XML file should be taken.
(1) Make sure the ADC Rislink Toolkit Software License is enabled.
(2) In the Configuration Viewer select mode Data file.
(3) Set the RIS data file path (local or remote) and name.
(4) After the study is completed, a XML file can be composed by the ID Viewer
containing all identification data. Check if you want to remove this file (Yes) or
store it according to your configurations (No).
(5) Configure Code Page.
5.5.4 Configure RISLink using Call User Program
NOTE:
Note that because of the structure of the RIS data file only one patient with one
exposure per one study or substudy can be identified. The study and substudy are
looked up in the Configuration Viewer Exposure Tree and the exposure to be
performed is derived from the tree.
When more than one exposure per substudy type needs to be defined, the RIS concept
with XML file should be taken.
(2) In the Configuration Viewer select mode “Call user program”.
(3) Set the RIS data file path (local or remote) and name.
(4) After the study is completed, a XML file can be composed by the ID Viewer
containing all identification data.Check if you want to remove this file (Yes) or
store it according to your configurations (No).


Repair and Service
5.5.5 Configure RISLink using a delimited Worklist
(2) In the Configuration Viewer select mode “Delimited worklist”.
(3) Set the file path (local or remote) and name of the RIS worklist file.
5.5.6 Configure RISLink using Accession Number
(2) In the Configuration Viewer select mode “Accession number”.
(3) Talk to the person responsible for the RIS system. He should be able to poll,
interpret and create the necessary ASCII Request file.
(4) Set the file path (local or remote) and name of the ASCII Request file.
5.5.7 Configure RISLink using XML Worklist
(2) In the Configuration Viewer select mode “XML worklist”.
(3) Set the file path (local or remote) and name of the RIS XML file.
(4) In the ID Viewer lock the following fields for editing:
o Patient name
o Patient first name
o Patient ID
o Patient birth date
o Patient sex
o Accession number


Repair and Service
5.5.8 RISLink using DMWL Worklist
5.5.8.1 Supported scenarios
RIS RIS RIS Sub- ID Viewer Actions

Group Study Type study
OK OK OK System sets the group, study type and
substudy in the ID Viewer as received from the
RIS. Mapping RIS/ID Viewer is defined in the
RIS mapping file (DicomModalityWorklist.xml).
If the RIS provides an exposure, the exposure
will be selected.
OK OK NOK System sets the group and study type in the ID
Viewer as received from the RIS.
System sets the substudy selection as defined
in the configuration of the substudy selection
flag (first, all, none).
-- OK OK System sets the latest selected study group.
In case the ID Viewer is opened for the first time
the first study group is selected.
System sets the study type and substudy as
received from RIS.
-- OK NOK System sets the latest selected study group.
In case the ID Viewer is opened for the first time
the first study group is selected.
System sets the study type received from RIS.
-- study type OK System sets the latest selected study group.
does not In case the ID Viewer is opened for the first time
exist in the first study group is selected.
exposure System sets the first study type.
tree
The substudy received from RIS will be ignored.
-- study type NOK System sets the latest selected study group.
does not In case the ID Viewer is opened for the first time
exist in the first study group is selected.
exposure System sets the first study type.
tree
The substudy received from RIS will be ignored.


Repair and Service
5.5.8.2 Merging
In order to merge different exposures to one study type with its substudy types and
exposure types automatically, the Accession Number or the Study Instance UID must
be sent to the RIS.
There are three fixed keys which have to match:
• Patient ID
• Study Group
• Study Type
Otherwise you might loose exposures in case a certain study type in the study tree
does not have that exposure!
You have the possibility to add one key in the configuration, e.g. Accession Number.
Inserting a merged item will create in the form one procedure step with more then one
exposure selected!
Items in the list with multiple values will have a wildcard “*” as entry
figure 62


Repair and Service
5.5.8.3 Configuration Procedure
(1) The Dicom DMWL connection has

to be configured in the
Configuration Viewer.
Double-click on the desired ID
station and select tab
Dicom MWL.
(2) When the Dicom DMWL

connection has been successfully
configured, the settings are written
into the ID Viewer.
figure 63
(3) You can view the settings under:

ID Viewer Æ Customizing tool Æ
Settings tab DICOM-Ris.
(4) Configure attributes and sorting

criteria of the Dicom DMWL.
figure 64


Repair and Service
NOTE:
Difference to ADC QS 2.1:
The field “Calling AE Title” in figure 64 is filled with the Gateway AE title that is
configured in the config viewer and is the same for all members of the QS cluster.
In case of an upgrade from ADC QS 2.1 a reconfiguration of the RIS is required to
ensure the functionality of queries based on AE Titles.
5.5.9 Use RIS as Study Data
(1) Go to ID Viewer/Customizing tool/

Settings/
tab Study Selection.
(2) Check Use RIS as study

data.
(3) Select as reference item one

entry in the DMWL in order to
create a study with more than one
substudy, each with more than
one exposure.
(4) Close and reopen the ID Viewer

to make your changes effective.
figure 65
5.5.10 Use automatic Study Selection
Automatic study selection can be used when identifying an image. The configuration
process for this functionality requires four different steps:
• Find the suitable reference item and determining how exactly it describes the
examination (see section 5.5.10.1).
• Enable automatic study selection (see section 5.5.10.2)
• Create a mapping file manually (see section 5.5.10.3) or use the learning mode
to create this file (see section 5.5.10.4).
• Make the mapping file ready for use (see section 5.5.10.5).
For further information on the topic refer to chapter 2 in this manual.


Repair and Service
5.5.10.1 Find a Reference Item
A suitable Reference Item can be found in a co-operation with the RIS company:
• When a study code is existing, the RIS company should be able to provide a list
of all codes with corresponding descriptions of examinations. You can also use a
dicom tag 0040,1001 (procedure_id) as reference item, which needs to be
mapped into the database field IProcedure.Id.
NOTE:
The study codes normally will contain information on study type and sub-study type,
possibly also exposure types. It is, however, possible that the codes won’t contain any
information on the study group, which on QS is mostly an Age Group. When this is the
case, the Learning Mode can be used only in a limited way, e.g. the auto-selection
would work only for adults, but for children a manual selection of all the fields will be
necessary. The moment you need to change the study group (Age Group) all pre-
selected exposures will be lost.
There is one way around the problem mentioned above: If the exam tree below the
study group level is identical for all Age Groups you can check the “exclude study
group” box in the ID Viewer automatic study selection dialogue. Then the correct exam
will be selected independent of the Age Group.
• A suitable reference item also could be a study description, when it consists of a

concatenated study group, type, sub-study type and exposure types or
abbreviations of the former.
Such study description can be delivered e.g. in the dicom tag 0032,1030, as
procedure step description, but it also can come as a series description.
• The users (chief radiographer) should help to determine the exact relationship
between the codes or study descriptions and the real Study Tree items, that will
be selected in each specific case.
NOTE:
When you see, that the customer makes too many decisions on-the-fly and that he
changes the procedures frequently, stop at this point or check, whether it would
make sense to auto-select just Study Group and Study Type and leave the sub-
study type and exposure types up to the users.


Repair and Service
5.5.10.2 Enable automatic Study Selection

To enable automatic study selection two steps are necessary:
Step 1: integrate existing system:

(1) Make a RIS query.
(2) Select one item from the worklist.
(3) Read the RIS data information by selecting right mouse button in the ID Viewer,
Study Information.
(4) Search for the Study Description or for the Study Code at the bottom of the Study
Information screen, the lines beginning with RIS-...
(5) Use the found database field as a reference item for the learning mode.
Step 2: enable automatic study selection:

(1) Go to ID Viewer Æ Customizing tool Æ Settings Æ tab Study Selection.
(2) Check Use automatic study selection.
figure 66
(3) Select the reference item determined before.

(4) Close and reopen the ID Viewer to make your changes effective.


Repair and Service
5.5.10.3 Create a Mapping File manually
NOTE:
Note that this procedure is time consuming. In order to disturb your customer as little
as possible, work on your service PC when possible.
(1) Ask your customer to provide you a list containing all study codes and their
respective exposures.
(2) Open D:/Agfa/ADC QS/Config/Settings/IDV_ExamTreeMap.txt with Notepad.
If you can not find the file create a new one.
The file is structured as follows:
R = reference value (study code)

0 = study group, e.g. Adult
1 = study type, e.g. chest, dental, …
2 = substudy, e.g. general
3 = exposure, e.g. LAT (Note that there can be more than
one exposure per substudy.)
In Notepad, the file looks as follows:
figure 67
NOTE:
The entries in the IDV_ExamTreeMap file must contain all levels 0-3. It is not possible
to omit e.g. the level 2 and 3. Not keeping on this rule will cause corruption of the files
(upto total loss of the file content) and the automatic study selection won’t work any
longer.
(3) Enter the data received from your customer into the file.
(4) Save the file as IDV_ExamTreeMap.txt in D:/Agfa/ADC QS/Config/Settings/


Repair and Service
5.5.10.4 Learning Mode
By using the learning mode you teach the QS which examinations are normally made
when receiving a specific RIS code.
(1) Go to ID Viewer Æ Customizing tool Æ Settings Æ tab Study Selection.

(2) Check
- Learning Mode
- Exclude Study Group (only when study group is not included in the
code).
NOTE:
When the Study Group information is not contained in the study code or generally in
the reference item value, then the Learning Mode still can be used, by activating the
Exclude Study Group option in the Advanced settings of the ID Viewer. In this case
also the option
On cassette insertion/Create New Study should be used.
(3) Select the reference item determined before.

(4) Close and reopen the ID Viewer to make your changes effective.
(5) Delete any existing IDV_ExamTreeMap.txt file from the directory
D:\Agfa\ADC QS\Config\Settings.
(6) Create a ghost patient on the RIS system and schedule him for all possible
exams.
(7) Disable the ID Tablet.
(8) Go to Start Æ Run and type regedit.
(9) Go to HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Agfa ID Viewer\Debug.
(10) Double-click on Hardware Present.
(11) In the field Value Data type No.
(12) Click <Ok>.
(13) Open the ID Viewer and select the ghost patient you have created on the RIS
system.
(14) Select the standard used study type, sub-study type and exposures for each
examination. Press the <Write> button for each exposure.
(15) When you have finished, go to ID Viewer Æ Customizing tool Æ Settings Æ
tab Study Selection and uncheck the Learning Mode.
(16) Close and reopen the ID Viewer.
(17) Enable the ID Tablet.


Repair and Service
NOTE:
This is not the only way to use the learning mode.
Another way of working is to let the learning mode active for a while, a week, a month,
just until all possible examinations have been done. This doesn’t take much effort but
the down side to it is, that every time you do an examination on a different way, you
overwrite the former mapping to that code. When you eventually use the automatic
study selection, it is the Study Tree string of the last time that you performed that
examination, with the learning mode on, that is used. If the last time was not the
standard procedure you will have to change it again.
Unless you have a hospital with a perfect standard procedure it will take more effort to
get it all right afterwards than to spend a little more time doing the procedure as
described above.
5.5.10.5 Make ready for Use
(1) Go to ID Viewer Æ Customizing tool Æ Settings Æ tab Study Selection and

uncheck Learning Mode.
(2) Close the ID Viewer.
(3) Go to D:\Agfa\ADC QS\Config\Settings\IDV_ExamTreeMap.txt.
(4) Open the file with a text editor, e.g. Notepad, and verify the entries that have
been made. An example of a mapping file is shown in chapter 2 of this service
manual.
(5) If necessary, make corrections manually.
(6) The IDV_ExamTreeMap.txt file can now be copied to other systems in the
cluster.
Automatic study selection can now be used when identifying a cassette.


Repair and Service
5.6 Configure Desktop
5.6.1 Screensaver
To the normal screensaver module of Windows there has been made a dedicated
screensaver: “logonScreenSaver” designed to support emergency messages from
the DX-S digitizer.
figure 68
This screensaver will pop up depending on the wait time you set there, but it will not log
you off.
You can change the banner text under Configuration Viewer Æ Setup Æ System
Security\Login (see also section 5.1.12).
Even when nobody is logged on and the screensaver is running, the DX-S is able to
give messages to the operator when a problem occurs or when a certain action is
needed. This screensaver supports such a message console on screen.


Repair and Service
5.6.2 Desktop Background
A wallpaper has been designed especially for CR QS3.5.
figure 69
It is not installed by default but can be found in:

D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config\Settings\Background
Its name is “ScreensaverBackground.jpg”.
Procedure:
(1) Go to Start Æ Display.
(2) Open tab Desktop.
(3) Click <Browse> and open the wallpaper described above.
(4) Click <OK>.


Repair and Service
5.7 Configure System Settings
5.7.1 Enable/Disable FTP Server

If the FTP server on the system is installed, it can be enabled or disabled according to
the needs and requirements of the site.
When the FTP server is enabled, downloads and uploads via the FTP server are
possible. It might be requested to disable the FTP server, e.g. for security reasons.
(1) Go to Start Æ Settings Æ

Control Panel Æ Administrative
Tools.
(2) Select the Internet Information

Services (IIS) Manager.
(3) Right-click on Default FTP and

select <Stop> if you want to
disable the FTP server.
Right-click on Default FTP and
select <Start> if you want to
enable the FTP server.
figure 70
5.7.2 Optimize System Performance
It is advised that you set the system performance as follows:

(1) Go to Start Æ System Control Æ System Æ tab Advanced Æ system
performance settings.
(2) (Set the system performance to Best performance”.
(3) Click <OK>.
(4) Click <OK>.


Repair and Service
6 Audit Trail Logging
6.1 General
In order to be HIPPA compliant, you can configure Audit Trail Logging. When you have
Audit Trail Logging switched on, all events on the server and client and the
communication between the two are logged on an audit server.
figure 71 - Audit Trail Logging


Repair and Service
6.2 Configure Audit Trail Logging
NOTE:
Audit Trail Logging is only possible if the HIPPA license has been activated.
(1) In the Configuration Viewer go to Setup Æ System Security Æ Audit Trail

Repository.
(2) Check Audit Tracking On/Off.
figure 72
(3) Enter Host Name, IP Adress and Port Number of the hospital’s audit server.
(4) Go to D:\agfa\sec\data\auditcfg.xml
Run the configuration file.
(5) The changes become active:
o after saving on the server
o after new logon on the client


Repair and Service
6.3 Configure Security Proxy
In order to be HIPPA compliant, a security proxy can be used to guarantee a secure

transmission between QS and PACS.
(1) To configure a security proxy on

the QS system, check Use
Security Proxy when you
configure the archive destination
(see section 5.1.5).
figure 73
(2) In tab DICOM enter the AE Title and the Port Number of the security proxy. The
values can be found under D:\agfa\sec\bin\proxyconfig.xml.
figure 74
The changes become active:

- after reboot of the system
- after restart of the proxy service

Repair and Service
6.4 Configure ADB – Tool
For the configuration of the ADB tool refer to MedNet:

General Info\Connectivity and Application\To Agfa\User Manual\Agfa DICOM Bridge –
User Guide
(1) To configure the ADB tool port check ADB Tool Port Number and enter the port
number as shown in the screen below:
figure 75


Chapter 3.8
Imaging Services
Software Releases and Patches

Type 4406/421

This document informs about software releases and patches of the CR QS 3.5 and the
solved and open defects of the releases/patches.
TIP:
If you view this document on a PC, arrows are displayed:
Use those for navigating within the document.

Revision Date compared to previous version 2.1:
2.2 01-2008 • Added info about Patches included in different Hotfixes.
Details see section 5.
• Added info for CR QS 3.5 SP2. See section 1
Document Title
DD+DIS212.07E CR QS 3.5 Troubleshooting Guide No. 2


eq_03-8_release-patch_e_template_v02
Repair and Service
DD+DIS302.05E Software Releases and Patches
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 RELEASE INFO FOR CR QS 3.5.463 (SERVICE PACK 2).....................................................5

1.1 What is new in CR QS 3.5 SP2? ..............................................................................................5
1.2 Solved Problems in CR QS 3.5 SP2 compared to CR QS 3.5 SP1 .........................................5
1.2.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................................5
1.2.2 Printing ......................................................................................................................................7
1.2.3 Restore......................................................................................................................................9
1.2.4 Server......................................................................................................................................10
1.2.5 Languages ..............................................................................................................................11
1.2.6 Image import/export ................................................................................................................12
1.2.7 ID Viewer.................................................................................................................................13
1.2.8 FL/FS ......................................................................................................................................15
1.2.9 Documentation ........................................................................................................................16
1.2.10 Viewers ...................................................................................................................................17
1.2.11 Hardware/Software Performance............................................................................................18
1.3 Open Problems .......................................................................................................................19
2 RELEASE INFO FOR CR QS 3.5.398 (SERVICE PACK 1)...................................................22

2.1 What is new in CR QS 3.5 SP1? ............................................................................................22
2.2 Solved Bugs in CR QS 3.5 SP1 compared to CR QS 3.5.372 ...............................................23
2.2.1 QC Viewer/Selector ................................................................................................................23
2.2.3 ID Viewer.................................................................................................................................23
2.2.4 ASPROs..................................................................................................................................24
2.2.5 Digitizer ...................................................................................................................................24
2.2.6 Printing ....................................................................................................................................24
2.2.7 DICOM ....................................................................................................................................25
2.2.8 Transmission to Destination....................................................................................................25
2.2.9 Transmission between Workstations ......................................................................................25
2.2.10 General ...................................................................................................................................25
2.3 Open Bugs ..............................................................................................................................26


Repair and Service
3 RELEASE INFO FOR CR QS 3.5.372 SU1............................................................................26

4 RELEASE INFO FOR CR QS 3.5.372....................................................................................27
4.1 What is new in CR QS 3.5.372? .............................................................................................27
4.2 Solved Bugs in CR QS 3.5.372 compared to CR QS 3.0.210................................................28
4.2.3 ID Viewer.................................................................................................................................28
4.2.4 ASPROs..................................................................................................................................29
4.2.5 CR Mammography Application ...............................................................................................29
4.2.6 Digitizer ...................................................................................................................................29
4.2.7 Printing ....................................................................................................................................29
4.2.8 DICOM ....................................................................................................................................30
4.2.9 Transmission between Workstations ......................................................................................30
4.2.10 Transmission to Destinations..................................................................................................30
4.2.11 General ...................................................................................................................................31
4.3 Open Bugs ..............................................................................................................................31
4.3.3 ID Viewer.................................................................................................................................32
4.3.4 Printing ....................................................................................................................................33
4.3.5 DICOM ....................................................................................................................................33
4.3.6 Transmission to Destinations..................................................................................................33
4.3.7 General ...................................................................................................................................33
5 LIST OF WINDOWS PATCHES AND PACKAGES WITHIN HOTFIX 3.0.15, HOTFIX 3.0.17,
HOTFIX 3.0.18, HOTFIX 3.0.19 AND HOTFIX 3.0.20............................................................35
5.1 New patches in Hotfix 3.0.15 ..................................................................................................35


Repair and Service
1 Release Info for CR QS 3.5.463 (Service Pack 2)
1.1 What is new in CR QS 3.5 SP2?
CR QS 3.5 SP2 is a bug solving update of SP1 without new functionalities. For a list of
all solved and open bugs refer to next chapters.
1.2 Solved Problems in CR QS 3.5 SP2 compared to CR QS 3.5 SP1
1.2.1 Configuration
1. Quote in exam tree causes Gateway to crash. (HQ_0607120002)

Symptom Quote in exam tree causes Gateway to crash.
Defect Single quotes were not handled correctly when forwarding to SQL Server
Solution SQL generator now does handle single quotes in values.
2. GUI settings can not be imported (HQ_0604040006)

Symptom GUI settings can not be imported
Defect No defect.
Solution This problem does not appear with QS 3.5 SP2
3. Partial Import of xml file : layouts not useable (HQ_0605080004)

Symptom After importing a configuration XML file, the print layout configuration is not set
correctly, even if it looks ok.
Defect Software deficiency
Solution After importing a configuration XML file, adapt the layout of each new exam again to
set up the printer association. (As documented in chapter 3.7 section 5.1.18)


Repair and Service
4. If bodypart descriptions are configured and contain German Umlaute,

studies can not be archived (HQ_0605240007).
Symptom Archive Problems if Bodypart contains German Umlaute like Ä Ö Ü
Defect If bodypart descriptions are configured and contain German Umlaute like Ä, Ö, Ü
(Example: WIRBELSÄULE) studies can not be archived.
Solution Use following letters instead:
Ä = AE
Ö = OE
Ü = UE
Example: WIRBELSAEULE
5. Names containing single quotes (e.g O'Malley, N'Guyen) cannot be used.

(HQ_0604130001)
Symptom Names containing single quotes (e.g O'Malley, N'Guyen) in ConfigView/Setup/Site
Information/Administration cannot be used.
If so, it's no more possible to delete, modify, or import a configuration XML with such a
name.
Defect SQL generator does not handle single quotes in values.
Solution SQL generator now does handle single quotes in values.
6. The Reading / Referring Physician fields are no longer editable and cannot
be sent to PACS. (HQ_0610180006/HQ_0606190004)
Symptom The Reading / Referring Physician fields are no longer editable and cannot be sent to
PACS.
Defect Workaround that worked for QS 2.1 and 3.0 (to map a different dicom field like Medical
Alerts and then map Medical Alerts to Referring / Reading Physician) is not applicable
on QS 3.5. IDViewer is forcing the use of component parts of the names – i.e. a field
for each separate part of the name - First, Last etc.
Solution Users can still use component parts but can also use the main field name. The name
part must be separated by a ^ key.


Repair and Service
7. Error message "Type Mismatch“ appears when importing a config-xml

from a 2.1 system into 3.5. (HQ_0606270002)
Symptom Error message "Type Mismatch“ appears when importing a config-xml from a 2.1
system into 3.5. It doesn't appear to affect the performance of the QS.
Defect Due to a difference in the config-xml for 2.1 & 3.5 this problem pops up.
Solution Error message will be suppressed, more detailed logging will be added.
1.2.2 Printing
1. Scale factor in the film text box missing for best fit (HQ_0607240002)
Symptom Scale factor in the film text box missing for best fit
(only appears as 100% for true size)
Defect Normal behaviour
Solution No changes in software.
Changes in requirements: scale factor will only be printed if scale factor = 100%
2. Printer definition files dated june 23th 2006 do not work with certain printers.
(HQ_0608240001)
Symptom Printer definition files dated june 23th 2006 do not work with certain printers.
Defect Printer Definition files are wrong.
Solution New set of Printer definition files included.
3. Print composer: sheets are displayed incorrectly while resizing the screen
(HQ_0608230003)
Symptom Print composer: sheets are displayed incorrectly while resizing the screen
Defect Refactoring error
Solution Fixed refactoring
4. Films are printed magnified on DRY 5500 : output is 14x17 instead of 11x14
(HQ_0504040001)
Symptom Films are printed magnified on DRY 5500 : output is 14x17 instead of 11x14
Defect Does not happen with QS3.5 anymore
Solution Fixed indirectly


Repair and Service
5. Printing and routing failed during stability test (HQ_0611130002)

Symptom Intermittently the automatic printing would not work after releasing the study.
Defect • Printing and routing failed
• Multi-threading issues + incorrect assumption about the object model
Solution Fix the two issues above.
6. QS server cannot handle high resolution of DS5500 images.

(HQ_0503010001)
Symptom QS server cannot handle high resolution of DS5500 images.
Defect Connectivity issue
Solution A new connectivity document for this printer was created. The problem is solved when
using this instruction.
7. Films keep on printing after reset (HQ_0606130003)

Symptom Films keep on printing after reset
Defect On cluster restart, the system determines what studies need to be printed based on
Printing Status is REQUESTED and CopyCount > 0
All such studies are then queued up for printing. The typo was that instead of
traversing this list - it always added the first item from the list of studies that met the
criteria into the print queue
Solution Fixed typo
8. Size of annotation not always correct. (HQ_0505310002)

Symptom Size of annotation not always correct. E.g.:
Normal "L" => OK on hardcopy
Enlarged "L" => Not present on Hardcopy
Reduced "L" => Enlarged on hardcopy.
Defect Not reproducible.
Solution No changes made.


Repair and Service
9. Image textbox is empty on Multiple-Image HCP layout. (HQ_0702280003)

Symptom If image is printed in TRUE-SIZE mode, the image textbox is empty on Multiple-Image
HCP layout.
Defect Software bug
Solution Software bug solved
10. Image is printed black. (HQ_0707260010)

Symptom Images printed from a client come out black. Only the demographics and annotations
are visible. Printing from the server works, though. The image processing component
is logging exceptions for each time a print is issued
Defect Software bug
Solution Software bug solved in QS 3.5 SP2 + Hotfix CD 3.0.20
1.2.3 Restore
1. Restore Toolkit: Problem with restore CD's. (HQ_0507010001)

Symptom Problem with restore CD's
Solution PSO streams backup fixed, and added possibility not to erase 2nd drive as requested
(to keep backup's)
2. System does not display images after restore (HQ_0607050001)

Symptom System does not display images after restore
Defect After QS 3.5 Server restore from Restore CD + Application CD Studies can not be
viewed. Restore CD was created with RTK 3.0.17.
Application starts, IPD selector allows to search for study list, But application hangs up
when one tries to open any study (Test images as well as newly imported studies).
The same problem while restoring another Server using restore CD Set created via the
same RTK CD.
Solution Solved in new RTK 3.0.18


Repair and Service
3. After restore the system asks for the CR QS 3.5 CD if the user wants to clean
up patient data. (HQ_0503140004)
Symptom At first startup after the restore the system asks if the user wants to clean up patient
data. If 'yes' is selected the system will ask for the CR QS 3.5 CD
Defect Restore CD requires application SW CD
Solution Modified restore tool kit. RTK 3.0.18 does no longer need the application SW CD after
a restore.
(During final restore the windows installer is temporarily disabled to prevent launch of
the installer process, by the import of the test images which calls the database.)
4. . Print layouts disappear after restore (HQ_0505110001)

Symptom After loading of restore CD all print layouts have disappeared.
Defect Restore CD requires application software CD
Solution Modified restore tool kit. RTK 3.0.18 does no longer need the application software CD
after a restore.
1.2.4 Server
1. Client loses connection to server (observed on CR QS 3.0) (HQ_0510100001)

Symptom Client loses connection to server (observed on CR QS 3.0)
Defect The described behavior did not occur during verification of QS 3.5 SP2.
Solution Solved indirectly, not reproducible after thorough testing.
2. Image disappearing after transferring an image to another study and

additionally add another image to the study via digitizer. (HQ_0607050002)
Symptom Image disappear if:
(1) Study was created in ID-Viewer by means of RIS-worklist
(2) Image is transferred to another study (also created with RIS-WL)
(3) New image received from digitizer into 2nd study (study Status INPROGRESS)
Defect Wrong Query in software
Solution Some modification in Gateway are made to be sure that existing studies will not be
overwritten on QS 3.5 SP2.


Repair and Service
3. Client suddenly reacts slow and shows image processing errors.

(HQ_0701150001)
Symptom The client suddenly blocks, reacts very slow and displays image processing errors with
no apparent reason.
Defect HyperThreading is possibly enabled in BIOS
Solution Documented in Troubleshooting Guide No.2 (DD+DIS212.07E) section
1.1 “Hardware/Software and Network”
1.2.5 Languages
1. Hebrew is not supported (HQ_0606210001)

Symptom Hebrew is not supported
Defect Missing charset for Hebrew ISO 2022 IR6
Solution Added the missing part needed for Hebrew File: qsmk.xml
2. QS Server 3.5 does not receive Latin 2 (e.g. polish character) from IMPAX.
(HQ_0607180001/HQ_0604240003)
Symptom QS Server 3.5 which should support Latin 2 (e.g. polish character) does not receive
e.g. polish characters from IMPAX.
Defect The ISO_IR 101 (Latin 2) and the 138 (hebrew) character sets are not supported by
DMWL nor by the Storage SOP Class.
Solution Incorporated new version of DICOM lib 2.2.2731.5572
3. Russian language: the message "remove cassette" does not come up

correctly, instead bar code characters are displayed. (HQ_0512280001)
Symptom On systems set to the Russian language the message "remove cassette" does not
come up correctly, instead bar code characters are displayed.
Defect Setting of language for non_Unicode not done correctly.
Solution Solved by using the right install instructions. (Upgrade Instructions enclosed to
upgrade kit)


Repair and Service
4. Translation error in Italian version of Configuration Viewer (HQ_0412150001)

Symptom Translation error in Italian version of Configuration Viewer
Defect "Fotogramma" is wrong translation.
Solution Adjusted by translation.
5. Studies with Greek characters cannot be sent to PACS (HQ_0705220003)

Symptom CR QS 3.5 SP1: Sending studies containing Greek characters to the PACS does not
work.
Defect Character set not supported.
Solution Character set is supported in SP2.
1.2.6 Image import/export
1. Dicom Export to CD also exports rejected images (HQ_0612040001)

Symptom Dicom Export to CD also exports rejected images
Defect Rejected images should not be exported.
Solution DICOM Export does not export rejected images anymore.
2. Dicom Viewer on a CD with exported study cannot be opened

(HQ_0610020001)
Symptom Dicom Viewer on a CD with exported study cannot be opened
Defect On systems with GMT-negative settings (e.g. US), the viewer produces an error.
Solution Added a viewer.bat file that has to be used to open the viewer.
3. Frequently GUI freezes when exporting a big amount of studies or images.

(HQ_0604200001)
Symptom Frequently GUI freezes when exporting a big amount of studies or images.
Defect When Dicom Export size exceeds CD capacity the system doesn't display a correct
error message. Instead it keeps processing the images until the C-drive of the
harddisk gets full → an unclear error message is shown.


Repair and Service
Solution Error messages are displayed outlining:

• How many free space is available and how many free space is needed.
• The DICOM export process is ended since there is not sufficient free space
• In case the comparison between the needed space and free space comes to a
minimum the error message is shown during the export of the studies to CD.
4. Rejected images are exported to CD (HQ_0612040001)
Symptom This case consists of two problems:

Problem 1: When exporting the images with Dicom Export, also rejected images are
exported to the CD. As a result, the person who receives the CD also has to browse
through all the rejected images before he/she finds the correct one.
Problem 2: Image comments written in the ID viewer are not displayed on the exported
images on the Viewer on the CD.
Defect Software bug.
Solution Problem 1 is solved. Rejected images are not exported anymore in QS 3.5 SP2.
Problem 2: No workaround applicable.
5. DICOM worklist problem after upgrading from QS 2.1 (HQ_0612070004)
Symptom Dicom worklist query doesn’t work as expected

Defect Only one AE title is defined in the RIS settings
Solution Refer to the CR QS 3.5 Troubleshooting Guide No. 2 (DD+DIS212.07E) section
“CR QS 3.5 Upgrade Topics” for a workaround.
1.2.7 ID Viewer
1. It takes long until the id viewer switches to the next selected exposure.
(HQ_0504010002)
Symptom It takes too long until the id viewer switches to the next selected exposure.
Defect Repeated re-loading of logo file caused slow-down
Solution Fixed logic to avoid repeated re-loading.


Repair and Service
2. Identifying cassettes of one study on different clusters or ID stations. is not

supported. (HQ_0606230001/HQ_0608010001)
Symptom Identifying cassettes of one study on different clusters or ID stations is not supported.
Defect Continuing a study on a different ID station is not possible.
Solution The service documentation (chapter 3.7) now instructs the FSE to instruct the
customer to identify all cassettes of one study always on one and the same cluster and
on one and the same ID station.
3. Selecting entry in WL takes up to 10 secs (HQ_0605240002)

Symptom Selecting entry in WL takes up to 10 secs
Defect We could also at start-up load and cache all the ExamSets, but this will result in a long
start-up time of IDViewer, this decision ; to load and cache, at selecting a new
ExamSet has been taken from the start of 3.0 already.
Solution Fixed indirectly.
4. Usage count is not used any more (HQ_0603210003)

Symptom Usage count is not used any more
Defect One object (IDViewerDoc) caches the values of the cassette-TAG.
After initializing the cassette and writing, without removing the cassette, this object will
use the cashed values of the cassette TAG!
This is no problem for all the other parameters that are initialized, because they are
not affected by a normal identification, except for the usages count.
Solution Changed the code that the cached value of usage count in the IDViewerDoc object
also gets reset when this is performed by initialize cassette.
5. It takes a long time before the "Remove Cassette" message appears.

(HQ_0605300004/HQ_0607130002)
Symptom After pressing the “Write” button, the IDViewer takes a long time before the "Remove
Cassette" message appears. (Duration depends on the number of exposures available
in the tree). This leads to confusion since the confirming beep sounds immediately
after pressing the “Write” button.
Defect No Defect – Normal Behaviour.
The delay between the beep and the second message is the time it takes to write to
the DB.
Solution No code change done.
There is a first message (+ beep) and a second message. A delay of 3 to 5 seconds
for a 20 image study is acceptable.


Repair and Service
6. the cursor (blue bar) doesn't show the last worked subexam/exposure after
reopening (HQ_0610230005)
Symptom When re-opening a study in QS 3.5 ID Viewer the cursor (blue bar) doesn't show
directly the last worked subexam/exposure, but stays at the top subexam of the list.
QS2.1 and QS3.0 jumped directly to the last worked subexam/exposure.
Defect Refactoring error.
Solution Error fixed.
7. Parameters of ID Viewer lost after upgrade. (HQ_0606190003)

Symptom Parameters of ID Viewer lost after upgrade.
Defect Restore script incomplete.
Solution For upgrade from QS 3.5 the registry and database is restored as well.
For upgrades from lower than QS 3.5 the parameters have to be noted down and
reentered after upgrade (Documentation is adapted).
8. Error reading Learning mode file after upgrade. (HQ_0610090002)

Symptom Error reading Learning mode file after upgrade
Defect Error in learning mode file
Solution The command counter is changed, it will be increased only in case valid commands
are found.
The error message is replaced by a warning log, because no harm is done when this
happens.
9. IDVFormNoPrint template is creating an error message (HQ_0609180005)

Symptom IDVFormNoPrint template is creating an error message
Defect The class DisplayItem used an empty collection in case the sheet size is not displayed
on the GUI.
Solution New IDVFormNoPrint template integrated in the software.
1.2.8 FL/FS
1. The Date/time stamp is displayed in wrong format. (HQ_0605080003)

Symptom The Date/time stamp is displayed in wrong format (country specific) on FL/FS stitched
image.
Defect Software bug
Solution System settings must be set according to the respective country.


Repair and Service
2. FL/FS Images cannot be stitched with rejected images anymore.

(HQ_0606190002)
Symptom FL/FS Images from 3.0 cannot be stitched with rejected images anymore on 3.5.
SW indicates error "not sufficient images supplied".
Defect No defect.
Solution The conditions for stitching in different software versions are documented in FSB 4,
section 6.
3. Add (or copy) exposure does not copy the operation code "FL" for full
leg/spine. (HQ_0601310001)
Symptom Add (or copy) exposure does not copy the operation code "FL" for full leg/spine.
Defect The copy exposure process did not copy the OperationCode to the newly created
exposure.
Solution Ensure OperationCode is copied
4. HIS verification fails sporadically. (HQ_0610060007)

Symptom HIS verification fails sporadically
Defect CR QS 3.0 sends no StationName for Stitched FLFS-Image.
Solution Fixed in Software:
• (0008,1010) Station Name = <host name digitizer> for individual images of a
FLFS study
• (0008,1010) Station Name = <host name QS station> for the stiched image of a
FLFS study
1.2.9 Documentation
1. Problems during Upgrade to QS 3.5.392 (HQ_0606200001)

Symptom Problems during Upgrade to QS 3.5.392
Defect Several deficiencies in Upgrade Documentation QS 3.5.392 (See list of comments
attached to GSC case)
Solution The comments are worked into the Upgrade Documentation to QS 3.5 SP2


Repair and Service
2. Renaming the file IDVRisDefault.xml while ID Viewer is open triggers

msiexec. Msiexec then runs in a loop. (HQ_0701040004)
Symptom Renaming the file IDVRisDefault.xml while ID Viewer is open triggers msiexec.
Msiexec then runs in a loop. The only choice is pressing “Cancel” and then it starts
again, stating it can't gather information for installing CR QS 3.5.
Defect Deficiency in the documentation.
Solution Documentation is improved.
1.2.10 Viewers
1. Resizing the thumbnails pane in QC and IPD Viewers distorts the images.
(HQ_0608230004)
Symptom Resizing the thumbnails pane in QC and IPD Viewers distorts the images. Need to use
F5 to recover the images.
Defect Refactoring error
Solution Refactoring fixed
2. Unreject button is not available on clients (does not happen on server)

(HQ_0602100006)
Symptom Unreject button is not available on clients (does not happen on server)
Defect Only a minor refresh problem was noticed when switching from a rejected to an
unrejected image.
Solution Not reproducible. Reject Analysis Toolkit license must be enabled.
3. CR Mammography: image produces error message on display

(HQ_0609140003)
Symptom QS-Viewer issues error message. Image does not open.
Defect Software bug
Solution Solved in QS 3.5 SP2.


Repair and Service
4. Viewer freezes on server (HQ_0707260009/HQ_0707260002)
Symptom An error pops up on the server and the viewer freezes. It is still possible to work on the
clients, though.
Defect Software bug
Solution Solved in QS 3.5 SP2 + Hotfix CD 3.0.20.
1.2.11 Hardware/Software Performance
5. Weakened performance due to full hard disk (HQ_0706150002)
Symptom • Weak system performance.

• Creation of a restore image takes longer and more CDs are necessary to save
the restore image.
• Hotfix-CD installation takes very long.
Defect A very full hard disk of the CR QS 3.5 has negative effects on the system.
Solution Recommendation: By turning off the automatic Windows System Restore one can
save space on the hard disk and counteract the negative effects mentioned above.
Refer to CR QS 3.5 SB No. 14 “Turn off automatic Windows System Restore to
improve Performance and gain free Disk Space” (DD+DIS262.07E)


Repair and Service
1.3 Open Problems
1. "DicomSeriesInstance UID" on image is blank and the image is not

transmitted to PACS (HQ_0702120006)
Symptom "DicomSeriesInstance UID" on image is blank and the image is not transmitted to
PACS
Defect This problem happens infrequently
Workaround Refer to the CR QS 3.5 Troubleshooting Guide No. 2 (DD+DIS212.07E)
section “Archiving” for a workaround.
2. Transmit destination is not automatically remembered anymore

(HQ_0702060006)
Symptom On older CR QS versions the last selected transmit destination was automatically
remembered and shown after clicking the <Transmit> button. This does not work
anymore on QS 3.5. When clicking the <Transmit> button, the destinations are
always displayed.
Defect Software design
Workaround Manually choose the transmit destination.
3. Error message "There is a difference between the stored data and the
displayed data " (HQ_0702120005)
Symptom Error message "There is a difference between the stored data and the displayed data "
is shown. You can choose between the “displayed” or the “stored” data.
Defect An already existing patient ID has been entered.
section “QC Viewer” for a workaround.
4. Copy Button is disabled (HQ_0701040006)
Symptom The copy button is disabled when study has been re-opened from history.
Defect Software design


Repair and Service
5. LGM value in the status bar is not updated (HQ_0612060002)
Symptom The LGM value in the status bar is not updated after recollimation and clicking "Save
Study"
Workaround No workaround applicable.
6. QC-Viewer image demographics not updated (HQ_0612040004)
Symptom When switching from one study to another, the exposure description displayed in QC-
Viewer image demographics is not updated.
7. In system properties “Registered to”, the “Product Key” is displayed

(HQ_0610170004)
Symptom When looking up the “Properties” of “My Computer” on a CR QS system the

“Product Key” is displayed in the section “Registered to”.
Defect Normally the “Product ID” should be displayed here. The Product Key was wrongly
implemented by Agfa.
Workaround No workaround.
8. Printaspro.exe errors appear (HQ_0607120003)
Symptom Printaspro.exe errors appear when using the FLFS feature with auto-print enabled in
ID Viewer. When you restart the cluster after the Printaspro errors, the system tries
again to print the single images and then the Printaspro errors appear again.
Defect Not known.
section “Full Leg Full Spine” for a workaround.
9. AutoQC Contrast Test fails. (HQ_0607030002)
Symptom AutoQC Contrast Test fails.

Defect Error in converting from mR to uGy
section “Auto QC” for a workaround.


Repair and Service
10. Error in the compass gate way (HQ_0603280001)
Symptom Error in the compass gate way when the “degree” symbol (°) is used in the name of a
sub exam.
Defect Compass gate way aspro does not accept the “degree” symbol.
11. The Print composer starts/is very slow. (HQ_0605020003)

Symptom It takes a long time to open a study with the print composer.
Defect Not known.
section “Printing” for a workaround.
12. Images get stuck on digitizer in Warning status.

(HQ_0606190006/HQ_0606190007/HQ_0610230007/HQ_0606070005)
Symptom Images get stuck on digitizer in Warning status.
Error on digitizer: “QS NOT READY” and CompasGWASPRO Errors on Message
Console.
Defect Threading issue. The update to a list of attributes was done in two steps that modified
the list in a manner where any other thread relying on the list would raise errors.


Repair and Service
2 Release Info for CR QS 3.5.398 (Service Pack 1)
2.1 What is new in CR QS 3.5 SP1?
• When you do a DICOM export a TSI Viewer is automatically added to the CD in

order to be able to view the exported studies independently from the QS station.
Since CR QS 3.5 SP1 a new version of TSI Viewer is used. With this new version
it is possible to view exported studies also on a PC with Windows 2000 as
operating system.
• Together with CR QS 3.5 SP1 OS installation CD 3.0.108 has been released.
The new features of the OS installation CD are:
o pcAnywhere automatically installed
o remote assistance account for administrator and crservice created
automatically for domain (local machine)
• In the Advanced QC Viewer it is not possible to customize the favorite pane for
ICRImage and ICRSeries any more.
• Learning mode reviewed: After an upgrade from ADC QS 2.1 or
• CR QS 3.0 the available IDV_ExamTreeMap.txt files for defining the mapping
between RIS and CR QS exposures can be used for CR QS 3.5. Just make sure
to safe this file before the upgrade and store it in the respective folder on CR QS
3.5 again.
• When coming from RIS, any blanks at the beginning or the end of the Patient ID
will be deleted automatically before it is used by the QS system.
• For CR QS 3.5 Mammo systems the licenses “Interface to X-ray Modality” and
“Manual entry of X-ray parameters” do not support the transfer of the Estimated
Radiographic Magnification Factor to the archive destination any more.
• A normal user can now reboot the system and restart the cluster. Before, this has
only been possible when logged in as administrator or crservice.
• Auto-release is also possible for studies with empty image containers.


Repair and Service
2.2 Solved Bugs in CR QS 3.5 SP1 compared to CR QS 3.5.372
2.2.1 QC Viewer/Selector
1 Images taken 1 – 3 days before are not shown in QC Viewer although images of the
last 7 days are in the system. This problem has been observed on ADC QS 2.1.xx and
CR QS 3.0. (HQ_0408240002, HQ_0510240002)
2 When changing the annotations, this change is not being saved. This problem has
been observed on ADC QS 2.1.xx and CR QS 3.0 (HQ_0406180001)
3 When opening QC Viewer, error message “Unable to create QC Viewer” comes up.
4 When zooming (mainly) bone edges appear with bad resolution (HQ_0407280001)
5 Studies get unintentionally released in QC Viewer. (HQ_0405070003)
6 When one study contains more than one sub-study, only one sub-study is selectable in
the Musica menu of QC Viewer/Selector (HQ_0508020004)
1 The option “Autodelete studies containing rejected images” is not checked by default.
If this option is not checked, studies containing rejected images fill up the hard disk
and, as a consequence, new studies are being deleted earlier than they should.
(HQ_0601100003)
2.2.3 ID Viewer
1 Edition patient data creates a new patient folder which is a copy of the previous one
(incl. image). When one folder is deleted, the image disappears from both folders. This
problem has been observed on CR QS 3.0. (HQ_0503020003)
2 Gateway ASPRO crash occurs and an error message comes up when an invalid
character has been used during patient identification. As a consequence, the image
can not be transmitted from the digitizer to the QS system. (HQ_0510260002)
3 Learning mode works not fine: when Patient ID is sent from the RIS and more than one
exposure is selected, all the sub-exams and exposures are not saved in the
IDVExamTreeMap.txt file (HQ_0507120002)
4 Wrong routing destination selection in ID Viewer, while selecting multiple items from
DMWL. (HQ_0404130002)
5 Patient ID confirmation box coming up when working without RIS (HQ_0601130003)
6 QS creates new Patient ID if ID in ID-Viewer only contains letters (HQ_0510200003)


Repair and Service
7 After upgrading from CR QS 3.0 Automatic study selection does not work any more
(HQ_0604050004)
8 ProcedureStep.Description does not contain the correct exam name chosen in ID
Viewer. (HQ_0606220002)
9 ID Viewer startup with error message on the first time (HQ_0605240001).
2.2.4 ASPROs
1 Storage saturated because old studies are not deleted by DiskMon Aspro
(HQ_0510040003)
2.2.5 Digitizer
1 When sending an image from a digitizer to CR QS 3.0 workstation an error message

appears communicating that (dosemon) files on the E:\partition are missing.
(HQ_0503080001)
2 First image of study does not appear in its folder on the QS but in new study folder.
The original study folder only contains empty images. All subsequent images of the
study are not transmitted to CR-QS server but remain on digitizer with status
""WARNING"" (HQ_0507070001)
2.2.6 Printing
1 Position of the rulers in Print Composer is odd when image was moved using the “roam
over image” tool (HQ_0601130002)
2 When moving images into the Print Composer using drag-and-drop functionality, the
images appear noisy on monitor. Printed version, however, is OK. (HQ_0510070002)
3 "No print" is saved in ID Viewer preferences. When selecting another exam name than
the default one the number of copy gets to 1. As a consequence the PrintingStatus sets
to REQUESTED, and if the study was decided not to be printed, it will be 24h later
anyway because of the ReleaseASPRO (HQ_0601130001).
4 Favorite layouts are lost, and all standard layouts and new self-made layouts are
copied both into folder standard and favorite layouts (HQ_0406020001)
5 QS server cannot handle high resolution of DS5500 images. Printing is very slow.
(HQ_0503010001)
6 Customer specific textbox logo is only applied for Administrator account
(HQ_0509050003)


Repair and Service
2.2.7 DICOM
1 Required DICOM tag PixelAspectRatio (0028,0034) not sent empty. As a consequence

images seem to be compressed (HQ_0601130004).
2.2.8 Transmission to Destination
1 When sending image to PACS, annotation grid not transmitted (HQ_0411090001)

2 Image transmission to PACS failed when study contains more than four studies.
(HQ_0507200002)
2.2.9 Transmission between Workstations
1 Transmission of images between two CR QS 3.5 SP1 systems does not work
(HQ_0605020002)
2.2.10 General
1 After various reboots the OS Change Script is not working any more
(HQ_0507120001).
2 Black borders should be darker than they are (HQ_0404190001) (COM0405250153)
3 Cannot log in on QS client system without dropping local user session
(HQ_0503030004)
4 SQL error when importing xml file (HQ_0505190006)
5 Opening an image taken the day before is not possible. An error message pops up
(HQ_0602080001)
6 Auto QC causes errors for Spatial and Contrast Phantom images: “found unacceptable
marker position”, “failed finding markers”, “underexposed or fully collimated”, “failed
measuring contrast wedge” (HQ_0604210002)
7 Integration of CR QS 3.5 workgroup into hospital domain does not work
(HQ_0604250002)
8 After loading restore CD all print layouts have disappeared (HQ_0505110001)


Repair and Service
2.3 Open Bugs
1 After importing the configuration xml file from ADC QS 2.1 an error occurs:
“The value of HoldTimeOut must be > than 60” (HQ_0508080001).
2 After importing study tree xml file from ADC QS 2.1 a SQL error occurs. CR QS 3.5
study tree does not support single quotes (‘), e.g in the radiographer’s name O’Hara
(HQ_0505190006).
3 After upgrade to CR QS 3.5 SP1, an error message comes up when starting the ID
Viewer (HQ_0605020001).
4 After upgrade to CR QS 3.5 SP1 RIS DMWL is very slow (HQ_0605020005)
5 After upgrade to CR QS 3.5 SP1 Print Composer is very slow (HQ_0605020003)
6 Study type name in the ID Viewer does not match with study type in the IPD Viewer
List View Pane
Workaround: See chapter 3.3 in the CR QS 3.5 Service Manual (DD+DIS302.05E)
7 Display card causes problems on Dell Precision WS670 after installation of OS CD
3.0.108.
3 Release Info for CR QS 3.5.372 SU1
With CR QS 3.5.372 SU1 the following bug has been solved:

Auto QC is not able to process Spatial and Contrast Phantom images. As a
consequence, the following error messages come up:
• error 1: “found unacceptable marker position”
• error 2: “failed finding markers”
• error 3: “underexposed or fully collimated”
• error 4: “failed measuring contrast wedge”


Repair and Service
4 Release Info for CR QS 3.5.372
4.1 What is new in CR QS 3.5.372?
The CR QS 3.5 is based on the CR QS 3.0.

The main changes compared to the CR QS 3.0 are:
• CR QS 3.5 systems can be operated in a standalone workgroup or be integrated
into an existing hospital domain.
• ADC QS 2.1 MR4 functionalities:
o Cleanup Studies including Failed Studies (Diskmon)
o Patient Orientation for sending out to PACS Systems changed
o QC Viewer: Combined Force Release
o Print Composer
• new functionalities:
o fast preview
o DICOM export
o extended storage
o P-values
o extended character set
o improved selection
• changed functionalities:
o black border
o reject analysis toolset
o GUI customization
NOTE:
For a more detailed description of the subjects stated above refer to chapter 2 in this
service manual.
NOTE:
The CR QS 3.5 is not supported for the DX-S digitizer.


Repair and Service
4.2 Solved Bugs in CR QS 3.5.372 compared to CR QS 3.0.210
1 Updated demographics don't update in the ON HOLD and RELEASED folder of the
Advanced QC Viewer (COM0210210009).
2 Image is temporarily displayed in wrong orientation in QC Viewer (HQ_0403080002).
3 Advanced QC Viewer fails to refresh at times (COM0307300004).
4 AutoRelease does not work on studies with empty image containers.
5 Selecting a sub-study gives the false impression that the exposure types are not auto-
selected.
6 QC Viewer selection of FL/FS images only covers basic case
(COM0310280044/COM0310280028).
7 Image status changes from REJECTED to VERIFIED which should not be possible
(COM0306110001).
8 Images with status FAILED fill up image cache (COM020613006).
9 Use of different character sets in the ID Viewer fields does not work (HQ_0504270002).
10 Selecting new Worklist Favorite View causes an error (COM0309300003).
11 Image Feeze function has no effect if study is not set ON HOLD (HQ_0501260002).
1 Translation error in Italian version of Configuration Viewer

"Frame On" --> "Fotogramma" is not translated correctly (HQ_0412150001).
4.2.3 ID Viewer
1 Bug known from ADC QS 2.1.59: Copy Exposure functionality in

ID Viewer doesn’t work properly (HQ_0404130003) .
2 All examinations identified with DirectID have the cassette size
8 x 10 inch (HQ_0402170001, COM0402170016).
3 Viewer does not take configured speed class (COM0312290007).
4 Bar in ID Viewer does not jump like expected (COM0308120030 and
COM0311110026).


Repair and Service
5 Closed studies can not be viewed. The reason for this was a bug in the ID Viewer SW
(COM0309260023).
6 Cassette size information is missing in "Study Info" and also in BOExplorer. ID Viewer
doesn’t write the information on the chip (HQ_0602170002).
4.2.4 ASPROs
1 Abnormal behavior of Release ASPRO: after printing, HOLDed studies get DONE
PrintingStatus, but when the ASPRO releases them, the PrintingStatus goes to
CANCELLED. It still should be to DONE. (HQ_0506140003).
2 COMPAS Gateway ASPRO errors and images lost (HQ_0506220003).
3 Storage gets saturated because of INPROGRESS studies that can not be deleted by
Diskmon ASPRO (HQ_0506140002).
4.2.5 CR Mammography Application
1 CR Mammography, image quality problem. One out of four images in one study has
"grayish" appearance (HQ_0501120004).
4.2.6 Digitizer
1 Image from CR 75 or CR 25 not received. Mk.exe error messages showing up and

multiple errors on Message Console. (HQ_0504190003).
4.2.7 Printing
1 Printing from Print Composer is very slow (HQ_0506020003).

2 Not possible to save changes in Print Composer if Smart Print License is not activated
(HQ_0505090003 and HQ_0506200001).
3 “The previous printing job is still in progress. Please wait” message comes up when
user replaces layout un the Print Composer and then prints “selected” while no layout
has been selected (HQ_0507210001).
4 True size printing: Not WYSIWYG (COM0303120031).


Repair and Service
5 Ruler missing on 14 x 17 cm true-size print (COM0303260009).

6 GUI update of Print Composer not consistent (HQ_0406300001).
7 Zoom factor in Print Composer not updated correctly (HQ_0405130003).
8 Quick Print sometimes generates 2 copies (HQ_0405070001).
9 Although the Rename button in the Print Composer is inactive, it is possible to rename
the standard layout (COM0210150013).
4.2.8 DICOM
1 Wrong link for 19,1015 in the defaultdicomtransformer.xml (HQ_0504050007).

2 Dicom Tag 0020,0010 requested by Siemens MV300 is missing if images are sent by
CR QS 3.0.xx. (HQ_0504130002) (HQ_0505200003).
3 CR QS 3.0 (Japanese): Phonetic name not displayed correctly in DMWL
(HQ_0508310003).
4.2.9 Transmission between Workstations
1 Trust between two CR QS 3.0 clusters, each in a different subnet, doesn't work
(HQ_0507110002).
4.2.10 Transmission to Destinations
1 Transmission failures on ADC QS 2.1.46 (COM0309300005).

2 Transmission problem between CR QS 3.0 and archive stations
Æ QS freezes (HQ_0506010007).
3 Manual transmit from a partial study before releasing from QC Viewer Æ Study is not
send to the defined destination (HQ_0404010001).
4 Not transmitted images do not go to PACS when manually transmitted as partial study
(COM0311240008).
5 Inverted images after sending from CR QS 3.0.263 to PACS archive station
(HQ_0602240001, HQ_0602130006, HQ_0602130004, HQ_0602130003)


Repair and Service
6 GE PACS cannot handle character set ISO 2022 IR 6 (HQ_0503290001)

German “Umlaute”, like "Ä / Ö / Ü" are not correctly transmitted to a
GE PACS.
Affected Systems:
• GE PACS IX Centricity Version 2.0
• GE Enterprise Archive version 1.0
4.2.11 General
1 The RIS selection screen is not closed after pressing the select button
(HQ_0504050005).
2 Date format in RIS selection screen remains in format MM/DD/YY (HQ_0504050003).
3 RIS selection screen can not be resized (HQ_0504050004).
4 Error message popping up sporadically which do not have an impact on the operation
of the QS but are disturbing for the operator (HQ_0501170003)
5 Disturbing message on the server message console: “QS_WARN <date> <time>
ADCAcct GSSERVER mk.exe (4008) Update on subscriber ‘BusinessAgenT’:0
(<number>) failed. It has been removed from all subscriptions” (HQ_0503310002).
6 After reboot numerous error messages pop up when logging in.
Messages disturb user although the Server performs well (HQ_0506070001).
7 No functionality available to initialize Extremities cassettes
(HQ_0511280004).
4.3 Open Bugs
1 When deleting multiple studies in IPD Selector, a HIPAA error message pops up.
2 Removing the last button from a custom toolbar removes the whole toolbar.
3 Selecting an ON HOLD study within the On Hold Pane causes an error.
4 In QC Viewer, when customizing the fields of the 'Favorites' pane, it is possible to get a
dialog box of the IPD Selector application displayed after having made the
modifications.
5 Displaying worklist without selecting a study generates an error message.


Repair and Service
6 When changing patient data using the “Edit patient data” from the context menu in the
ID Viewer, a second folder with the same study is added in the
IPD Selector (HQ_050302003).
7 Possible to reject an image with status IDENTIFIED.
8 After editing, patient name is not adjusted in all the viewers.
9 When opening QC Viewer, error message
“Unable to create QC Viewer” comes up.
10 Focus on the study is lost in the QC Viewer when deleting one of its images.
11 A deleted study in IPD Selector on a client system does not disappear automatically.
12 Wrong border density and text background are saved when changing maximum
density.
13 QC Viewer does not show all today’s studies.
14 Switching between viewers when customizing toolbars generates an error.
15 No saving is done in IPD Viewer when setting focus on another image in
Multiple Image Mode.
16 When changing the annotations, this change is not being saved. This problem has
been observed on ADC QS 2.1.xx and CR QS 3.0 (HQ_0406180001)
17 Images with status RELEASED taken 1 – 3 days before are not shown in QC Viewer
although images of the last 7 days are in the system. This problem has been observed
on ADC QS 2.1.xx and CR QS 3.0.
(HQ_0408240002, HQ_0510240002)
1 Configuration Viewer stalls when applying a zero value for the ambient luminance
setting.
2 Incorrect warning message when filling in an out-of-range ambient luminance value
(printer settings).
3 The option “Autodelete studies containing rejected images” is not checked by default. If
this option is not checked, studies containing rejected images fill up the hard disk and,
as a consequence, new studies are being deleted earlier than they should.
(HQ_0601100003)
4.3.3 ID Viewer
1 Possible to delete Custom Body Part when it is used in another

sub-study type.


Repair and Service
2 Edition patient data creates a new patient folder which is a copy of the previous one
(incl. image). When one folder is deleted, the image disappears from both folders. This
problem has been observed on
CR QS 3.0. (HQ_0503020003)
3 Gateway ASPRO crash occurs and an error message comes up when an invalid
character has been used during patient identification. As a consequence, the image
can not be transmitted from the digitizer to the QS system. (HQ_0510260002)
4.3.4 Printing
1 "Object not connected to server" error message when opening

Print Composer as qsuser.
2 Position of the rulers in Print Composer is odd when image was moved.
3 A misleading error message is shown when trying to print an empty image container.
4 When choosing option ‘Print the selected heading and all subtopics’ in a viewer help
file, error messages come up.
5 Changing the Print Template in ID Viewer is not consistent.
4.3.5 DICOM
1 When sending data containing single byte Katakana (Patient.Name_Phon) no data is

shown in RIS window and the configuration of the RIS window is lost.
2 Dicom store fails for some PACS systems.
3 Query builder of MWL is containing wrong attributes.
4 When opening the DICOM file generated by QS DICOM Store or DICOM Export,
(0010,1010) Patient Age is missing.
4.3.6 Transmission to Destinations
1 Image transmission to PACS fails but the routing status is set to DONE and no error
message comes up.
4.3.7 General


Repair and Service
1 LogCollector gives an error when collecting the logging files.

2 Resizing a row in the textbox editor resizes the text as well.
3 Changing the IP address of the CR QS system gives errors.
4 Headline Logging incomplete for several actions.
5 Text annotations in images imported from ADC QS 2.1 systems are blown up. On CR
QS 3.5 these annotations are ten times as larges as they should.
6 Predefined text annotations are lost after an upgrade from
ADC QS 2.1.
7 Grid Padding causes error message when saving layout.
8 PcAnywhere creates some unused directories on the backup drive.
9 Imported Patient List not active when initial patient list is exported first.
10 Dicom Export shows wrong behavior when export size exceeds CD capacity.
11 ‘Equally Space all Selected Lines’ in Layout Editor generates a runtime error in some
cases.
12 Double storage of values when importing a cpffile.
13 The list of fields on which the user can sort in the ‘Advanced Search’ dialog is not
according to the specifications.


Repair and Service
5 List of Windows Patches and Packages within Hotfix 3.0.15,

Hotfix 3.0.17, Hotfix 3.0.18, Hotfix 3.0.19 and Hotfix 3.0.20
NOTE:
The Hotfixes can be used on CR-QS 3.5 (XP-server and client) , NX OS and
Musicabox OS.
The following list of patches just indicates where possible issues might occur,
and which areas need special attention during testing.
5.1 New patches in Hotfix 3.0.15
Patch / Possibly affected or broken components to be tested in

Package depth:
MS04-038 - Cumulative Security Update for Internet Explorer (replace of

KB834707 ms04-025)
KB884016 Installation of software and packages e.g. CR QS 3.0.xxx
MS04-041 - Vulnerability in WordPad

KB885836
MS04-043 - Vulnerability in HyperTerminal

KB873339
MS04-044 - Vulnerabilities in Windows Kernel and LSASS

KB885835 • Server – client authentication
• Remote login: ftp, remote desktop,
• Active directory login, join domain, chngsrv
MS05-001 - Vulnerability in HTML Help

KB890175 • SP2 affected! – HTML Help files
Windows XP Complete package.

SP2 • From network connectivity, to application compatibility
with SP2 to HTML help in all apps.


Repair and Service

Package depth:
MS05-007 - Vulnerability in Windows

KB888302 • Pipe vuln. (XP SP2) Æ Network browsing
• Specially look for Print & File Sharing, e.g. Printing from a
client using a printer spooled on the server.
• Also configuration of network devices might be affected.
MS05-008 - Vulnerability in Windows Shell

KB890047 • Related to surfing and e-mail: not critical for CR-QS
MS05-011 - Vulnerability in Server Message Block

KB885250 • Print & File Sharing
MS05-012 - Vulnerability in OLE and COM

KB873333
MS05-013 - Vulnerability in the DHTML Editing Component ActiveX

KB891781 Control
• Related to surfing and e-mail: not critical for CR-QS
MS05-014 - Cumulative Security Update for Internet Explorer

KB867282 • Related to surfing and e-mail: not critical for CR-QS
• DO check HTML Help files from the app.
MS05-015 - Vulnerability in Hyperlink Object Library

KB888113 • Links from within the apps. (possibly also from within help
files)
MS05-019 - Vulnerabilities in TCP/IP

KB893066

KB890923
MS05-016 - Vulnerability in Windows Shell that Could Allow Remote Code

KB893086 Execution
MS05-018 - Vulnerabilities in Windows Kernel Could Allow Elevation of

KB890859 Privilege and Denial of Service


Repair and Service

Package depth:
KB893803 Windows Installer 3.1 v2 – package installations
KB898461 Automatic updates

KB896358 • HTML help files in ALL languages and links between
MS05-037 - Vulnerability in JView Profiler

KB903235 • Jviewer – MS Java
MS05-036 - Vulnerability in Microsoft Color Management Module

KB901214 • ICC color management – Screen display (and video
drivers e.g. Barco), print Densities and gradations, P-
values?
KB890046 Security update for Windows XP

KB896422 • SMB – printer sharing (e.g. print from client on printer
connected to server) and communication between
computers

KB883939 • PNG – XML files= config, import, export
KB887742 Update for Windows XP

• This update addresses an issue that could cause your
system to stop responding if certain firewall or antivirus
programs are installed

KB896727 • Jpeg’s (e.g. Logo on print layout)
• COM objects

• Plug and play


Repair and Service

Package depth:

• TAPI - remote access – connection over RAS dialup
(service)

• Remote Desktop

• Possible Domain issues

• Print spooler
MS05-012 - Vulnerability in OLE and COM

KB894391 • OLE and COM objects
KB890830 MS Windows Malicious Software Removal Tool

• Checks for infection

Package depth:
MS05-051 - Vulnerabilities in MSDTC and COM+

KB902400 • MSDTC and Com+ ,
• DCOM security
KB910437 Update for Windows XP
MS05-050 - Vulnerability in DirectShow

KB904706 • DirectShow – Direct X

KB905915


Repair and Service

Package depth:
KB890830 MS Windows Malicious Software Removal Tool

MS05-053 - Vulnerabilities in Graphics Rendering Engine

KB896424 • WMF (Windows Meta File) and EMF
MS05-047 - Vulnerability in Plug and Play

KB905749
MS05-049 - Vulnerabilities in Windows Shell

KB900725 • Windows shell - Shortcuts and certain HTML
characters (e.g. Help files…)
MS05-046 - Vulnerability in the Client Service for NetWare

KB899589
MS05-048 - Vulnerability in the Microsoft Collaboration Data Objects

KB901017
MS05-045 - Vulnerability in Network Connection Manager

KB905414
MS06-001 - Graphic rendering : jpeg’s , gif’s

KB912919
MS06-007 - Vulnerability in TCP/IP

KB913446
MS06-008 - Vulnerability in Web Client Service

KB911927
MS06-005 - Vulnerability in Windows Media Player

KB911565
MS06-006 - Vulnerability in Windows Media Player Plug-in with Non-

KB911564 Microsoft Internet Browsers
MS06-002 - Vulnerability in Embedded Web Fonts

KB908519


Repair and Service

Package depth:
Microsoft Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 Service Pack 1

.NET • Printing / Spooler
Framework
1.1 SP 1
KB886903 ASP.NET Security Update for Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1

Service Pack 1
• Printing / Spooler

Package depth:
MS06-040 - Vulnerability in Server Service

KB921883 • Printing from Clients, Network, communication and
speed / response
KB890830 MS Windows Malicious Software Removal Tool (1.19)


KB918899 • HTML (CSS, HTML Helpfiles layout positioning)
MS06-051 - Vulnerability in Windows Kernel

KB917422 • Possibly remote logon such as Remote Desktop and
PcAnywhere
MS06-050 - Vulnerabilities in Microsoft Windows Hyperlink Object Library

KB920670 • Especially for NON-administrators (e.g. Qsuser) (Help
file links – clicks)
MS06-041 - Vulnerabilities in DNS Resolution

KB920683 • Network resolve (clients / printers / gateways …)
MS06-045 - Vulnerability in Windows Explorer

KB921398 • Windows Explorer of Drag and Drop events


Repair and Service

Package depth:

KB922616 • HTML Help ActiveX control
MS06-043 - Vulnerability in Microsoft Windows

KB920214 • HTML HELP files with embed images
KB916595 Stop error message on a Windows XP-based computer:

"STOP 0x000000D1"
• Certain Network Adapter drivers
MS06-036 - Vulnerability in DHCP Client Service

KB914388

KB917159
MS06-020 - Vulnerabilities in Macromedia Flash Player from Adobe

KB913433
MS06-025 - Vulnerability in Routing and Remote Access

KB911280
MS06-024 - Vulnerability in Windows Media Player

KB917734

KB914389
MS06-023 - Vulnerability in Microsoft JScript

KB917344 • Jscript 5.6
MS06-022 - Vulnerability in ART Image Rendering

KB918439
MS06-018 - Vulnerability in Microsoft Distributed Transaction Coordinator

KB913580
MS06-032 - Vulnerability in TCP/IP

KB917953 • TCP/IP, Networking, Server/Client, Gateway, Routing,
Printing


Repair and Service

Package depth:

KB908531 • COM Objects
MS06-016 - Cumulative Security Update for Outlook Express

KB911567
MS06-014 - Vulnerability in the Microsoft Data Access Components

KB911562 (MDAC) Function

Package depth:
MS07-004 - Vulnerability in Vector Markup Language

KB929969 • HTML (QS Help docu)
KB890830 MS Windows Malicious Software Removal Tool (Jan 2007)

• Checks for infection 2007

KB925454
MS06-075 - Vulnerability in Windows could allow elevation of privilege

KB926255
MS06-076 - Cumulative Security Update for Outlook Express

KB923694
KB925398 - Security Update for Windows Media Player 6.4 for Windows
MS06-078
MS06-078 - Vulnerability in Windows Media Format

KB923689 • MediaPlayer
MS06-069 - Vulnerabilities in Macromedia Flash Player from Adobe

KB923789


Repair and Service

Package depth:
MS06-068 - Vulnerability in Microsoft Agent

KB920213
MS06-070 - Vulnerability in Workstation Service

KB924270 • Server- Client connection
• (replacement of MS06-040)
MS06-071 - Vulnerability in Microsoft XML Core Services

KB927978 • XML Core Services (Import, export, config)
MS06-065 - Vulnerability in Windows Object Packager

KB924496 • RTF documents

KB923191 • Active X
MS06-061 - Vulnerabilities in Microsoft XML Core Services

KB924191 • XML Core services, Jscript, VBS Scripting (Aspro’s,
XML import/export)
MS06-064 - Vulnerabilities in TCP/IP IPv6

KB922819 • Networking, TCP Connection reset,
Server- Client connection

KB923414 • D.O.S., SMB, RPC, Printing / Shares
Server- Client connection
KB922582 Update for Windows
MS06-052 - Vulnerability in Pragmatic General Multicast (PGM)

KB919007
MS06-053 - Vulnerability in Indexing Service

KB920685 • Indexing Service for IIS
KB928388 2007 time zone update for Microsoft Windows operating

systems


Repair and Service
DD+DIS302.05E Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Information sheet
The chapters
• 3.3 – Troubleshooting
• 3.9 – Frequently Asked Questions
of the complete Service Manual of CR QS 3.5 have been replaced by the

Troubleshooting Guide No. 1 for CR QS 3.5 – DD+DIS212.07E.
For any informational requests please refer to the above mentioned document.

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR Quality Systems 3.5 Chapter 3.9

DD+DIS302.05E Reference and Circuit Diagrams
Chapter 4
Chapter 4 is not applicable for CR Quality System 3.5.

DD+DIS302.05E Spare Parts List
Chapter 5
Chapter 5 is not applicable for CR Quality System 3.5.

DD+DIS302.05E Accessories
Chapter 6:
List of Contents
Edition Revision Order Number Contents

2 0 DD+DIS209.06E Configuring McAffee 8.0 and
Norton 10.0 Antivirus Software
for CR QS 3.5
2 0 DD+DIS210.06E P-value Hardware Upgrade Kit

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR Quality System 3.5 Chapter 6
HEALTHCARE Accessories
Global Services Organization
Order-No.: DD+DIS210.06E

*16A97P1*
1 Piece 6A97P MA1
Type 4406/421
P-value Hardware Upgrade Kit
• If the server or client system hardware does not meet the requirements
for P-value application, you have to make a hardware upgrade for the
system.
• P-values hardware upgrade has to be performed after or before an
upgrade from a former QS version
• The P-value upgrade kit can be ordered under ABC Code: ES62K
Necessary time:
Before the upgrade to CR QS 3.5 10 min
After the upgrade to CR QS 3.5 20 min
Necessary tools:
none

2006-07-04
Agfa Company Confidential
List of Contents
1 Scope of the Document ...............................................................1
2 Hardware Prerequisites ...............................................................1
3 Scope of Delivery .........................................................................1
4 Order Number ...............................................................................1
5 Upgrade Procedure ......................................................................1

5.1 Upgrade Procedure before Upgrade to CR QS 3.5 ...................................... 1
5.2 Upgrade Procedure after Upgrade to CR QS 3.5 ......................................... 2

1 Scope of the Document

This document describes how to perform the P-values hardware upgrade.
2 Hardware Prerequisites
• Make sure the current hardware of the CR QS 3.0 or ADC QS 2.1
system does not meet the requirements for P-value application.
• For an overview of systems which support P-values refer to chapter 11
of the CR QS 3.5 service documentation (DD+DIS302.05E).
3 Scope of Delivery
• Video card Matrox G550 PCI
• Video cable, 1pc. DVI to 2 x VGA, 1pc. DVI to 2 x DVI
• Installation instructions
4 Order Number
The P-values upgrade kit can be ordered under ABC Code: ES62K
5 Upgrade Procedure
5.1 Upgrade Procedure before Upgrade to CR QS 3.5
(1) Have a running CR QS 3.0 or ADC QS 2.1 system ready.
(2) Make a backup of the system.

For the procedure refer to the respective manual.
(3) Shutdown the system.
(4) Remove current video card from AGP slot.
(5) Insert the Matrox video card into the free PCI slot.

Accessories DD+DIS210.06E
(6) Connect screen to the Matrox card.
(7) Start system.
(8) Continue with the software upgrade procedure.
5.2 Upgrade Procedure after Upgrade to CR QS 3.5
(1) Have a running CR QS 3.5 system.
(2) Shut down the system.
(3) Remove the current video card from the AGP slot.
(4) Insert Matrox video card into the free PCI slot.
(5) Connect screen to onboard video output.
(6) Start system.
(8) The following window pops up:
”Windows has finished installing new devices. The software that supports
your device requires that you restart your computer. You must restart your
computer before the new settings will take effect.
Do you want to restart your computer now?”
Click <Yes>.
(10) Go to Start\Control Panel\Display.

Or right-click on the desktop and select properties.
(11) Select the tab Settings.

(12) In the dropdown list – select the Matrox video card.
figure 1
(13) Check the following options:

“Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor.”
“Use this device as the primary desktop.”
figure 2
(14) Click on <Apply>.

NOTE:
The screen is no longer properly displayed.
(15) Connect the screen to the video output on the Matrox Card.
(16) If necessary adapt screen resolution and color quality.
(17) Go to Start\Control Panel\Display.

Or right-click on the desktop and select properties.
(18) Select the tab Settings.
(19) Modify the screen resolution and color quality of the monitor according to
the customer’s needs.
figure 3
(20) Click <Ok>.

(21) After changing the monitor settings a dialog may pop up asking you to
register the video card.
figure 4
(22) Check the option “Don’t show this message again”.
(23) Click <Don’t Register>.

HEALTHCARE Accessories
Global Services Organization

*16A93G1*
1 Piece 6A93G MA1
Type 4406/421
Configuring McAfee 8.0 and Norton 10.0

Antivirus Software for CR QS 3.5
• The installation of antivirus software on CR QS 3.5 systems is

completely within the responsibility of the hospital. AGFA only gives
recommendations how to configure the antivirus software.
• There is no antivirus software installed on
AGFA pre-staged CR QS 3.5 systems.
• Antivirus software cannot be ordered via AGFA.
Necessary time:
Approx. 15 min for configuration
Necessary tools:
McAfee 8.0 antivirus software
or
Norton 10.0 antivirus software

2006-07-04
List of Contents
1 Scope of the Document ...............................................................1
2 Important Remarks.......................................................................1
3 Virus Scan Overview....................................................................1
4 McAfee 8.0: Settings for CR QS 3.5 Server and Client .............2

4.1 General Settings ............................................................................................. 2
4.2 Settings for All Processes ............................................................................. 5
4.3 AutoUpdate Settings .................................................................................... 10
5 Norton Antivirus 10.0: Settings for CR QS 3.5 ........................13

5.1 Difference between McAfee and Norton Antivirus..................................... 13
5.2 Norton Antivirus 10.0 Settings on the Server ............................................ 13
5.3 Norton Antivirus 10.0 Settings on the Client.............................................. 17

1 Scope of the Document

This document describes the settings of the McAfee 8.0 and
Norton 10.0 antivirus software for CR QS 3.5.
2 Important Remarks
• The installation of antivirus software on CR QS 3.5 systems is
completely within the responsibility of the hospital. AGFA only gives
recommendations how to configure the antivirus software.
• There is no antivirus software installed on
AGFA pre-staged CR QS 3.5 systems.
• Antivirus software cannot be ordered via AGFA.
3 Virus Scan Overview
McAfee 8.0 and Norton 10.0 antivirus software can be used for all
CR QS 3.5 systems.
For the supported hardware for CR QS 3.5 server and client refer to
chapter 11 of the CR QS 3.5 service documentation (DD+DIS302.05E).

4 McAfee 8.0: Settings for CR QS 3.5 Server and Client
NOTE:
The installation instructions come with the McAfee software package or can
be downloaded from McAfee web site: http://www.mcafee.com.
After installation most of the settings are left on default. Some of them need to
be adjusted; you’ll find them below:
4.1 General Settings
Tab General: Agfa recommends to leave these settings as they are by

default:
figure 1

Tab Messages: Agfa recommends to leave these settings as they

are by default:
figure 2

Tab Reports: Agfa recommends to leave these settings as they are by

default:
figure 3

4.2 Settings for All Processes
Tab Processes: Agfa recommends to leave these settings as they

are by default:
figure 4

Tab Detection:
Agfa recommends to change the following settings:
(1) Scan Files: Check: “When writing to disk”.

(2) Scan Files: Uncheck: “When reading from disk”.
(3) Scan Files: Uncheck: “On network drives”.
NOTE:
It is very important to uncheck when reading from disk. If you check this
and start the QS software it would run very slowly.
(4) What to scan: Check: “All files.”
figure 5
(5) You can mark a folder or disk that doesn’t need to be scanned.
For this, click on <Exclusions…>.

(6) Click <Add>.
figure 6
(7) Select the folder you wish to exclude.
figure 7

NOTE:
The performance of the software can be improved by excluding the directory
Data from scanning (the place where QS Images are stored). Another
reason to exclude this folder is because of the possibility of a “false
positive”. A false positive can be an image file that contains a bit sequence
according to a virus. The virus scanner recognizes this file as a virus.
Exclude the directory Data in the following cases:
• On a server when a lot of clients are connected.
• On all clients.
Tab Advanced: Agfa recommends to leave these settings as they are by

default:
figure 8

Tab Actions: Agfa recommends to leave these settings as they are by

default:
figure 9

4.3 AutoUpdate Settings
(1) Open Start\Programs\Network Associates\VirusScan Console:
figure 10
(2) Right click on AutoUpdate and choose Properties:
figure 11

(3) Press the button <Schedule…>:
figure 12

Tab Schedule:
Set the schedule task on weekly; start time 6:00 AM “local time”.
The day of AutoUpdate is Thursday.
figure 13
NOTE:
The reason for this is, that most virus updates are released on Wednesday
night.

5 Norton Antivirus 10.0: Settings for CR QS 3.5
5.1 Difference between McAfee and Norton Antivirus
The Norton Antivirus Corporate 10.0 gives you the opportunity to choose a
managed solution (it also can be used as a “normal” virus scanner). The
meaning of managed solution is, that installations, updates, settings and
scheduled scans can be done from a central server. The server can have
other clients and servers in his group, and so coordinate the different security
levels and settings across domains and groups.
5.2 Norton Antivirus 10.0 Settings on the Server
NOTE:
The installation instructions come with the Norton Antivirus software
package or can be downloaded from Symantec web site:
http://www.symantec.com.
After installation most of the settings are left on default.
(1) Open Norton Antivirus by right-clicking the Norton icon in the tray.
(2) Enter the password <Symantec>.
figure 14

(3) Adjust the virus definition update schedule:

Check: “Enable scheduled automatic updates”
Click <Schedule…>
figure 15
(4) Set the frequency on weekly for every Thursday at 6 AM.
figure 16
NOTE:
The reason is that most virus updates are released on Wednesday night.

(5) To scan a floppy in the A: drive of the computer

mark <Scan a Floppy Disk> and click <scan>.
figure 17
(6) The most important part is the File System Realtime Protection. Leave
the default settings so all file types will be scanned.
Check “Exclude selected files and folders”
Click <Exclusions>.
figure 18

(7) Click <Files/Folders>.
figure 19
(8) Mark the <data> folder on the E drive
figure 20

NOTE:
The performance of the software can be improved by excluding the directory
Data from scanning (the place where QS Images are stored). Another
reason to exclude this folder is because of the possibility of a “false
positive”. A false positive can be an image file that contains a bit sequence
according to a virus. The virus scanner recognizes this file as a virus.
Exclude the directory Data in the following cases:
• When a lot of clients are connected to one server.
• On all clients.
5.3 Norton Antivirus 10.0 Settings on the Client
On the client there are no settings to be changed. The changes are done on
the central server and have influence on the client.

Imaging Services Field Modifications


Type 4406/421
► Purpose of Chapter 7 ‘Field Modifications’
All modifications instructions applicable for this product are included in this chapter.
They are listed in chronological sequence:
Timeline Document No. Contents Edition.

Revision
2008
Jul. DD+DIS389.06 Upgrade Installation Instructions for 2.1
CR QS 3.5.463 (Service Pack 2)
2007
April DD+DIS119.07E Upgrade Installation Instructions for CR QS 2.0
3.5.398M in the CR Mammography Solution
2006
July DD+DIS252.06E Upgrade Installation Instructions for 2.0

eq_07_field-mod_toc_e_template_v06
HEALTHCARE Field Modifications
Global Services Organisation
Order No.: DD+DIS252.06E
*16BGOL1*
1 Piece 6BGOL MA1
Type 4406/421
Upgrade Installation Instructions for

This document describes

• the following upgrade scenarios:
- upgrade CR QS 3.5.372 to CR QS 3.5 Service Pack 1 (SP1)
- upgrade CR QS 3.0 to CR QS 3.5 SP1
- upgrade ADC QS 2.1 to CR QS 3.5 SP1
• main changes of CR QS 3.5 SP1 compared to CR QS 3.5.372
2006-07-04
DD+DIS252.06E Field Modifications
List of Contents
1 Information on CR QS 3.5 SP1 ................................. 1

1.1 Delivery of Software Version CR QS 3.5 SP1 ........................ 1
1.2 Software Prerequisites and Possible Combinations............ 1
1.3 Hardware Requirements for Server and Client ..................... 2
2 Prerequisite Tools when Upgrading to

CR QS 3.5 SP1 ........................................................... 2
3 Prerequisites when Upgrading QS with

RIS Connection.......................................................... 2
4 Upgrade Task Matrix ................................................. 3
5 Upgrade from CR QS 3.5.372 to

CR QS 3.5 SP1 ........................................................... 4
5.1 Upgrade Procedure on a Server System ............................... 4
5.2 Upgrade Procedure on a Client System ................................ 7
6 Upgrade from CR QS 3.0 to

CR QS 3.5 SP1 ........................................................... 8
6.1 Prerequisites............................................................................ 8
6.2 Upgrade Procedure for a Server System............................... 9
6.3 Upgrade Procedure for a Client System .............................. 11
7 Upgrade from ADC QS 2.1 to

CR QS 3.5 SP1 ......................................................... 13
7.1 Prerequisites.......................................................................... 13
7.2 Upgrade Procedure for a Server System............................. 14
7.3 Upgrade Procedure for a Client System .............................. 16

Field Modifications DD+DIS252.06E
8 Operating System Installation................................ 18

8.1 Adapt Boot Sequence on a Dell Precision WS670.............. 18
8.2 Adapt Boot Sequence on a Dell PE 700............................... 19
8.3 Adapt Boot Sequence on a
Dell Optiplex GX260/GX270 and Dell WS650...................... 20
8.4 Adapt Boot Sequence on a Dell Optiplex GX620 ................ 21
8.5 Operating System Installation Process ............................... 22
9 Installation of the CR QS 3.5 SP1

Application Software............................................... 25
10 Installation of Additional Languages..................... 26
11 Installation of Hotfixes............................................ 29
12 Change TCP/IP Settings ......................................... 30
13 Change Computer Name and Workgroup ............. 33
14 Run Secset............................................................... 35
15 Fine Tuning .............................................................. 35
16 Lookup of Hostnames and

Creation of a Host File ............................................ 40
17 Create a CR QS User in a
Workgroup Environment ........................................ 41
18 Perform ID Tablet Firmware Upgrade .................... 45
19 Change Body Part containing

non-DICOM conform Characters............................ 46
Annex: Form to fill in the Network Parameters

Chapter 7 / II CR Quality System 3.5 Edition 2, Revision 0
1 Information on CR QS 3.5 SP1
1.1 Delivery of Software Version CR QS 3.5 SP1

Software Version CR QS 3.5 SP1 will be delivered via CD ROM only. Due to
the size of the package it is not possible to distribute it electronically.
Order Number:
The Upgrade Installation Instructions for
CR QS 3.5.398 (Service Pack 1) can be ordered under CM+3552920.
Scope of delivery:
• Application CD CR QS 3.5 SP1 (= CR QS 3.5.398)
• CR QS Operating System XP CD version 3.0.108
• Hotfixes CD version 3.0.18
• Languages CD
• Upgrade installation Instructions for CR QS 3.5 SP1 (this document)
• Restore Toolkit CD version 3.0.17
1.2 Software Prerequisites and Possible Combinations

Software version CR QS 3.5 SP1 can be installed on the following systems
• CR QS 3.5.372
• CR QS 3.0.xxx
• ADC QS 2.1.xx
The upgrade task matrix (see section 4) gives an overview of steps to be
performed for the different scenarios.
CR QS 3.5 SP1 can be operated in combination with the following digitizers:

• ADC Compact Plus (all SW versions)
• ADC Compact (SW versions COP_12xx)
• CR 75.0 (all SW versions)
• ADC Solo (SW versions SOL_11xx)

1.3 Hardware Requirements for Server and Client

For a list of released hardware for CR QS 3.5 server and client refer to the
CR QS 3.5 service manual, chapter 11 (DD+DIS130.06E).
Further, it is required that the CR QS 3.5 system is connected to an
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). For more information on the subject refer
to chapter 3.2 on the CR QS 3.5 Service Manual (DD+DIS302.05E).
2 Prerequisite Tools when Upgrading to CR QS 3.5 SP1
When you go on site to perform an upgrade have the following tools with
you:
• set of CDs where to store the exported studies on which will be moved
to CR QS 3.5 SP1. Number of CDs required depends on amount of
studies to be exported (6 CDs maximum).
• 1 CD where to store the Operating System (OS) backup file,
QS backup file, and the exported XML file on
(only in case of upgrade from ADC QS 2.1)
3 Prerequisites when Upgrading QS with RIS Connection
Due to the improvements of the learning mode functionality it is highly

recommended to upgrade to CR QS 3.5 SP1.
Before starting the upgrade:
• Make sure that you write down all the RIS settings before starting the
upgrade.
• When a RIS connection is configured and the mapping XML file is not a
default XML file delivered on the system but an updated file created on
site, make sure you have a copy of this file also (e.g. on USB stick).
These files are overwritten when installing the new application.
• When working with the learning mode, be sure you have a copy of the
created IDV.ExamTreeMap file. You need this file afterwards. Also be
sure that the settings for the learning mode are known after the upgrade
(which attribute is used as reference).
For more information on RIS configuration and usage of the learning
mode refer to the CR QS 3.5 service manual, chapter 3.7
(DD+DIS302.05E).

4 Upgrade Task Matrix
The following upgrade task matrix gives you an overview which steps have to
be performed for a successful upgrade to CR QS 3.5 SP1.
Upgrade Upgrade Upgrade

from from from
CR QS CR QS ADC QS
Reference 3.5.372 3.0 2.1
Operating System installation 8 -- √ √
Installation of additional 10
-- √ √
languages
Installation of hotfixes 11 √ √ √
Change computer name and 13
-- √ √
workgroup
TCP/IP settings 12 -- √ √
Installation of 9
CR QS 3.5 SP1 application √ √ √
SW
Create hostfile 16 √ √
Run Secset 14 √ √
Fine tuning 15 √ √ √
Create CR QS User 17 -- √ √
Perform ID Tablet Firmware
18 √ √ √
Upgrade
Change Body Part containing
non-DICOM conform 19 -- √ √
characters

5 Upgrade from CR QS 3.5.372 to CR QS 3.5 SP1
5.1 Upgrade Procedure on a Server System

Time required without running the ImageKeeper to save the images through
the upgrade:
approximately 30 min.
(1) On a running 3.5.372 server run the backup task.

Open the Configuration Viewer and go to Monitoring\CCCommander.
Click on <Refresh List>.
Select BackupASPRO and click on <Execute Task Now>.
NOTE:
In case you want to keep the images you can perform the following backup
procedure with the ImageKeeper program:
• Insert CR QS 3.5.398 application CD.

• Click on windows <Start> button and select <run>.
• Type in cmd and click on button <OK>.
Æ As a result the dos command prompt window opens.
• Type in K: and press <enter> to browse to the CD-ROM drive with the
inserted CR QS 3.5.398 application CD.
• Type in cd ImageKeeper and press <enter>.
• Type in qs3.ImageKeeperDriver.exe/a and then press <enter>
to execute the backup process.
Æ As a result of this, a backup of the database with all images will be stored
in D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Export Directory.
This folder will not be removed during the upgrade.
(2) Stop the cluster.
(3) Uninstall the old CR QS 3.5 version

(Settings\Control Panel\Add or Remove Programs).
(4) Reboot the system.

(5) Open Windows Explorer and remove the following maps on D:
• \Agfa\WDP
• \Agfa\SEC
• \Agfa\ADC-QS\Bin
• \Agfa\ADC-QS\Config
• \Agfa\ADC-QS\Log
ACTION:
Do not remove:
• \ADC-QS\Data
• \Java2
(6) If available do also remove maps:
• \Agfa\improc
• \Agfa\ADC-QS\Help
(7) Install the CR QS 3.5 SP1 application SW.
NOTE:
Do not reboot the system when the installer asks you to.
(8) Install hotfixes (see section 11).
(9) Do the fine tuning of the system (see section 15).
(10) Stop QS application (Stop Cluster) and

run D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config\RestoreFrom3.5.js.

(11) Select the restore file you have created before:
• uncheck Database
• check User settings
• uncheck Registry settings
ACTION:
Do not check / uncheck the wrong checkboxes.
If the wrong boxes are checked, the installation of the application has
to be redone.
(12) The script will end with a “done” message.
NOTE:
In case you have made a backup with the ImageKeeper program and want to
restore the images you have to perform the following procedure.
• Ensure that the CR QS 3.5.398 application CD is inserted in the CD-

ROM drive.
• Type in qs3.ImageKeeperDriver.exe/r and then
press <enter> to execute the backup process.
Æ As a result of this a restore of the database with all images is performed.
(13) Go to Start\Shut down\Reboot to reboot the system.
(14) Open Configuration Viewer/File/Import XML/Full Configuration to import

the configuration settings.
The CR QS 3.5.372 server has been successfully upgraded to
CR QS 3.5 SP1.

5.2 Upgrade Procedure on a Client System
Time required:
(1) On a running client, run

D:\Agfa\ADC-Qs\Bin\ QS3.BackupCRQSClient.exe.
(2) Stop the QS Cluster/Client.
(3) Uninstall the old CR QS 3.5.372 version.
(5) Open Windows Explorer and remove the following maps on D:

• \Agfa
NOTE:
Do not reboot the system when the installer asks you to.
(9) Stop the QS Cluster/Client.
(10) Restore settings

Start\Programs\QS3.5\Tools\RestoreCRQS.exe.
(11) Select the restore file (E:\QSBCK\) you have created before:
ACTION:
to be redone.
(12) The script will end with a “restore succeeded” message. Click “OK”
(13) Go to Start\Shut down\Reboot to reboot.
The CR QS 3.5.372 client has been successfully upgraded to CR QS 3.5 SP1.

6 Upgrade from CR QS 3.0 to CR QS 3.5 SP1
6.1 Prerequisites
Make sure the hardware of the existing CR QS 3.0 system is supported for
CR QS 3.5 SP1. For a list of supported hardware refer to chapter 11 in the
CR QS 3.5 service manual (DD+DIS130.06E).
In case a RAM upgrade is necessary contact your RSN.
NOTE:
Create a Restore CD before you start the upgrade to be able to recover the
system after a system crash.
(see chapter 3.2 of the CR QS 3.0 service manual, DD+DIS273.04E).
NOTE:
Before upgrading the system, make sure that all images that have to be
archived are successfully sent to PACS.
Time required without making a backup of the images and creating restore
CD after the upgrade:
• To install a standalone server: 120 minutes
• To install a cluster (server + 1,2 or 3 clients): 180 minutes (when
installation is done in parallel – make sure enough CD’s are available)
To create restore CD’s afterwards: extra 45 minutes should be added to the
total installation time

6.2 Upgrade Procedure for a Server System

(1) On a running 3.0 server run the backup task:
Open the Configuration Viewer and go to Monitoring\CCCommander.
Click on <Refresh List>.
Select BackupASPRO and click on <Execute Task Now>.
(2) Open Configuration Viewer/File/Export XML to export the configuration.
(3) Open Selector/File/Export Study to export the studies you want to keep.
(4) Write a backup zip file created by the Backup task, the configuration
XML and the exported studies to memory stick, CD, or network. For the
backup zip take the most recent file from
E:\Backup\ADCQS-BACKUP-xxxxxx-xxxxxx.zip.
NOTE:
It is recommended to keep the two last backup files in case one is
corrupt.
(5) Open Start/Settings/Control Panel/Network Connections.
(6) Right-click on Local Area Connection and select Properties.
(7) Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click on Properties.
(8) Write the values into the Server Installation Information Form
(see annex at the end of this document).
(9) Open Start/Settings/Control Panel/System.
(10) Select tab Computer Name and click <Change>.
(12) Continue with the installation of XP operating system, section 8.
(13) Log in as crservice or administrator.
(14) Install Additional languages (see section 10).
(15) Install the hotfixes on the system (see section 11).
(16) Adjust computer name (see section 13)
(17) Adjust TCP/IP settings (see section 12).


(19) After the installation click <Yes> to reboot the system.
(20) Create hostfile for the system (see section 16).
(21) Run Secset (see section 14).
(23) Run D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config\RestoreFrom3.0.210.js.

Select the restore file you have created before:
ACTION:
to be redone.

(25) Change all sub-studies containing body parts with non-DICOM conform
characters. Refer to section 19.
(26) Configure users (see section 17).
(27) Open Selector/File/Import Study to import saved studies again.
The CR QS 3.0 server has now been upgraded to CR QS 3.5 SP1.

6.3 Upgrade Procedure for a Client System

(1) On a running client run
D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Bin\ Agfa.QS3.BackupCRQSClient.exe.
(2) Write a backup zip file created by the Backup task to memory stick, CD,
or network. For the backup zip take the most recent file from
E:\QSBCK\ADCQS-BACKUP-xxxxxx-xxxxxx.zip.
(3) Open Start/Settings/Control Panel/Network Connections.
(6) Write the values into the Client Installation Information Form
(7) Open Start/Settings/Control Panel/System.
(14) Adjust computer name (see section 13).

(18) Install hostfile on the client (use the hostfile created on the server).


Select the restore file you have created before:
ACTION:
to be redone.
The CR QS 3.0 client has now been upgraded to CR QS 3.5 SP1.

7 Upgrade from ADC QS 2.1 to CR QS 3.5 SP1
7.1 Prerequisites
Make sure the hardware of the existing ADC QS 2.1 system is supported for
NOTE:
system after a system crash
(see chapter 3.2 of the ADC QS 2.1 service manual, DD+DIS135.02E).
NOTE:
Before upgrading the system, make sure that all images that have to be
archived are successfully sent to PACS.
Time required without making a backup of the images and creating restore
CD after the upgrade
• To install a standalone server: 120 minutes
• To install a cluster (server + 1,2 or 3 clients): 180 minutes (when
installation is done in parallel – make sure enough CD’s are available)
To create restore CD’s afterwards: extra 45 minutes should be added to the
total installation time


(1) On a running 2.1 server insert the CR QS Operating System XP CD.
(2) Make an Operating system Settings Backup:

Run <CD>\OSBCK\SrvOS.vbs
When you are asked to, do not reboot.
(3) Write down the values of IP address, subnet Mask, Gateway,

DNS HostName that will be shown into the Server Installation
Information Form (see annex at the end of this document).
(4) Insert the CR QS 3.5 SP1 application CD.
(5) Run CD:\Upgrade\QS21Backup.js.
(6) Click <OK>.
(7) Open Configuration Viewer/File/Export XML and save the configuration

to J:\.
(8) Open Selector/File/Export Study and save the studies you want to keep
to J:\.
(9) Start Easy CD Creator.
• Insert an empty CD or CD-RW.

• Start a new Data CD Project.
• Drag the entire J:\OSBCK folder to the project area.
• Drag the entire J:\QSBCK folder to the project area.
• Drag the config21.xml to the CD.
• Drag the saved studies from J:\ to the project area.
• Burn the CD.
(10) If one CD is not enough to store the studies, keep creating CD’s until all
exported studies are on CD.
NOTE:
If network is available, all of these files can be placed on a network
drive too. Make sure that the network drive is still available when QS
3.5 is installed.

(15) Adjust computer name (see section 13)

(23) Stop the QS cluster.
(24) Insert the Backup CD you created from the 2.1 system\.
(25) Run CD:\QSBCK\QS21Restore.js.
(26) Restart the cluster.
(27) Open Selector/File/Import Study to import saved studies again.
(28) Open Configuration Viewer/File/Import XML/Full Configuration.
characters. Refer to section 19.
NOTE:
During the import a dialog (requesting for a host name) may pop up for
every printer and archive station that is in the configuration file.
Fill in the correct host name; if unknown or if there is no DNS server
applicable, choose a dummy name and the import should continue.
When the import is done, don’t forget to correct the dummy entries!
The ADC QS 2.1 server has now been upgraded to CR QS 3.5 SP1.


(1) On a running 2.1 client insert the CR QS Operating System XP CD.
(2) Make an Operating system Settings Backup:

Run <CD>\OSBCK\ClientOS.vbs.
When you are asked to, do not reboot.
(3) Write down the values of IP address, subnet Mask, Gateway,

DNS HostName that will be shown into the Client Installation Information
Form (see annex at the end of this document).
(4) Insert the CR QS 3.5 SP1 application CD.
(5) Run CD:\Upgrade\QS21Backup.js.
(6) Click <OK>.
(7) Start Easy CD Creator:
• Insert an empty CD or CD-RW.

• Start a new Data CD Project.
• Drag the entire E:\OSBCK folder to the project area.
• Drag the entire F:\QSBCK folder to the project area.
• Burn the CD.
NOTE:
If network is available, all of these files can be placed on a network drive
too. Make sure that the network drive is still available when QS 3.5 SP1 is
installed.


(16) Install hostfile on the client (hostfile should be created already on the
server).
(19) Stop the QS cluster.
(20) Insert the Backup CD you created from the 2.1 system\.
(21) Run CD:\QSBCK\QS21Restore.js.
(22) Restart the cluster.
The ADC QS 2.1 client has now been upgraded to CR QS 3.5 SP1.

8 Operating System Installation
NOTE:
First, you have to adapt the boot sequence of the system. Follow the
appropriate instructions and then continue with section 8.5.
8.1 Adapt Boot Sequence on a Dell Precision WS670

(1) Start the system. When it is starting, press <F2>.
(2) Move with the down arrow to Boot Sequence.

Press <Enter>.
(3) Select hard disk and move it to the top of the list
(use keys <u> and <d>).
(4) Press <Esc>, <Esc> and <Enter>.
(5) Save and exit setup.
(6) Insert the CR QS Operating System CD into the CR ROM drive and
reboot. The system will now start from hard disk.
(7) When the Dell logo appears, press <F12> to enter the boot menu. If you
miss the Dell logo, reboot again.
The menu looks as follows:
Boot Device Menu

==============
* Onboard or USB Floppy Drive

* 00,AIC-7901A: 0 SEAGATE ST373207LW
* Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive
* System Setup
* Hard Drive Diagnostics
* Boot to Utility Partition
Use Up/Down arrows to highlight desired item.

Use Enter to select highlighted item.
(8) Highlight Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive.

Press <Enter>.

NOTE:
When the drivers for the Matrox card are installed, following screen may
appear:
Do not click any of the two buttons. The screen will disappear after the next
reboot.
figure 1
(9) The system will start from CD and so start the installation.
On all following reboots, the system starts from hard disk.
(10) Continue with section 8.5, Operating System Installation Process.
8.2 Adapt Boot Sequence on a Dell PE 700

(2) Check the Logical Processor setting.
(3) Move with down arrow to CPU Information and press <Enter> to enter
the CPU Information Listings.
(4) Select Logical Processor with down arrow.
(5) Press the <Space Bar> to change from enabled to disabled.

Press <Esc>.
(6) Check the Boot Sequence. Move with down arrow to Boot Sequence
and press <Enter>.
(7) Select CD ROM Drive and move it to the top of the list
(use keys <+> and <->).

reboot.
8.3 Adapt Boot Sequence on a Dell Optiplex GX260/GX270 and

Dell WS650
(2) Move with the down arrow to Boot Sequence. Click <Enter>.
reboot.
Boot Device Menu
1. Normal
2. Diskette Drive
3. Integrated NIC
4. Hard-disk Drive C
5. IDE CD-ROM Device
6. System Setup
7. IDE Drive Diagnostics
8. Boot to Utility Partition
(8) Choose IDE CD-ROM Device.

Press <Enter>.

8.4 Adapt Boot Sequence on a Dell Optiplex GX620

(2) Move with the down arrow to Boot Sequence.

Click <Enter>.
(4) Press <Esc>.
(5) In the performance section, set Hyperthreading to off.
(6) In the section Drives, set Under SATA Operation to Combination.
reboot.
Boot Device Menu

=================

* Onboard SATA drive
* System Setup

(10) Highlight Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive.

Press <Enter>.

8.5 Operating System Installation Process

(1) When you reboot from the CD, you will be asked if you are installing a
server or a client.
+--------------------------------------------+
! AGFA CR QS System !
! Multi Language !
+--------------------------------------------+
! !
! New Installation. !
! !
! (C) CR QS XP Client Installation/Upgrade !
! (S) CR QS XP Server Installation/Upgrade !
+--------------------------------------------+
Enter <S> for the server installation and <C> for the client installation.
(2) The system automatically checks if an upgrade scenario or a new

installation is most logical. If any backup files are found on
FAT partitions, an upgrade procedure will be proposed:
+----------------------------------------------+
! AGFA CR QS Server XP !
! Multi Language !
! SERVER XP !
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
! !
Scenario when upgrading ! Detected an upgradable NT4 system. !
from ADC QS 2.1 ! !
! Perform an NT Server upgrade Installation ? !
! !
! (Y) Upgrade from NT4 !
! (N) Other Choice !
+----------------------------------------------+
Enter <N> to start a new installation.

In the next screen, a new installation will be proposed. Click <Y> to
confirm the installation.

+--------------------------------------------------+
! Multi Language !
! SERVER XP !
+--------------------------------------------------+
! !
Scenario when upgrading ! Detected an upgradable 2003/XP system. !

from CR QS 3.0 ! !
! Perform a 2003/XP Server upgrade Installation ? !
! !
! (Y) Upgrade from 2003/XP Server !
! (N) Other Choice !
+--------------------------------------------------+
Enter <N> to start a new installation.

In the next screen, a new installation will be proposed. Click <Y> to
confirm the installation.
(3) The system will reboot.
On a Dell PE700: Enter Setup (<F2>).

Move with down arrow to Boot Sequence.
Press <Enter>.
Select Harddisk and move it to the top of the list
Press <Esc>, <Esc> and <Enter>.
Save and exit Setup.
On all other systems no extra actions are necessary.
(4) From now on, the installation is unattended (this takes about 45 min).
Your presence is no longer required until you are prompted to log in.

(6) You now need to provide the following data:
• Licensed Organisation (e.g. Agfa)

Click <OK>.
• Licensed Owner (e.g. Agfa)
Click <OK>.
• Product ID (Windows License Key)
Click <OK>.
(7) After providing the correct product ID you will get the following message:
figure 2
(8) Click <OK>.
The Operating System installation has been finished.
NOTE:
Together with the installation of the operating system, pcAnywhere has
been installed on the system.
For a description of pcAnywhere software refer to the CR QS 3.5 service
manual (DD+DIS302.05E), chapter 3.2.

9 Installation of the CR QS 3.5 SP1 Application Software
(1) Insert the application CD (CR QS 3.5.398).
(2) Run K:\CR QS 3.5.msi.
(3) Click <Next>.
(4) Accept the terms in the license agreement.
(5) Click <Next>.
(6) Click <Next>.
(7) Select the setup type: Check Server or Client according to the
system you are presently installing.
(8) Click <Next>.

If you are installing a client system, you are asked to provide the server
name you want to connect to.

The installation starts. This may take several minutes.
During the installation a window pops up where you have to select the
installation type again. Check Server or Client according to the
system you are presently installing.
figure 3

(10) Click <OK>.
(11) A window pops up communicating that the CR QS 3.5 has been installed
successfully. Click <Finish>.
(12) When asked, reboot the system.
The CR QS 3.5 SP1 application software has been installed.
10 Installation of Additional Languages
NOTE:
As server and client are both running on Windows XP you can use the same
CD for both systems.


Click <Continue>.
NOTE:

(4) Select the option Match the language for non-Unicode

programs with the default user language.
figure 4
NOTE:
default language. The administrator can define another language during the
setup of the account. Changing the default language for new users will set
the logon screen in this language.
(6) At the end of the installation you get a confirmation that the installation is
completed. Click <OK> to finish the installation.

figure 5
(8) Click <Cancel>.
figure 6

Wait a few minutes.
figure 7
other Language CDs.

11 Installation of Hotfixes
NOTE:
Please check if the correct hotfixes are installed. This can be easily checked
in the About box of the QS system. The installed hotfix version will be
shown. If this version is lower then the version delivered with this upgrade
kit, install these hotfix CD.
(1) Insert the “CR QS Operating System XP Hotfix CD” in the CD-ROM
drive.
(2) Start cd:\hfinst.bat.
(3) When you are asked if you want to proceed with the installation, click
<Yes>.
figure 8
(4) The installation will take a few minutes (depending on the number of
hotfixes that are released by Microsoft). Your presence is not required at
this moment.
NOTE:
If you get the message: “Sorry but we are unable to detect your system
type…”
“Would you like a Server, client or NO update?”
You need to select manually what type of update you want:
• Type “S” if you want a Server update.
• Type “C” if you want a Client update.
• Type “N” if you want no updates at all.
(5) During the installation process, the system will reboot automatically.
After the reboot log in as administrator or crservice.

(6) At the end of the Hotfixes installation, a message “Update procedure

Completed” pops up.
Click <OK> to finish the installation. The PC will shut down and restart
automatically again.
NOTE:
If the PC doesn’t shut down automatically, restart the PC manually. Click
<Start> Æ Click <Shut Down> Æ Select <Restart> Æ Click <OK>.
After the restart remove the installation CD from the CD-Rom drive.
The installation of the CR QS Operating System Update CD is finished.
The hotfixes are installed now.
12 Change TCP/IP Settings
(1) To change the TCP/IP settings go to Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel,

choose Network and Internet Connections and then choose Network
Connections.

(Right mouse click, Properties).
figure 9

(3) The Local Area Connection Properties will open.
figure 10

(6) In the TCP/IP properties you can change the values according to the
customer’s needs.
figure 11
NOTE:
If there is no DNS server available at the site, leave the Preferred DNS
server empty.

13 Change Computer Name and Workgroup

(1) To change the computer name, right-click the My Computer icon on the
desktop and select Properties. Then go to tab Computer Name.
figure 12
figure 13

(3) Here you can enter the new computer name and the workgroup. After
entering the correct names click <OK>.
(4) If you changed the workgroup you will get the following welcome
message:
figure 14
(5) Click <OK>. Next you will get a message that tells you that you have to
reboot:
figure 15
(6) Click <OK> and then click <OK> to close the System Properties.
Click <Yes>.
figure 16
Computer name and workgroup are changed.

14 Run Secset
(1) Go to D:\AGFA\ADC-QS\Bin.
Run SecSet.exe.
(2) Click <OK>.
(3) Reboot the system to make the changes effective.
NOTE:
Remember that changes of server name and workgroup do have to be
“communicated” to the client as well. If you changed the computer name of
a server, you will have to move the clients to the “new” server (for the
procedure refer to the CR QS 3.5 service manual).
If you changed the workgroup, you will have to add the clients to the
workgroup.
15 Fine Tuning
NOTE:
This fine tuning of the QS system is necessary to make sure that all the
users are using the correct regional settings. Fine tuning is needed to make
sure that some background task (e.g. online printing) are using the correct
regional settings. When this is not properly set, the online printing would, for
example, print the date in the original date format (US-format) instead of the
regional typical date format. Strictly follow the instructions below!

figure 17

figure 18
(5) Click <OK>.
language.

(11) In the tab Advanced, select your language and mark the checkbox at the
bottom of the tab, to apply these settings for the default user profile.
figure 19
clicking <Apply>.


figure 20
NOTE:
(15) Click <OK>.


figure 21
(18) Click <Start>.
figure 22
figure 23

16 Lookup of Hostnames and Creation of a Host File
On the CR QS 3.5 system the QS server can not act as DNS server as was
the case on a CR QS 3.0 system. The CR QS application sometimes needs
to look up the hostname if an IP address is provided in the configuration of
the CR QS cluster. There are two possible scenarios for CR QS 3.5:
• The lookup is done by a DNS server available in the hospital.
A tool is available on the distributed CR QS CDs to gather all IP address. Only

the hostname/ IP address of client systems are not retrieved automatically.
(1) Run the tool to collect all IP addresses and corresponding hostnames
(location: D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Bin\hostfile.exe).
(2) Click <Start>.
(3) Click <Done>.

(6) Copy/paste the relevant lines to the file called “hosts” in

C:\<WINDIR>\system32\drivers\etc.

17 Create a CR QS User in a Workgroup Environment
The users adcqsacct and crservice, as well as the groups QSAdmin,

In order to add one or more users (e.g. qsuser) to the workgroup, follow the
figure 24
figure 25


figure 26
(5) Click <Create>.
NOTE:
(6) Click <Close>.



figure 27
(8) Click <Add…>.

figure 28

figure 29
(12) Click <OK>.

(13) Click <OK>.
NOTE:
18 Perform ID Tablet Firmware Upgrade
After upgrade to CR QS 3.5 SP1 an upgrade of the ID Tablet firmware is

necessary. Proceed as follows:
(1) Insert CR QS 3.5.398 application CD.
(2) Browse to BF2Upgrade_v1.12.07.zip.
(3) Open the zip file and follow the installation instructions which are also
part of the zip (installation instructions v1.12.07.doc).

19 Change Body Part containing non-DICOM conform

Characters
For the procedure how to change body part containing non-DICOM conform
characters please refer to Chapter 3.7 of the Service Documentation
DD+DIS302.05E.

Annex: Form to fill in the Network Parameters
This form will help you to have all data available you need for the upgrade to
CR QS 3.5 SP1.
CR QS Server Station
System Type WS620 WS650 WS670 PE700
Computer Name
Workgroup Name
IP Addres
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Preferred DNS
Server
Alternate DNS
Server
Windows License
Key
CR QS Client Station
System Type GX260+ GX270 GX620
Computer Name
Workgroup Name
IP Addres
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Preferred DNS
Server
Alternate DNS
Server
Windows License
Key
QS Server Namer
Site filled in by Date

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR Quality System 3.5 Annex / Page 1
Imaging Services Upgrade Installation

Type 4406/421
Upgrade Installation Instructions

for CR QS 3.5.398M in the
CR Mammography Solution

This document describes the update installation for
• the upgrade scenarios:
- upgrade CR QS 3.5.372M to CR QS 3.5.398M
- upgrade CR QS 3.0.263M1.0.020 to CR QS 3.5.398M
• main changes of CR QS 3.5.398M compared to CR QS 3.5.372M
Edition. Release Date
Revision
1.0 04 - 2007 Initial Release
Document Title
DD+DIS120.07E Service Bulletin:
Upgrade to CR QS 3.5.398M recommended to solve software
defects in CR Mammography Solution

04 - 2007 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 15706173

eq_07_upgrade-install_e_template_v02
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2007 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.

Agfa Company Confidential (Type 4406/421) 04 - 2007
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INFORMATION ON CR QS 3.5.398M..................................................................................... 1
1.1 Delivery of Software Version CR QS 3.5.398M ........................................................................1
1.2 Software Prerequisites and Possible Combinations.................................................................1
1.3 Hardware Requirements for CR Mammography Workstation ..................................................2
2 PREREQUISITES WHEN UPGRADING TO CR QS 3.5.398M .............................................. 3

2.1 Pre-installation Tasks................................................................................................................3
2.2 Required Tools..........................................................................................................................3
2.3 Create a Restore CD ................................................................................................................3
2.4 Archive/Print Images.................................................................................................................4
2.5 Prerequisites when Upgrading CR QS with RIS Connection ...................................................5
2.6 Check DICOM Bridge ...............................................................................................................5
2.7 Note down Annotations.............................................................................................................5
2.8 Export Configuration .................................................................................................................5
2.9 Create a Backup .......................................................................................................................6
2.10 Export a CR Mammography Study ...........................................................................................6
2.11 Adapting the Keyboard to US international '(QWERTY' keyboard) ..........................................7
3 UPGRADE FROM CR QS 3.0.263M1.0.020 OR CR QS 3.5.372M TO CR QS 3.5.398M ...... 9

4 INSTALLATION OF HOTFIXES ............................................................................................ 11
5 FINE TUNING........................................................................................................................ 12
6 RESTORE DATA................................................................................................................... 16
7 INSTALLATION OF ADDITIONAL LANGUAGES ................................................................. 18
8 PERFORM ID TABLET FIRMWARE UPGRADE .................................................................. 21
9 CHANGE BODY PART CONTAINING NON-DICOM CONFORM CHARACTERS............... 21
10 INSTALLING PC -ANYWHERE............................................................................................. 22
11 ACCEPTANCE TEST REVIEW............................................................................................. 22
12 CREATION OF A RESTORE CD .......................................................................................... 23
13 INFORM THE CUSTOMER................................................................................................... 24

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR Quality System 3.5 Chapter 7 / III
04 - 2007 (Type 4406/421) Agfa Company Confidential
14 ADDING THE CR QS SOFTWARE VERSION TO

THE CR MAMMOGRAPHY ACCEPTANCE TEST REPORT................................................ 26
15 FRESH INSTALLATION OF CR QS 3.5.398M ...................................................................... 27
15.1 Check the Prerequisites ......................................................................................................... 27
15.2 Installing the Operating System ............................................................................................. 28
15.3 Installing the CR QS 3.5.398M Software and the Default Configuration .............................. 28
15.4 Further Installation Steps ....................................................................................................... 30

Chapter 7 / IV CR Quality System 3.5 Edition 2, Revision 0
1 Information on CR QS 3.5.398M
1.1 Delivery of Software Version CR QS 3.5.398M
Order Number:
The Upgrade Installation Instructions for CR QS 3.5.398M can be ordered
under CM+3591840.
Scope of delivery:
• Application CD CR QS 3.5.398M, including Image Keeper Tool and
the ID firmware v. 1.2.07
• CR QS Server Client OS 3.0.108 CD
• Hotfixes CD v. 3.0.20
• Languages CD v. 3.0.03
• Restore Toolkit CD v. 3.0.17
• Documentation CD v. 3.5.02
• nVidia NVS 280/285 video driver + prodID
Software Version CR QS 3.5.398M can also be downloaded from ftp-server.

Use the Username and Password listed in MedNet Bulletin PACS 2004-11-23
Global FTP Server Password.
1.2 Software Prerequisites and Possible Combinations

Software version CR QS 3.5.398M can be installed on the following systems
• CR QS 3.5.372M
• CR QS 3.0.263M1.0.020
CR QS 3.5.398M can be operated in combination with the following digitizers:

• CR 85-X (all SW versions)
• CR 35-X (all SW versions)
• CR 75.0 (SW > ACP_3303 and SN > 3307)

1.3 Hardware Requirements for CR Mammography Workstation
For a list of released hardware for CR Mammography Workstation refer to the

CR Mammography Solution Service Manual, chapter 1 (DD+DIS227.04E) or
the CR Mammography Service Plan.
Further, it is required that the CR Mammography Workstation is connected to
an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). For more information on the subject
refer to chapter 3.2 on the CR QS 3.5 Service Manual (DD+DIS302.05E).

2 Prerequisites when Upgrading to CR QS 3.5.398M
Required Time:
between 30 min and 60 min.
2.1 Pre-installation Tasks
Inform the Customer before the on-site visit:
• about scheduling of your service tasks
• that no patients can be done during the upgrade
• that an access to all components of the solution is necessary
• that all images can disappear because of the upgrade

(if images are still needed after the upgrade, they have to be
archived/printed by the customer before the start of the upgrade),
see section 2.4
• check with the customer, if local regulatory requirements have to be

followed. If yes, these requirements will be carried out according to country
regulations either by an Agfa CR Mammography Specialist as Professional
Service or by an external audit
2.2 Required Tools
When you go on site to perform an upgrade, have the following tools with
you:
• a set of CDs where to store the exported studies on, that will be moved
to CR QS 3.5.398M. Number of CDs required depends on amount of
studies to be exported (6 CDs maximum).
2.3 Create a Restore CD

system after a system crash.
(see chapter 3.2 of the CR QS 3.0 service manual, DD+DIS273.04E /
CR QS 3.5 service manual, DD+ DIS302.05E).

2.4 Archive/Print Images

• Before upgrading the system, make sure that all images that have to be
archived/printed are successfully sent to PACS or printed.
If no archive is present or you want for other reasons keep the images on the
CR QS workstation do the following:
On CR QS 3.5 systems
Perform a backup procedure with the ImageKeeper program:
• Insert CR QS 3.5.398M application CD.

inserted CR QS 3.5.398M application CD.
• Type in qs3.ImageKeeperDriver.exe/a and then press <enter>
to execute the backup process.
Æ As a result of this, a backup of the database with all images will be stored
in D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Export Directory.
This folder will not be removed during the upgrade.
On CR QS 3.0 systems
Export studies:
• Open IPD Selector
• Run File/Export Study
• Select the studies you want to export and save them on the H: partition

2.5 Prerequisites when Upgrading CR QS with RIS Connection

Due to the improvements of the learning mode functionality it is highly
recommended to upgrade to CR QS 3.5.398M.
• Make sure that you write down all the RIS settings before starting the
upgrade.
• When a RIS connection is configured and the mapping XML file is not a
default XML file delivered on the system but an updated file created on
site, make sure you have a copy of this file also (e.g. on USB stick).
These files are overwritten when installing the new application.
• When working with the learning mode, be sure you have a copy of the
created IDV.ExamTreeMap file. You need this file afterwards. Also be
sure that the settings for the learning mode are known after the upgrade
(which attribute is used as reference).
For more information on RIS configuration and usage of the learning
mode refer to the CR QS 3.5 service manual, chapter 3.7
(DD+DIS302.05E).
2.6 Check DICOM Bridge

If the DICOM Bridge is in use before the upgrade move the file
D:/AGFA/ADB/database.txt to H: partition.
2.7 Note down Annotations

Check in the IPD viewer, if there are annotations made by the customer. If so,
note these annotations down to restore them manually after the upgrade.
2.8 Export Configuration

Export the full configuration xml-file.

2.9 Create a Backup on CR QS 3.0 and CR QS 3.5
(1) go to Start Æ Programs Æ Agfa CR QS 3.x Æ Tools Æ Config View
(2) select Monitoring
(3) double click CCCommander
(4) click Refresh list
(5) click BackupASPRO
(6) click on Execute task now
(7) wait until status Unloaded is reached
(8) the resulting backup file can be found in:

E:\Backup\ADCQS-BACKUP-xxxxxx-xxxxxx.zip.
Take the two recent ones and save them under the H: partition
2.10 Export a CR Mammography Study

Export a standard CR Mammography study on a CD and make a printout
(to be used during the Acceptance Test Review).
NOTE:
In case of a critical customer, ask the senior radiographer to perform a
standard Mammography study. The phantom used for this study should
be similar to human soft tissue with some structures. During the
exposure, lead markers have to be applied to mark each of the views
uniquely.
This study has to be exported before the upgrade. It will be used during
the Acceptance Test Review.

2.11 Adapting the Keyboard to US international ('QWERTY' keyboard)
When you log on as administrator, Windows XP is always set-up in English.

Therefore, to make work easier, a QWERTY keyboard (US international) has
to be configured.
(1) Login as administrator

(2) Go to Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel
(3) Select Date, Time, Language and Regional Options
(4) Select Regional and Language Options
(5) Select tab Languages
(6) Set Language to “English” and click on Details
figure 1

(7) Select tab Settings and Key Settings
figure 2
(8) Select Switch to English (United States) – US
figure 3
(9) Click OK
(10) Click Apply and then OK

3 Upgrade from CR QS 3.0.263M1.0.020 or CR QS 3.5.372M

to CR QS 3.5.398M
Required time:
(1) Stop the cluster
(2) Uninstall the old CR QS version

(Settings\Control Panel\Add or Remove Programs).
(4) Open Windows Explorer and remove the following folders on D:
• \Agfa\WDP
• \Agfa\SEC
• \Agfa\ADC-QS\Bin
• \Agfa\ADC-QS\Config
• \Agfa\ADC-QS\Log
If available, do also remove folders:
• \Agfa\improc
• \Agfa\ADC-QS\Help
Do not remove:
• \ADC-QS\Data
• \Java2
(5) Insert the application CD (CR QS 3.5.398M)
(6) Run K:\CR QS 3.5 Mammo.msi
(7) Click <Next>
(8) Accept the terms in the license agreement
(9) Click 2 times <Next>


The installation starts. This may take several minutes.
During the installation a window pops up where you have to select the
installation type again. Check Server.
figure 4
(11) Click <Apply>
(12) Then click <OK>
successfully. Click <Finish>
(14) Then you are asked to reboot the system.

Do not reboot now.

4 Installation of Hotfixes
NOTE:
In the About box of the CR QS system, check if the correct hotfixes are
installed. The installed hotfixes version will be shown. If this version is lower
than the version delivered with this upgrade kit, install the new hotfix CD.
(1) Insert the CD labeled “Hotfixes” in the CD-ROM drive.
(2) Doubleclick file autorun.exe

When you are asked, if you want to proceed with the installation,
click <Yes>
(3) The installation will take a few minutes (depending on the number of
hotfixes that are released by Microsoft). Your presence is not required at
this moment.
(4) During the installation process, the system will reboot automatically.
After the reboot log in as administrator or crservice.
(5) At the end of the Hotfixes installation, a message “Update procedure

Completed” pops up.
Click <OK> to finish the installation. The PC will shut down and restart
NOTE:
If the PC doesn’t shut down automatically, restart the PC manually. Click
<Start> Æ Click <Shut Down> Æ Select <Restart> Æ Click <OK>.
After the restart remove the installation CD from the CD-Rom drive.
The installation of the CR QS Operating System Update CD is finished.

5 Fine Tuning
NOTE:
This fine tuning of the CR QS system ensures that all users use the correct
regional settings. It assures that some background tasks (e.g. online
printing) use the correct regional settings. If this is not properly set, the
online printing would, for example, print the original date format (US-format),
instead of the regional date format. Strictly follow the instructions below!

figure 5
figure 6

(5) Click <OK>.
language.
(11) In the tab Advanced, select your language and mark the checkbox at the
bottom of the tab, to apply these settings for the default user profile.
figure 7
clicking <Apply>.


figure 8
NOTE:
(15) Click <OK>.


figure 9
(18) Click <Start>.
figure 10
figure 11

6 Restore Data
(1) Stop QS application (Stop Cluster);
when having upgraded from CR QS 3.5 systems:

run D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config\RestoreFrom3.5.js
when having upgraded from CR QS 3.0 systems:

run D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config\ RestoreFrom3.0.MR3M.js
(2) Select the restore file you have created before:

to be redone.
(3) Click <Restore>
(4) When the message “Restore succeeded” appears, click <OK> and then
click <Close>
(5) The script will end with a “done” message.

Click <OK>


NOTE:
In case you have made a backup with the ImageKeeper program and want to
restore the images you have to perform the following procedure.
• Ensure that the CR QS 3.5.398M application CD is inserted in the CD-

ROM drive.
• Type in qs3.ImageKeeperDriver.exe/r and then
press <enter> to execute the backup process.
Æ As a result of this a restore of the database with all images is performed.
(7) If the DICOM Bridge was in use before the upgrade:
• move the file H:/databse.txt back to D:/AGFA/ADB/database.txt

to restore the configuration of the DICOM Bridge (rename the
initial file database.txt)
• ensure the service of the DICOM Bridge (adbservice) is of the Start
up Type: Automatic (Start -Control panel - Administrative tools -
Services)
(8) Go to Start\Shut down\Reboot to reboot the system.
CR QS 3.0.263M / CR QS 3.5.372M Workstation has been successfully

upgraded to CR QS 3.5398M.

7 Installation of additional Languages


Click <Continue>.
NOTE:

(4) Select the option Match the language for non-Unicode

programs with the default user language.
figure 12
NOTE:
default language.
The administrator can define another language during the setup of the
account. Changing the default language for new users will set the logon
screen in this language.

figure 13
(8) Click <Cancel>.
figure 14

Wait a few minutes.
figure 15
other Language CDs.

8 Perform ID Tablet Firmware Upgrade
After upgrade to CR QS 3.5.398M an upgrade of the ID Tablet firmware is

necessary. Proceed as follows:
(1) Insert CR QS 3.5.398M application CD.
(2) Browse to BF2Upgrade_v1.12.07.zip.
(3) Open the zip file and follow the installation instructions which are also
part of the zip (installation instructions v1.12.07.doc).
9 Change Body Part containing non-DICOM conform

Characters
For the procedure how to change body part containing non-DICOM

conform characters, refer to Chapter 3.7 of the CR QS 3.5 Service
Documentation DD+DIS302.05E.

10 Installing PC -AnyWhere
Required Time:
15 min.
In case PC-Anywhere has not been installed so far:
(1) Go to the CR QS 3.5 Service Manual, Chapter 3.2
(2) Follow the instructions
11 Acceptance Test Review
This task has to be performed by a CR Mammography specialist.
Required Time:
20 min.
(1) Reboot the CR QS Mammo station and login with the radiographer
account
(2) Check if the software version in the viewer via the menu HELP and
About is CR QS 3.5.398M
(3) Check the GUI with the senior radiographer if unexpected changes
appeared during the upgrade
(4) Import a clinical study.

Make a printout of a complete clinical study and check the film layout
with the senior radiographer
(5) In case of a RIS connection, start the RIS worklist and check if the entries
can be selected and imported on the ID-Viewer as before the upgrade

(6) Ask a radiographer to perform a Mammography study with 4 X-ray images

of technical phantoms (e.g. key,..) and send the study to the PACS and/or
printer.
Check together with the senior radiographer if the study can be sent and
arrives as before the upgrade on the softcopy station and/or printer.
12 Creation of a Restore CD
Required Time:
50 min.
Create a Restore CD as described in the Service CR QS 3.5 Service Manual

DD+DIS 302.05 E

13 Inform the Customer
This task has to be performed by a CR Mammography specialist.
Required Time:
15 min
In case you have upgraded from CR QS 3.5.372M or CR QS

3.0.263M1.0.020, inform the radiographer that:
(1) No changes in operating the solution are required
(2) The following bug fixes are implemented:
• Inconsistencies in the User manual and in the QC Viewer Help

are removed.
• White band, caused by using the ‘add exposure’ function, will now
always be removed.
• Studies are no longer released unintentionally.
• Selection of customer annotations now works properly: the first

selection is not the effective one anymore.
• The annotation grid can be transmitted to PACS

(in case of technical exams for Quality Control).
• Images, which are placed in the print composer via drag & drop,
do not look noisy anymore.
• The Patient ID confirmation box in the ID Viewer does not pop up

anymore, if the Patient ID is not filled in.

In case you made the upgrade from the CR QS 3.0.263M 1.0.020, inform
the radiographer about the following topics which are new:
(1) Improved response time of CR QS user interface
(2) Optional licenses (keep it short, the goal is to provide the customer an
appetizer to order the new licenses)
New Licenses Topic
Multi Format Explain:

Import/Export
DICOM EXPORT of clinical images
Manual X-ray Explain:

parameters input
• The additional fields for the X-ray exposure
parameters in the ID-Viewer screen
• Required workflow: each cassette must be
immediately identified after the X-ray exposure
with the manually entered X-ray parameters.
This workflow ensures to link the X-ray
parameters with the correct cassette/image.
Reject Analysis Explain:
• Required workflow (images on hold) and how to

reject images
• Available reject reasons
• Export of reject statistics

14 Adding the CR QS Software Version to the

CR Mammography Acceptance Test Report
Required Time:
05 min.
(1) Add the new software version CR QS 3.5.398M to the initial

CR Mammography Acceptance Test Report
(2) Archive the updated CR Mammography Acceptance Test Report in your

NSO

15 Fresh Installation of CR QS 3.5.398M
NOTE:
Perform the ‘Fresh installation’ procedure in case the system crashed
during the upgrade.
Required Time:
Total: approx. 1.5 hours
15.1 Check the Prerequisites
Required Time:
10 min.
(1) Use the Service Manual CR QS 3.5 DD+DIS 302.05 E
(2) Check the availability of the required CDs

(see also section 1, Information on CR QS 3.5.398M)
• Application CD CR QS 3.5.398M, including Image Keeper Tool and

the ID firmware v. 1.2.07
• CR QS Server Client OS 3.0.108 CD
• Hotfixes CD v. 3.0.20
• Languages CD v. 3.0.03
• Restore Toolkit CD v. 3.0.17
• Documentation CD v. 3.5.02
• nVidia NVS 280/285 video driver + product ID
(3) 5 empty CD's for Restore CDs
(4) Download latest CR Mammography XML study tree, version 3.2.3:

MedNet GSO Library / Computed Radiography / CR Mammography Systems /
CR Mammo Phase 1C / Freeware

15.2 Installing the Operating System

(1) Install the Operating system with the Operating System CD
Windows XP Professional
(2) Configure the network connection as it was before the system crash
15.3 Installing the CR QS 3.5.398M Software and

the Default Configuration
(1) Login as administrator
(2) Insert the application CD (CR QS 3.5M SP1)
(3) Run the file CRQS3.5Mammo.msi
(4) Click <Next> in the screen

"Welcome to the installer for CR QS for Mammography"
(5) Accept the terms in the license agreement and click <Next>
(6) Enter user name and organization of the local customer. Click <Next>
(7) Select the setup type <Server> and click <Next>

The installation starts. This may take up to 10 minutes

(9) On the window "SecSet II", select the Instal Type Server and click
<Apply> and then <OK>
Again this takes several minutes.
figure 16
(10) Click <Finish> on the window communicating that the

CR QS for Mammography has been installed successfully
(11) Then you are asked to reboot the system. Click <YES>
(12) Reboot
(13) Start up the Configuration viewer and install the available CR QS

licenses
(14) Install the CR Mammography XML Study Tree, that you downloaded
from MedNet or prepared off-line
The CR QS 3.5.398M software has been successfully installed.

15.4 Further Installation Steps

To complete the fresh installation, perform the following installation tasks
(1) – (10), as described in prior sections of this documentation.
(1) Section 4, Installation of Hotfixes, page 11,
(2) Section 5, Fine Tuning, page 12,
(3) Section 7, Installation of additional Languages, page 18
(4) Section 8, Perform ID Tablet Firmware Upgrade, page 21,
(5) Section 9, Change Body Part containing non-DICOM conform

Characters, page 21,
(6) Section 10, Installing PC -AnyWhere, page 22,
(7) Section 11, Acceptance Test Review, page 22,
(8) Section 12, Creation of a Restore CD, page 23,
(9) Section 13, Inform the Customer, page 24,
(10) Section 14, Adding the CR QS Software Version to the

CR Mammography Acceptance Test Report, page 26.
The Fresh Installation is finished.

Imaging Services Field Modifications

Type 4406/421
Upgrade Installation Instructions for


This document describes
• The following upgrade scenarios:
- Upgrade CR QS 3.5.Service Pack 1 to CR QS 3.5 Service Pack 2,
- Upgrade CR QS 3.5.372 to CR QS 3.5 Service Pack 2 (SP2),
- Upgrade CR QS 3.0 to CR QS 3.5 SP2.
• Main changes of CR QS 3.5 SP2 compared to CR QS 3.5 SP1.
IMPORTANT:
This upgrade must not be installed on CR QS Mammography Workstations!

Revision Date compared to previous Version 2.0
2.1 07-2008 Added section 7.5, “Adapting Boot Sequence and other
BIOS settings on a Dell 755 “
Document Title
Service Bulletin “CR QS 3.5.463 (Service Pack 2) solves various Software
Problems” (DD+DIS026.07E).

eq_07_field-modifications_e_template_v06
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type ‘Order List’ in the GSO library.


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INFORMATION ON CR QS 3.5 SP2 ........................................................................................5

1.1 Delivery of Software Version CR QS 3.5 SP2 ..........................................................................5
1.2 Additionally Needed ..................................................................................................................6
1.3 Software Prerequisites and possible Combinations .................................................................6
1.4 Hardware Requirements for Server and Client.........................................................................7
2 PREREQUISITE TOOLS WHEN UPGRADING TO CR QS 3.5 SP2 FROM CR QS 3.0........8

3 PREREQUISITES WHEN UPGRADING CR QS WITH RIS CONNECTION ...........................8
4 UPGRADE TASK MATRIX .......................................................................................................9
5 UPGRADING FROM CR QS 3.5.372 OR CR QS 3.5 SP1 TO CR QS 3.5 SP2 ...................10
5.1 Upgrade Procedure on a Server System................................................................................10
5.2 Upgrade Procedure on a Client System .................................................................................13
6 UPGRADING FROM CR QS 3.0 TO CR QS 3.5 SP2............................................................15

6.1 Prerequisites ...........................................................................................................................15
6.2 Upgrade Procedure for a Server System................................................................................16
6.3 Upgrade Procedure for a Client System .................................................................................20
7 INSTALLING OPERATING SYSTEM (ONLY FOR UPGRADE FROM CR QS 3.0) ..............23

7.1 Adapting Boot Sequence on a Dell Precision WS670 ............................................................23
7.2 Adapting Boot Sequence on a Dell PowerEdge 700 ..............................................................24
7.3 Adapting Boot Sequence on a Dell Optiplex GX260/GX270 and Dell WS650......................25
7.4 Adapting Boot Sequence on a Dell Optiplex GX620 ..............................................................26
7.5 Adapting Boot Sequence and other BIOS settings on a Dell 755 ..........................................27
7.6 Operating System Installation Process...................................................................................28
8 CLEANING UP DISK SPACE ON DRIVE C:..........................................................................31

8.1 Removing old Windows Restore Points..................................................................................31
8.2 Deleting/Moving superfluous Files..........................................................................................33
9 INSTALLING THE CR QS 3.5 SP2 APPLICATION SOFTWARE ..........................................34

10 INSTALLING ADDITIONAL LANGUAGES.............................................................................35
11 INSTALLING HOTFIXES........................................................................................................37
12 CHANGING COMPUTER NAME AND WORKGROUP .........................................................39

13 CHANGING TCP/IP SETTINGS.............................................................................................41

14 LOOKING UP HOSTNAMES AND CREATING A HOST FILE ..............................................43
15 FINE TUNING.........................................................................................................................44
16 CREATING A CR QS USER ..................................................................................................48
16.1 Create a normal QSUser in a Domain Environment...............................................................48
16.2 Create an Administrator in a Domain Environment ................................................................50
16.3 Create a normal QSUser in a CR QS 3.5 Workgroup ............................................................51
17 PERFORMING ID TABLET FIRMWARE UPGRADE.............................................................56

18 VERIFICATION.......................................................................................................................60
19 TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................................................61
19.1 Log-off Time is not restored after Upgrade from CR QS 3.0.210 ...........................................61
19.2 Imported Hospital Logo is not restored after Upgrade from CR QS 3.0.210..........................61
19.3 Archive Problems if Bodypart contains German Umlaute like Ä, Ö, Ü (HQ_0605240007) ...62
19.4 In CR QS 3.5 FLFS images cannot be stitched. SW indicates error "not sufficient images
supplied" (HQ_0606190002) ..................................................................................................62
19.5 Parameters of ID Viewer lost after upgrade. (HQ_0606190003)............................................62
20 ANNEX: FORM TO FILL IN THE NETWORK PARAMETERS...............................................63


1 Information on CR QS 3.5 SP2
1.1 Delivery of Software Version CR QS 3.5 SP2
Order Numbers* for Upgrade Kits:

• Update kit CR QS 3.5.x to CR QS 3.5 SP2 (clean install kit): CM+3589980.
• Upgrade kit CR QS 3.0 Server to CR QS 3.5.463 Server: CM+3591130.
• Upgrade kit CR QS 3.0 Client to CR QS 3.5.463 Client: CM+3591140.
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of this
document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
Clean Install Software also available Online

The clean install kit (CM+3589980) will be delivered via CD ROM and will be available
on the MedNet FTP server(http://ftp.agfa.be/HE/software) for download. Due to the size
of the package it is recommended to order the CD if you do not have fast internet
connection.
NOTE:
Only applicable for Agfa employees:
To access the global FTP server, sign on using the username and password listed in
PACS 2004-11-23 Global FTP Server Password available on MedNet.
For non Agfa employees:
Order via Spare Part Supply Chain or contact your local Agfa Partner.
Scope of Delivery
Software:
• Application CD CR QS 3.5 SP2 (= CR QS 3.5.463) + ID Tablet firmware
installation software BF2Upgrade_V1.12.07
• User documentation CD CR QS 3.5.02
• CR QS Server & Client Operating System XP CD version 3.0.111
• Hotfixes CD version 3.0.22 or newer
• Languages CDs version 3.0.04
• Restore Toolkit CD version 3.0.18


Documentation:
• Upgrade installation instructions for CR QS 3.5 SP2 (DD+DIS389.06E),
(this document)
• Creation of a restore CD with Restore CD Toolkit 3.0.18 (DD+DIS105.07E)
Other:
• Windows XP licence sticker
(only for CR QS 3.0 server upgrades)
• PCAnywhere licence
(only for CR QS 3.0 upgrades)
• Serial cable for Powerware UPS
(only for QS 3.0 server upgrade)
• Empty CD-R (only QS 3.5.x update)
1.2 Additionally Needed
Portable medium (e.g USB-stick)
• CR QS 3.5 Service Manual, chapter 3.4 (DD+DIS 167.07E),

Acceptance Test Protocol
• CR QS 3.5 Service Manual, chapter 3.2 (DD+DIS302.05E), PCAnywhere software
1.3 Software Prerequisites and possible Combinations
Software version CR QS 3.5 SP2 can be installed on the following systems:

• CR QS 3.5 SP1,
• CR QS 3.5.372,
• CR QS 3.0.xxx.
The upgrade task matrix (see section 4) gives an overview of steps to be performed for
the different scenarios.
IMPORTANT:
This upgrade must not be installed on CR QS Mammography Workstations!


CR QS 3.5 SP2 can be operated in combination with the following digitizers:

• ADC Compact Plus (all SW versions),
• ADC Compact (SW versions COP_12xx),
• CR 75.0 (all SW versions),
• ADC Solo (SW versions SOL_11xx),
• CR 25.0 (all SW versions),
• CR 35-X,
• CR 85-X.
1.4 Hardware Requirements for Server and Client
For a list of released hardware for CR QS 3.5 server and client refer to the
CR QS 3.5 service manual, chapter 11 (DD+DIS130.06E).
Further, it is required that the CR QS 3.5 system is connected to an uninterruptible
power supply (UPS). For more information on the subject refer to chapter 3.2 on the


2 Prerequisite Tools when Upgrading to CR QS 3.5 SP2

from CR QS 3.0
REQUIRED TOOLS:
When you go on site to perform an upgrade, have the following tools with you:
• A set of CDs where to store the exported studies on which will be moved to
CR QS 3.5 SP2. Number of CDs required depends on amount of studies to be
exported (6 CDs maximum).
• 1 CD to store the operating system (OS) backup file, QS backup file, and the
exported XML file on.
3 Prerequisites when Upgrading CR QS with RIS Connection
Due to the improvements of the learning mode functionality compared to

version CR QS 3.5 or older, it is highly recommended to upgrade to CR QS 3.5 SP2.
• Make sure that you write down all the RIS settings before starting the upgrade.
• When a RIS connection is configured and the mapping XML file is not a default
XML file delivered on the system but an updated file created on site, make sure you
have a copy of this file also (e.g. on USB stick). These files are overwritten when
installing the new application.
• When working with the learning mode, be sure you have a copy of the created
IDV.ExamTreeMap file. You need this file afterwards. Also be sure that the
settings for the learning mode are known after the upgrade (which attribute is
used as reference).
For more information on RIS configuration and usage of the learning mode refer to the
CR QS 3.5 service manual, chapter 3.7 (DD+DIS302.05E).


4 Upgrade Task Matrix
The following upgrade task matrix gives you an overview which main steps have to be
performed for a successful upgrade to CR QS 3.5 SP2.
NOTE:
• This task matrix is only an overview of the main tasks that have to be performed
and does not reflect the correct order of actions . For the complete upgrade
procedure refer to the respective chapters.
• If you view this document on a PC, arrows are displayed . Use those for
navigating within the document.
Reference Upgrade Upgrade Upgrade

Section from from from
CR QS CR QS CR QS 3.0
3.5.SP1 3.5.372
Operating system installation 7 -- -- √
Installation of additional 10
-- -- √
languages
Remove Windows Restore 8
√ √ --
Points and delete/move files
Installation of hotfixes 11 √ √ √
Change computer name and 12
-- -- √
workgroup
TCP/IP settings 13 -- -- √
Installation of 9
√ √ √
CR QS 3.5 SP2 application SW
Create hostfile 14 -- -- √
Fine tuning 15 √ √ √
Create CR QS user 16 -- -- √
Perform ID Tablet firmware
17 -- √ √
upgrade
Change body part containing Chapter 3.7 of
non-DICOM conform characters the service
-- -- √
documentation
DD+DIS302.05E.
Perform acceptance test. Chapter 3.4 of
the service
√ √ √
documentation
DD+DIS302.05E


5 Upgrading from CR QS 3.5.372 or CR QS 3.5 SP1

to CR QS 3.5 SP2
5.1 Upgrade Procedure on a Server System
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Remove the Windows Restore Points and delete/move superfluous files to free
some disk space. For the procedure refer to section 8.
(2) On a running 3.5 SP1 server run the backup task:
• Go to Start Æ Programs Æ Agfa CR QS 3.5 Æ Tools Æ ConfigView to open

the Configuration Viewer.
• Go to Monitoring\CCCommander and click on <Refresh List>.
• Select BackupASPRO and click on <Execute Task Now>.
Æ Result: an ADC-QS Backup file is automatically created in E:\Backup.
(3) Check if the correct hotfixes are already installed. This can be easily checked in
the About box of the QS system. The installed hotfix version will be shown. If this
version is lower than the version delivered with this upgrade kit, you will have to
install the hotfixes later on.
(4) Stop the cluster:
Right-click the symbol Control Center in the Windows Task Bar and wait until the
cluster is stopped (if you put the cursor on the Control Center it will say
started/stopping/stopped).
Figure 1


(5) Uninstall the old CR QS 3.5 version:

Go to Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Add or Remove Programs,
choose CR QS 3.5 and click <Remove>.
(8) Open Windows Explorer and remove the following folders:
• D:\Agfa\WDP,
• D:\Agfa\SEC,
• D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Bin,
• D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config,
• D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Log.
IMPORTANT:
Do not remove:
• D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Data,
• D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Export,
• D:\Agfa\Java2.
(9) If available do also remove folders:
• D:\Agfa\improc,
• D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Help.
(10) Install the CR QS 3.5 SP2 application SW. For the procedure refer to section 9.
NOTE:
Do not reboot the system when the installer asks you to. Continue with next step.
(11) Stop the cluster (if not stopped) and run

D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config\RestoreFrom3.5.js.
(12) Select the restore file that was created in E:\Backup during the backup task
(see step 2).
• Check database,
• Check user settings,
• Check registry settings.


(13) Click <Restore>.
(14) A message shows up “Restore succeeded”. Click <OK>.
(15) Close the restore dialog by clicking <Close>.
(16) Some DOS windows appear and close automatically. Finally a “Done” message
box appears. Click <OK>.
NOTE:
After the installation of the hotfixes the system reboots. After login as crservice or
administrator following error message is shown:
Figure 2
The software licences are not activated yet. Click <OK>.
(19) Go to Start Æ Shut down Æ Restart to reboot the system.
(20) Log in as crservice.

IMPORTANT:
For QS 3.5.372 only: At this point upgrade the ID-Tablet firmware. Refer to section 17.
(21) Verify the update. Refer to section 18.
(22) Perform the technical acceptance test. Use the Acceptance Test Protocol for
Server in chapter 3.4 (DD+DIS 167.07E) of the CR QS 3.5 Service Manual.
The CR QS 3.5/3.5 SP1 server has been successfully upgraded to CR QS 3.5 SP2.


5.2 Upgrade Procedure on a Client System
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Remove the Windows Restore Points and delete/move superfluous files to free
some disk space. For the procedure refer to section 8.
(2) On a running client run:

D:\Agfa\ADC-Qs\Bin\ QS3.BackupCRQSClient.exe.
Æ Result: A backup zip-file is created automatically in E:\QSBCK.
NOTE:
If the extension “.exe” is not visible in the explorer, which makes it harder to identify the
right file, go to the menu bar in the explorer, click Tools Æ Folder options…, choose the
tab View and uncheck the checkbox hide extensions for known files.
(3) Check if the correct hotfixes are already installed. This can be easily checked in
the About box of the QS system. The installed hotfix version will be shown. If this
version is lower then the version delivered with this upgrade kit, you will have to
install the hotfixes later on.
(4) Right-click following symbol in the Windows Task Bar to stop the
QS cluster/client:
Figure 3
(5) Uninstall the old CR QS 3.5 version:

Go to Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Add or Remove Programs, choose
CR QS 3.5 and click <Remove>.


(8) Open Windows Explorer and remove the following folder: D:\Agfa.
NOTE:
Do not reboot the system when the installer asks you to. Continue with next step:
(10) Stop the QS cluster/client (if not stopped).
(11) Restore settings. Go to

Start Æ Programs Æ QS3.5 Æ Tools Æ RestoreCRQS.exe.
(12) Select the restore file (E:\QSBCK) you have created before:
• Uncheck database,
• Check registry settings.
(13) The script will end with a “restore succeeded” message. Click <OK>.
(16) Go to Start Æ Shut down Æ Reboot to reboot.
IMPORTANT:
For QS 3.5.372 only: If an ID Tablet is available, upgrade the ID Tablet firmware now.
Refer to section 17.
(17) Verify the update. Refer to section 18.
Clients in chapter 3.4 (DD+DIS 167.07E) of the CR QS 3.5 Service Manual.
The CR QS 3.5/3.5 SP1 client has been successfully upgraded to CR QS 3.5 SP2.


6 Upgrading from CR QS 3.0 to CR QS 3.5 SP2
6.1 Prerequisites
Make sure the hardware of the existing CR QS 3.0 system is supported for
REQUIRED TIME:
without making a backup of the images and creating a restore CD after the upgrade:
• To install a standalone server: 120 minutes.
• To install a cluster (server + 1, 2 or 3 clients): 180 minutes (when installation is
done in parallel – make sure enough CDs are available).
To create restore CDs afterwards: extra 45 minutes should be added to the total
installation time.
NOTE:
• Create a restore CD before you start the upgrade to be able to recover the system
after a system crash.
(see chapter 3.2 of the CR QS 3.0 Service Manual, DD+DIS273.04E).
• Before upgrading the system, make sure that all images that have to be archived
are successfully sent to PACS.
REQUIRED TOOLS
When you go on site to perform an upgrade have the following tools with you:
• Set of CDs where to store the exported studies on which will be moved to
CR QS 3.5 SP2. Number of CDs required depends on amount of studies to be
exported (6 CDs maximum).
• 1 CD to store the operating system (OS) backup file, QS backup file, and the
exported XML file on.


(1) On a running 3.0 server run the backup task:
• Go to Start Æ Programs Æ Agfa CR QS 3.0 Æ Tools Æ ConfigView to open

the Configuration Viewer.
• Go to Monitoring\CCCommander and click on <Refresh List>.
• Select BackupASPRO and click on <Execute Task Now>.
Æ Result: a ADC-QS Backup file is automatically created in E:\Backup.
(2) In the Configuration Viewer click File Æ Export XML to export the configuration to
an external drive (e.g. memory stick).
(3) Click the icon Viewer to open the selector. Choose the studies you want to keep
after the upgrade and click File Æ Export Study to export those studies to an
external drive (e.g. memory stick).
(4) Create a zip file containing:
• The backup zip file created by the backup task

(the most recent file from E:\Backup\ADCQS-BACKUP-xxxxxx-xxxxxx.zip),
• The configuration XML,
• The exported studies.
Save this zip file on memory stick, CD, or network.
NOTE:
It is recommended to keep the two last backup files in case one is corrupted.
(5) Open Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Network Connections.
(7) Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click on <Properties>.
(see annex at the end of this document):
• IP address,
• Subnet mask,
• Default gateway,
• Preferred DNS server (if available),
• Alternate DNS server (if available).


(9) Open Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ System.
(see annex at the end of this document):
• Computer name,
• Workgroup name (if available).
(12) In the ID Viewer go to Tools Æ Customize. Click through the registers of the
dialog “Settings”, take screenshots (<Alt> + <Print>) and save them to a
portable medium to have them available after the upgrade.
Figure 4
(13) Go to D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config. Copy the file that was displayed in the field
UI Format File of the ID Viewer settings window to a portable medium
(e.g. USB stick).
(14) Go to D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config\Settings. Copy the file that was displayed in the

field Ris Mapping File of the ID Viewer settings window to a portable medium
(e.g. USB stick).
(15) Open the viewer (IPD viewer) and click the button .
NOTE:
If the button is not visible, make sure to have an image loaded. If it is still not visible,
go to Tools Æ Customize Æ Command and drag and drop the button into one of
the toolbars.


(16) Take screenshot(s) of all annotations in the dialog “Predefined Annotation Text”
and save them to a portable medium to have them available after the upgrade.
(17) Continue with the installation of XP operating system (see section 7).
(19) Install additional languages (see section 10).
NOTE:
(24) Run D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config\RestoreFrom3.0.210.js. Select the restore file you

have created before:
• Uncheck registry settings.
IMPORTANT:
If the wrong boxes are checked, the installation of the application has to be redone.
• Click <Restore>.
• A message shows up “Restore succeeded”. Click <OK>.
• Click <Close>.
• The script runs and ends with a “Done” message box. Click <OK>.


NOTE:
After the reboot following error message is shown:
Figure 5
The software licences are not activated yet. Click <OK>.
(28) Activate the licenses. Refer to chapter 3.7: Software, Menus, Settings of the
QS 3.5 Service Manual (DD+DIS 302.05E).
(29) In the ID Viewer go to Tools Æ Customize and reconfigure the parameters of the
ID Viewer (use the screenshots you took earlier).
(30) Copy the UIFormat files and RISMapping files that you stored on a
portable medium before to following folders:
• UIFormat files: D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config, and,

• RISMapping files: D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config\Settings.
(31) Open the viewer (IPD Viewer) and reenter the predefined annotations.
(Use the screenshot you took earlier.)
(32) Open Configuration Viewer Æ File Æ Import XML Æ Full Configuration

to import the configuration settings.
characters. For the procedure how to change body part containing non-DICOM
conform characters please refer to Chapter 3.7 of the Service Documentation
DD+DIS302.05E.
(35) Open Selector Æ File Æ Import Study to reimport saved studies.
(36) Upgrade the ID Tablet firmware (see section 17).


(37) Verify the upgrade (see section 18).
Server in chapter 3.4 (DD+DIS 167.07E) of the CR QS 3.5 Service Manual.
The CR QS 3.0 server has now been upgraded to CR QS 3.5 SP2.
(1) On a running client run

D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Bin\ Agfa.QS3.BackupCRQSClient.exe.
Æ Result: A backup zip is created in E:\QSBCK\.
(2) Save the most recent backup zip E:\QSBCK\ADCQS-BACKUP-xxxxxx-xxxxxx.zip

to memory stick, CD, or network.
(3) Open Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Network Connections.
• IP address,
• Subnet mask,
• Default gateway,
• Preferred DNS server (if available),
• Alternate DNS server (if available).
(7) Open Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ System.
• Computer name,
• Workgroup name (if available).


(10) In the ID Viewer go to Tools Æ Customize. Click through the registers of the
dialog “Settings”, take screenshots (<Alt> + <Print>) and save them to a
portable medium to have them available after the upgrade.
Figure 6
(11) Go to D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config. Copy the file that was displayed in the field
UI Format File of the ID Viewer settings window to a portable medium
(e.g. USB stick).
(12) Go to D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config\Settings. Copy the file that was displayed in the

field Ris Mapping File of the ID Viewer settings window to a portable medium
(e.g. USB stick).
(13) Open the viewer (IPD Viewer) and click the button .
NOTE:
If the button is not visible, make sure to have an image loaded. If it is still not visible, go
to Tools Æ Customize Æ Command and drag and drop the button into one of
the toolbars.
(14) Take screenshot(s) of all annotations in the dialog “Predefined Annotation Text”
and save them to a portable medium to have them available after the upgrade.
(15) Continue with the installation of XP operating system (see section 7).
(17) Install additional languages (see section 10).


(21) Install hostfile on the client (use the hostfile created on the server).
NOTE:

Select the backup zip file you have created before:
• Uncheck registry settings.
IMPORTANT:
If the wrong boxes are checked, the installation of the application has to be redone.
(25) In the ID Viewer go to Tools Æ Customize and reconfigure the parameters of

the ID Viewer (use the screenshots you took earlier).
(26) Copy the UIFormat files and RISMapping files that you stored on a portable
medium before to following folders:
• UIFormat files: D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config, and,

• RISMapping files: D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Config\Settings.
(27) Open the viewer (IPD Viewer) and reenter the predefined annotations.
(Use the screenshot you took earlier.)
(30) Upgrade ID Tablet firmware (if ID Tablet available ─ see section 17).
(31) Verify the upgrade (see section 18).
Clients in chapter 3.4 (DD+DIS 167.07E) of the CR QS 3.5 Service Manual.
The CR QS 3.0 client has now been upgraded to CR QS 3.5 SP2.


7 Installing Operating System (only for Upgrade from CR QS 3.0)
NOTE:
First, you have to adapt the boot sequence of the system. Follow the appropriate
instructions and then continue with section 7.5.
7.1 Adapting Boot Sequence on a Dell Precision WS670
(1) Start the system. When it is starting, press <F2> to enter the BIOS setup.
(2) Move with the down arrow to Boot Sequence. Press <Enter>.
(3) Select hard disk and move it to the top of the list (use keys <u> and <d>).
(4) Exit BIOS setup saving the changes.
(5) Insert the CR QS operating system CD into the CR ROM drive and reboot. The
system will now start from hard disk.
(6) When the Dell logo appears, press <F12> to enter the boot menu. If you miss the
Dell logo, reboot again.
Boot Device Menu

==============

* System Setup



(7) Highlight Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive. Press <Enter>.
NOTE:
When the drivers for the Matrox card are installed, following screen may appear:
Figure 7
Do not click any of the two buttons.

The screen will disappear after the next reboot.
7.2 Adapting Boot Sequence on a Dell PowerEdge 700
(1) Start the system. When it is starting, press <F2> to enter BIOS setup.
(2) Check the Logical Processor setting.
(3) Move with down arrow to CPU Information and press <Enter> to enter the
CPU Information Listings.
(4) Select Logical Processor with down arrow.
(5) Press the <Space Bar> to change from enabled to disabled. Press <Esc>.


(6) Check the boot sequence. Move with down arrow to Boot Sequence
and press <Enter>.
(7) Select CD ROM drive and move it to the top of the list (use keys <+> and <->).
(8) Exit BIOS setup saving the changes.
(9) Insert the CR QS operating system CD into the CR ROM drive and reboot.

NOTE:
For this machine the boot sequence has to be reset later on in section 7.5!
7.3 Adapting Boot Sequence on a Dell Optiplex GX260/GX270 and

Dell WS650
(3) Select hard disk and move it to the top of the list (use keys <+> and <->).
Dell logo, reboot again. The menu looks as follows:
Device Menu
1. Normal
2. Diskette Drive
3. Integrated NIC
4. Hard-disk Drive C
5. IDE CD-ROM Device
6. System Setup
7. IDE Drive Diagnostics
8. Boot to Utility Partition
figure 8


(8) Choose IDE CD-ROM Device. Press <Enter>.
(9) The system will start from CD and so start the installation. On all following
reboots, the system starts from hard disk.
7.4 Adapting Boot Sequence on a Dell Optiplex GX620
(4) Press <Esc>.
(5) In the Performance Section, set Hyperthreading to Off.
Dell logo, reboot again. The menu looks as follows:
Boot Device Menu

=================

* Onboard SATA drive
* System Setup

figure 9


(10) Highlight Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive. Press <Enter>.
7.5 Adapting Boot Sequence and other BIOS settings on a Dell 755
(4) Press <Esc>.
(5) In the Performance Section, set Multiple CPU Core to Off.
Dell logo, reboot again.
Highlight Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive.
(10) Press <Enter>.


7.6 Operating System Installation Process
(1) After the reboot from CD you will get following message:
+----------------------------------------------+
! AGFA CR QS on XP (Imaged Version) !
! Multi Language !
+----------------------------------------------+
! !
! Installation will erase all current systems !
! !
! (Y) This machine will be totally reinstalled !
! (N) Exit to Operating system !
+----------------------------------------------+
figure 10
Type <Y>. The Norton Ghost screen appears for approx. 6 minutes
(the ghost file is copied to hard disc).
(2) Following message appears:
“Remove the CD and press CTRL-ALT-DEL to reboot.”
(3) Press any key to continue, remove the CD from the drive and press
<CTRL>-<ALT>-<DEL>.
(4) After the reboot, you will be asked if you are installing a server or a client:
+--------------------------------------------+
! AGFA CR QS System !
! Multi Language !
+--------------------------------------------+
! !
! New Installation. !
! !
! (C) CR QS XP Client Installation/Upgrade !
! (S) CR QS XP Server Installation/Upgrade !
+--------------------------------------------+
figure 11
Enter <S> for the server installation and <C> for the client installation.


(5) Following message appears:

+--------------------------------------------------+
! Multi Language !
! SERVER XP !
+--------------------------------------------------+
! !
! !
! New SERVER Installation !
! !
! (Y) This machine will be reinstalled totally !
! (N) Exit to Operating system !
+--------------------------------------------------+
figure 12
Press <Y> to start the installation.
(6) The system will reboot.
On a Dell PowerEdge700:
• Press <F2> to enter setup,

• Move with down arrow to Boot Sequence,
• Press <Enter>. Select hard disk and move it to the top of the list
(use keys <+> and <->),
• Save and exit setup.
On all other systems no extra actions are necessary.

(7) From now on, the installation is unattended (this takes about 60 min). Your
presence is no longer required until you are prompted to log in.
(9) You now need to provide the following data:
• Licensed organisation (e.g. Agfa). Click <OK>,

• Licensed owner (e.g. Agfa). Click <OK>,
• Product ID (Windows License Key). Click <OK>.


(10) After providing the correct product ID you will get the following message:
Figure 13
(11) Click <OK>.
The operating system installation has been finished.
NOTE:
Together with the installation of the operating system, PCAnywhere has been installed
on the system.
For a description of PCAnywhere software refer to the CR QS 3.5 Service Manual
(DD+DIS302.05E), chapter 3.2.


8 Cleaning up Disk Space on Drive C:
Before creating the backup, it is strongly recommended to first cleanup unneeded

data from the disk. Follow these procedures:
8.1 Removing old Windows Restore Points
(1) Stop the CR QS via the CR QS Monitor.

(2) Double-click on My Computer – and right-click on HD Drive C: and
select Properties.
(3) Click <Disk Cleanup>:
Figure 14
(4) Wait until the system has done some calculations.
(5) Select tab More Options.


(6) In the Section System Restore click <Clean up…>.
Figure 15
(7) Click <Yes>.
Figure 16
(8) Click <OK> to exit “Disk Cleanup”.
(9) Click <Yes>.
Figure 17
(10) The clean up starts. This may take some time.
Result Deleting Windows Restore Points is completed.


8.2 Deleting/Moving superfluous Files
(1) Go to the folder C:\I386.

(2) Select all files/folders within the I386 folder except the folder LANG
(<CTRL-A> and then deselect the LANG folder by CTRL-clicking it):
Figure 18
(3) Press <Del> to delete all selected files/folders.

(4) Go to C:\ and delete the entire folders Scripts and k.
(5) Go to C:\ and right-click the folder DRV. Cut the folder from drive C:\ and paste
it into either E:\ (on a client) or H:\ (on a server).
(6) Go to the Desktop and empty the Recycle Bin
(right-click and empty recycle bin).
Result Superfluous files are now removed.


9 Installing the CR QS 3.5 SP2 Application Software
(1) Insert the application CD (CR QS 3.5.463).
(2) Run K:\CR QS 3.5.msi.

NOTE:
If the extension “.msi” is not visible in the explorer, what makes it harder to identify the
right file, go to the menu bar in the explorer, click Tools Æ Folder options… , choose
the tab View and uncheck the checkbox hide extensions for known files.
(3) Click <Next>.
(4) Accept the terms in the license agreement.
(5) Click <Next>.
(6) Click <Next>.
(7) Select the setup type: Check Server or Client according to the system you are
presently installing and click <Next>.
(8) If you are installing a client system, you are asked to provide the server name
you want to connect to.
(9) Click <Install>. The installation starts. This may take several minutes.
During the installation a window pops up where you have to select the installation
type again. Check Server or Client according to the system you are
presently installing.
Figure 19


(10) Click <OK>.
successfully. Click <Finish>.
(12) When asked to reboot the system, refer back to the

installation instructions above.
IMPORTANT:
Most of the upgrades require that the restore procedure is performed before rebooting.
The CR QS 3.5 SP2 application software has been installed.
10 Installing additional Languages
NOTE:
As server and client are both running on Windows XP you can use the same CD for
both systems.
(1) Insert the CR QS language CD depending on the language you want to install
and launch MUISETUP.EXE from the CD. This will start the installation of
additional languages.

Click <Continue>.
(3) You then get a popup where you have to indicate the languages you wish to
install. Check the respective boxes.
NOTE:
Mind, only the languages on the inserted CD are listed. If you wish to install other
languages, click <Cancel> and insert another CD.


(4) Select the option Match the language for non-Unicode programs with the default
user language.
Figure 20
NOTE:
Keep the language for default user to English until the entire system is installed
(including QS software). Install scripts depend on English as default language. The
administrator can define another language during the setup of the account. Changing
the default language for new users will set the logon screen in this language.
(5) Click <OK> to start the installation. The installation of the languages takes up to
5 minutes per selected language.
Figure 21


(8) Click <Cancel>.
Figure 22
(10) Click <OK> to finish the installation of the languages. Wait a few minutes.
Figure 23
(12) Repeat the procedure if you wish to install additional languages from other
language CDs.
11 Installing Hotfixes
NOTE:
In case of an upgrade QS 3.5.xx to QS 3.5 SP2, check if the correct hotfixes are
already installed. This can be easily checked in the About box of the QS system. The
installed hotfix version will be shown. If this version is lower then the version delivered
with this upgrade kit, install the hotfix CD.
(1) Insert the CR QS operating system XP hotfix CD in the CD-ROM drive.
(2) Start cd:\hfinst.bat.


(3) When you are asked if you want to proceed with the installation, click <Yes>.
Figure 24
(4) The installation will take a few minutes (depending on the number of hotfixes that
are released by Microsoft). Your presence is not required at this moment.
NOTE:
If you get the message “Sorry but we are unable to detect your system type…
Would you like a Server, client or NO update?”, you need to select manually what type
of update you want:
• Type <S> if you want a server update,
• Type <C> if you want a client update,
• Type <N> if you want no updates at all.
(5) During the installation process, the system will request a reboot. Click <OK>. After
the reboot log in as administrator or crservice.
(6) At the end of the hotfixes installation, a message “Update procedure Completed”
pops up. Click <OK> to finish the installation. The PC will shut down and restart
NOTE:
If the PC doesn’t shut down automatically, restart the PC manually.
Click Start Æ Shut Down Æ Restart Æ <OK>.
After the restart remove the installation CD from the CD-ROM drive.
The installation of the CR QS operating system update CD is finished.


12 Changing Computer Name and Workgroup
(1) If not logged in, log in as crservice or administrator.
(2) To change the computer name, right-click the My Computer icon on the desktop
and select Properties. Then go to tab Computer Name.
Figure 25
Figure 26


(4) Here you can enter the computer name and the workgroup you wrote down in the
annex of this document. If there is was no workgroup name filled in the annex,
leave the default WORKGROUP. After entering the correct names click <OK>.
(5) If you changed the workgroup you will get the following welcome message:
Figure 27
(6) Click <OK>. Next you will get a message that tells you that you have to reboot:
Figure 28
(7) Click <OK> and then click <OK> to close the System Properties.
Click <Yes>.
Figure 29
Computer name and workgroup are changed.


13 Changing TCP/IP Settings
(2) To change the TCP/IP settings go to Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel, choose
Network and Internet Connections and then choose Network Connections.

(Right mouse click, Properties).
Figure 30
(4) The Local Area Connection Properties will open:
Figure 31


(7) In the TCP/IP properties you can change the values according to the values you
wrote down in the annex of this document before.
Figure 32
NOTE:
If there is no DNS server available at the site, leave the Preferred DNS server empty.


14 Looking up Hostnames and Creating a Host File
On the CR QS 3.5 system the QS server can not act as DNS server as was the case
on a CR QS 3.0 system. The CR QS application sometimes needs to look up the
hostname if an IP address is provided in the configuration of the CR QS cluster. There
are two possible scenarios for CR QS 3.5:
• The lookup is done by a DNS server available in the hospital,
A tool is available on the distributed CR QS CDs to gather all IP address.

Only the hostname/ IP address of client systems without ID-Tablet are not
retrieved automatically.
(1) Run the tool to collect all IP addresses and corresponding hostnames (location:
D:\Agfa\ADC-QS\Bin\hostfile.exe).
(2) Click <Start>.
(3) Click <DONE>.

(6) Open the file “hosts in C:\<WINDIR>\system32\drivers\etc\ with the

Editor/Notepad. Copy/paste the relevant lines from the QSHostFile.txt to file
called “hosts”.


15 Fine Tuning
NOTE:
This fine tuning of the QS system is necessary to make sure that all the users are using
the correct regional settings. Fine tuning is needed to make sure that some
background task (e.g. online printing) are using the correct regional settings. When this
is not properly set, the online printing would, for example, print the date in the
original date format (US-format) instead of the regional typical date format. Strictly
follow the instructions below!
(2) Go to Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Date and Time.

(If you are in category view you have to choose Language,
and Regional options).
Figure 33
(4) Next, select the tab Time Zone.
(5) Select the correct time zone and check the “Automatically adjust for daylight
saving changes”.


Figure 34
(6) Click <OK>.
(9) Go to Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Regional and Language Options.
(10) In the tab Regional Options, adapt both listboxes to your

corresponding language.
NOTE:
This listbox is only available if an additional language next to English has
been installed!


(12) In the tab Advanced, select your language and check the checkbox at the bottom
of the tab, to apply these settings for the default user profile.
Figure 35
clicking <Apply>.
(15) If this message pops up click <Yes>:
Figure 36


(16) The message box “Do you want to restart the computer now?” pops up.
Click <No>.
• In the tab Regional Options, adapt both listboxes to your corresponding

language (English, USA),
• In the tab Languages, set the listbox to English, USA. (The listbox is only
available if an additional language next to English is installed),
Figure 37
NOTE:
This brings the CRService account back to English (Unites States). This setting is
recommended for the CRService account.
(18) Click <OK>.
(19) If the message box (see Figure 30) pops up, click <Yes>.
The fine tuning is completed.


16 Creating a CR QS User
NOTE:
There are different procedures to create a user in a workgroup environment and to
create a user in a domain environment.
To create a normal user in a domain environment refer to section 16.1.
To create a normal user in a workgroup environment refer to section 16.3.
16.1 Create a normal QSUser in a Domain Environment
(1) The window below, where you can manage the users, can be opened via
Configuration Viewer Æ Tools Æ System Tools Æ Active Directory Users
and Computers.
Figure 38
(2) Right-click on folder: Users.


(3) Select <new user>.
A wizard leads you through the details.
• Only user logon name and one of the two: first / last name is mandatory,
• Fill in a password and its options.
When giving a password there are some complexity rules to follow:
• Must not contain all or part of the user's account name,

• Must be at least nine characters in length,
• Must contain characters from three of the following four categories:
o English uppercase characters (A through Z),
o English lowercase characters (a through z),
o Base 10 digits (0 through 9),
o No alphanumeric characters (e.g., !, $, #, %),
Make the user a member of one of the global groups:
(4) Right click on the new users you added and open its properties.
(5) Go to tab Member Of.
(6) Click <Add>.
(7) Type in the name of the global group for users: gsQSUsers.
(8) Click <Apply>.
(9) Click <OK>.


16.2 Create an Administrator in a Domain Environment
The easiest way to add a new administrator is to copy the existing one. The
administrator has to be member of several user groups to be a full administrator.
(1) Right click on the existing administrator.
Figure 39


(2) Select <Copy>.

Follow the wizard (as for a QSuser).
Figure 40
16.3 Create a normal QSUser in a CR QS 3.5 Workgroup
The users administrator, adcqsacct and crservice, as well as the groups QSAdmin,
In order to add one or more users (e.g. QSUser) to the workgroup, follow the


Figure 41
Figure 42



Figure 43
(5) Click <Create>.
NOTE:
(6) Click <Close>.


Figure 44
(8) Click <Add…>.


Figure 45
Figure 46


(12) Click <OK>.

(13) Click <OK>.
(14) Go to C:\Tools and run the RegionalSettings.exe file.

(If the Operating System older than CD 3.0.17 has been used to install the
operating system go to folder D:\agfa\adc-qs\bin. You will find the .exe file there).
Figure 47
(16) Click <Start>.
Figure 48
(17) While the program is working, text status messages and a progress bar are
continually updated. When the program has finished the <Cancel> button
changes to a <Close> button and the text status message communicates, that
the process has successfully completed.
Figure 49
NOTE:


17 Performing ID Tablet Firmware Upgrade
For all upgrades/updates except the update from CR QS 3.5 SP1 to CR QS 3.5 SP2 an
upgrade of the ID Tablet firmware is necessary. Proceed as follows:
REQUIRED TIME:
Approx. 15 min
(1) Switch the ID tablet off and connect it via serial port (COM port) to the
QS Server. If all serial ports of the QS Server are already in use, connect the
ID tablet to the serial port of your service PC.
(2) Log in using the crservice account (if you use the QS Server)
(3) Insert the additionally ordered CD containing the ID Tablet firmware

BF2Upgrade_V1.12.07.zip.
(4) Unzip file and copy extracted files to hard disk (e.g. C:\temp)
(5) Double-click the file BF2Upload1.12.exe.
(6) Click <Next> to choose default destination directory:
Figure 50


(7) Click <Next> to start copying files:
Figure 51
(8) Check the box <Yes, Launch the program file> and click <Finish> to
complete setup:
Figure 52


(9) Click the button <Select BF2-File…>, select the software file saved on
hard disk “1007_agfa_id_tablet_1_12_07.BF2”and then click <Open>.
Then click <Next> to upload software:
Figure 53
(10) Check that correct serial port, where ID-Tablet is connected to, is selected and
click <Next>.
Remark : Initial Protocol should be “Raw RS232 (only for initial setup)”
Figure 54


NOTE:
If the pc you use has only one COM port, select COM1. If it has more COM ports and
you don’t know which one is connected to theID tablet, you can check in the
Device Manager:
Go to Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel, choose System and there the register
Hardware. Click the button <Device Manager…>.
The COM ports are listed in Ports (COM & LPT).
(11) First click <Upload> to start upload process and then switch on ID-Tablet!
Installation progress is shown in the status bar.
Figure 55


(12) After the message “Transferred BF2- File successfully” appears, click <Close>
to finish upload:
Figure 56
18 Verification
Open the viewer by double-clicking the “viewer” icon on the desktop.

Click Help Æ About…
Figure 57
The version of the CR QS 3.5 Quality System must read: Version 3.5.463.


19 Troubleshooting
19.1 Log-off Time is not restored after Upgrade from

CR QS 3.0.210
Symptom Even though a backup of the CR QS 3.0 system has been made the previously
configured log-off time in the Configuration Viewer is not taken over to the
CR QS 3.5 system after running a restore process.
The log-off time is set to the default value 30 min.
Defect Temporarily under research.
Workaround Reconfigure the log-off time in the Configuration Viewer of the

CR QS 3.5 system manually.
19.2 Imported Hospital Logo is not restored after Upgrade from CR QS 3.0.210
Symptom Even though a backup of the CR QS 3.0 system has been made the hospital logo is
not taken over to the CR QS 3.5 system after running a restore process.
Defect The logo files are not included in the backup files created on 3.0
Workaround Import the hospital logo again manually.


19.3 Archive Problems if Bodypart contains German Umlaute

like Ä, Ö, Ü (HQ_0605240007)
Symptom Archive Problems if Bodypart contains German Umlaute like Ä Ö Ü
Defect If bodypart descriptions are configured and contain German Umlaute like Ä, Ö, Ü
(Example: WIRBELSÄULE) studies can not be archived.
Workaround Do not use German Umlaute when configuring bodypart description.

Suggestion:
Use following letters instead:
Ä = AE
Ö = OE
Ü = UE
Example: WIRBELSAEULE
Refer to chapter 3.7 – Software Menus, Settings of the QS 3.5 Service Manual, 2nd
Edition DD+DIS302.05E for an instruction to change the body part description.
19.4 In CR QS 3.5 FLFS images cannot be stitched. SW indicates error "not

sufficient images supplied" (HQ_0606190002)
Symptom FLFS studies with rejected images not stitchable.
Defect No defect
Workaround The conditions for stitching in different software versions are documented in FSB 4,
section 6.
19.5 Parameters of ID Viewer lost after upgrade. (HQ_0606190003)
Symptom Parameters of ID Viewer lost after upgrade.
Defect Restore script incomplete.
Workaround For upgrade from QS 3.5 the registry and database is restored as well.
For upgrades from lower than QS 3.5 the parameters have to be noted down and
reentered after upgrade.


20 Annex: Form to fill in the Network Parameters

This form will help you to have all data available you need for the upgrade to
CR QS 3.5 SP2.
System Type WS620 WS650 WS670 PE700 755
Computer Name
Workgroup Name
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Preferred DNS
Server
Alternate DNS
Server
Windows License
Key
System Type GX260+ GX270 GX620 755
Computer Name
Workgroup Name
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Preferred DNS
Server
Alternate DNS
Server
Windows License
Key
QS Server Name


DD+DIS302.05E Technical Standard Modifications
Chapter 8
List of Contents
1 Lists of all Service-Relevant Modifications .........1

1.1 Modifications on Server Systems ..................................... 1
1.2 Modifications on Client Systems....................................... 1

DD+DIS302.05E Manufacturing Standard Modifications
1 Lists of all Service-Relevant Modifications

1.1 Modifications on Server Systems
# What Why When With What? Where

is changed? changed? changed? documented?
– Remedy for – – SN, week – – Spare part – – Document –
1 new QS software with the new SN > CR QS 3.5.372 release info in
version software new QS-SERV-100003 upgrade kit can be chapter 3.8 of this
CR QS 3.5.372 for functionalities ordered under service
GenRad introduced have been CM+3532350 documentation
released and
bugs have been
solved
2 new QS software with the new SN > CR QS 3.5.372M CR Mammo
version software QS 3.5 QS-SERV-100079 upgrade kit can be Solution
CR QS 3.5.372M for workstation can ordered under SB No. 13,
Mammo introduced also be used for CM+3532380 DD+DIS152.06E
Mammo
applications
3 new QS software with the new SN > download from release info in
version software a bug QS-SERV-100088 MedNet: chapter 3.8 of this
CR QS 3.5.372 SU1 concerning Computed service
for GenRad image Radiography/CR documentation
introduced processing of Workstation
Auto QC has Software\CR QS
been solved 3.5\Freeware
1.2 Modifications on Client Systems
# What Why When With What? Where

is changed? changed? changed? documented?
– Remedy for – – SN, week – – Spare part – – Document –
1 new QS software with the new SN > CR QS 3.5.372 release info in
version software new QS-CLIE-100002 upgrade kit can be chapter 3.8 of this
CR QS 3.5.372 for functionalities ordered under service
GenRad introduced have been CM+3532350 documentation
released and
bugs have been
solved
3 new QS software with the new SN > download from release info in
version software a bug QS-CLIE-100268 MedNet: chapter 3.8 of this
CR QS 3.5.372 SU1 concerning Computed service
for GenRad image Radiography/CR documentation
introduced processing of Workstation
Auto QC has Software\CR QS
been solved 3.5\Freeware

HEALTHCARE Maintenance

*16A99T1*
1 Piece 6A99T MA1
Type 4406/421
This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS129.06E

2006-07-04
Maintenance DD+DIS129.06E
CAUTION:
This system uses mains voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
These instructions describe adjustments and routines which must only be performed by qualified
technical personnel.
NOTE:
Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician.

Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
CE Declaration:
According to the medical guidelines the CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the
product is changed without explicit consent of the manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to
safety elements.
We reserve the right to technical changes

Chapter 9 CR Quality System 3.5 Edition 2, Revision 0
DD+DIS129.06E Maintenance
Chapter 9:
List of Contents
1 Safety Instructions .................................................... 1

1.1 Safety Regulations for System Components ........................ 1
1.2 Safety Regulations for CR QS 3.5 Hardware ......................... 2
2 Software Maintenance .............................................. 3
3 Hardware Maintenance ............................................. 3
Appendix:
Maintenance Checklist

1 Safety Instructions
NOTE:
electricians.
technicians.
NOTE:
1.1 Safety Regulations for System Components
• Always disconnect any components of the CR QS system from the
mains before carrying out service or maintenance.

NOTE:
ensures that the electrical flow to the workstation is not interrupted because
of a blackout.

1.2 Safety Regulations for CR QS 3.5 Hardware


manual.

2 Software Maintenance
CR QS 3.5 server and client software are free of preventive maintenance.
3 Hardware Maintenance
Perform the following maintenance steps on CR QS 3.5 server and client
when you are on site for another reason (e.g because of performing a
software update) but maximum once a year:
CAUTION:
Electrical discharge and damage to electrical parts can occur.
Do not open the server or client PC for cleaning.
Device Action Auxiliary Details

equipment see
Server and Clean ventilation openings Vacuum cleaner --
Client Station CM+9 9999 0895 0
CR QS System Check all external cables and cable -- --
and Periphery connections for damage and loose contacts
Monitor Clean monitor screen cleaner --
commercially
available
Visually check calibration of monitor --
If an image error was detected, talk to the

radiologist to decide the recalibration of the
monitor.
Recalibrate the monitor Chapter
3.6
Contact the responsible Application Specialist
ID Tablet Clean surface of the ID Tablet lint-free cloth --
commercially
available
Check cassette duct for tight mounting -- --
UPS according to the UPS Service Plan in MedNet, -- --
GSO Library:
Computed Radiography/General CR info/
General Documentation CR/Service Plan/UPS

HEALTHCARE Maintenance
Global Services Organisation Checklist
Type 4406/421
System components to be inspected:

CR QS Server Station SN ......................
CR QS Client Station SN ......................
Maintenance must be carried out according to the maintenance instructions,

see chapter 9 of your Service Documentation.
Device Test Point - Maintenance Point Done

Complete System Talk to the operators about possible problems.
Talk to the physician in charge about the image processing
parameters in the various menus.
CR QS Server and Clean ventilation openings of the workstation.
Client Station
CR QS System and Check all external cables and cable connections for damage and
Periphery loose contacts.
ID Tablet Clean surface of the ID Tablet.
Check cassette duct for tight mounting.
Check function of the ID Viewer by identifying a cassette.
Monitor Visually check calibration of the monitor
If an image error was detected, talk to the radiologist to decide the
recalibration of the monitor.
Recalibrate the monitor or contact the responsible Application
Specialist.
Clean the monitor.
Image Quality Expose a flatfield and evaluate the image on the workstation and
the laser printer.
Criteria: homogenous field, stripes a.s.o. Recalibrate if necessary.
Check plates for running askew with a test sheet.
Check test sheet for wobbling of the Galvo in digitizer.
UPS according to the UPS Service Plan

2006-07-04
Device Test Point - Maintenance Point Done

Maintenance Enter <Maintenance date> in the service program.
Completion
At the end of the maintenance, hand over the maintenance
checklist to the customer and inform him about the results of the
maintenance.
If any image faults were detected, inform the responsible
Application Specialist.
Remarks:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................... ...................................................................
Date / Signature Service Technician Customer

Maintenence Checklist / Page 2 CR Quality System 3.5 Edition 2, Revision 0
Copyright  2006-xx-xx HealthCare GmbH, DD+DIS129.06E
All rights reserved
Published by

D - 81539 München
Technical modifications reserved
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH

2006-07-04
Imaging Services Service Bulletins

Type 4406/421
► Please note
Service Bulletins are not part of the Service Manual for Download.
Please download the Service Bulletins from the GSO Library:

MEDNET GSO Æ Computed Radiography Æ CR Workstation Software Æ
CR QS 3.5 Æ Service Bulletin

service_bulletin_cover_e_template_v01
DD+DIS302.05E Service Bulletins
intentionally left blank


HEALTHCARE Installation Planning

*16BAB41*
1 piece 6BAB4 MA1 Type 4406/421
This documentation is separately available: DD+DIS130.06E

2006-07-04
1 2 3
Installation Planning DD+DIS130.06E
Caution:
This system uses mains voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
These instructions describe adjustments and routines which must only be performed by qualified
technical personnel.
Note:
Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician.

Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
CE Declaration:
The CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit
consent of the manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
We reserve the right to technical changes

Chapter 11 CR Quality System 3.5 Edition 2, Revision 0
DD+DIS130.06E Installation Planning
1 2 3
Chapter 11:
List of Contents
1 Safety Instructions .......................................................................1

1.1 Safety Regulations for System Components ............................................... 1
1.1.1 Safety Regulations for CR QS 3.5 Hardware.................................................... 2
2 CR QS 3.5 System Overview .......................................................3
2.1 Important Changes compared to CR QS 3.0 ................................................ 4
2.2 Transport Path ................................................................................................ 4
3 CR QS 3.5 Server Station.............................................................5

3.1 Hardware Requirements................................................................................. 5
3.2 Hardware Requirements for P-values on CR QS Server (optional)............ 7
3.3 Technical Data of the CR QS Server Station ................................................ 7
3.3.1 Electrical Connections ...................................................................................... 7
3.3.2 Environmental Requirements for the PC .......................................................... 8
3.3.3 Network............................................................................................................. 8
3.3.4 Weights ............................................................................................................. 8
4 CR QS 3.5 Client Station..............................................................8
4.1 Hardware Requirements................................................................................. 8
4.2 Hardware Requirements for P-values on CR QS Client (optional) ........... 10
4.3 Technical Data of the CR QS Client Station ............................................... 11
4.3.1 Electrical Connections .................................................................................... 11
4.3.2 Environmental Requirements for the PC ........................................................ 11
4.3.3 Network........................................................................................................... 11
4.3.4 Packing Dimensions ....................................................................................... 11
4.3.5 Weights ........................................................................................................... 11
4.4 Other Optional Hardware ............................................................................. 12
4.5 Software Requirements................................................................................ 12

1 2 3
5 Typical Load ............................................................................... 12
6 Service Metrics and KPI’s (specified Target Values) ............. 12
7 GUI - Templates for ID Viewer .................................................. 13
8 Connection to HIS/RIS System................................................. 24
9 Monitors...................................................................................... 25
9.1 Correct Position of Monitors ........................................................................25
Appendix:
Installation Planning Checklist

Installation Information Forms

1 2 3
NOTE:
This document describes the Installation Planning of the CR QS 3.5 Server
and Client Station.
For the Installation Planning of the CR Digitizers, please refer to the
following documents:
ADC Compact Digitizer: DD+DIS288.00E
ADC Solo Digitizer: DD+DIS251.02E
CR 25.0 Digitizer DD+DIS232.05E
CR 75.0 Digitizer DD+DIS227.05E
1 Safety Instructions
NOTE:
electricians.
technicians.
NOTE:
1.1 Safety Regulations for System Components


1 2 3
NOTE:
ensures that the electrical flow to the workstation is not interrupted because
of a blackout.


manual.

1 2 3
2 CR QS 3.5 System Overview
Figure 1 gives an overview of the field of application of the CR Quality System.
10
on Mbit
ly
figure 1

1 2 3
2.1 Important Changes compared to CR QS 3.0
The CR QS 3.5 is based on the CR QS 3.0 (DD+DIS273.05E).

The main changes compared to the CR QS 3.0 are:
• CR QS 3.5 systems can be operated in a standalone workgroup or be

integrated into an existing hospital domain.
• ADC QS 2.1 MR4 functionalities integrated into CR QS 3.5:

◦ Cleanup Studies including Failed Studies (Diskmon)
◦ Patient Orientation for sending out to PACS Systems changed
◦ QC Viewer: Combined Force Release
◦ Print Composer
• new functionalities in CR QS 3.5:

◦ fast preview
◦ DICOM export of images
◦ extended storage
◦ P-values
◦ extended character set
◦ improved selection for studies
• changed functionalities in CR QS 3.5:

◦ configurable black border
◦ extended “reject” functionality (reject analysis toolset license)
◦ no GUI customization by the operator
NOTE:
The CR QS 3.5 is not supported for the DX-S digitizer.
2.2 Transport Path
NOTE:
It must be possible to transport all the components of CR QS through all
hallways and doors up to the installation site!
Minimum door width: 60 cm (24 inch)

1 2 3
3 CR QS 3.5 Server Station
3.1 Hardware Requirements
Dell Precision Dell Precision Dell Precision WS670

WS650/2.4GHz WS650/2.8GHz 3.4/3.6 GHz
Type PRECISION WS650 PRECISION WS650 MIDSIZE PRECISION WS670 MIDSIZE
MIDSIZE TOWER TOWER TOWER
CPU XEON PROCESSOR 2.4 XEON PROCESSOR 2.8 GHZ Intel Xeon 3.4/3.6 GHz
GHZ (EM64T) dual processor
capability
Ram (*) 2 x 256 MB DDR, 2 x 512 MB DDR RAM ECC 1 GB (2 x 512 MB) Dual-
266 MHZ DDRAM, PC2100 Channel,
(2 MEM SLOTS FREE) (2 MEM SLOTS FREE) 400 MHz DDR2-SDRAM
Disks 3.5”/1.44 MB FD 3.5”/1.44 MB FD 1x 3.5“ FD
IDE CD/RW 48X/24X/48X IDE DVD/CDRW combo CDROM/DVD 48X/32X
DVD/CDRW Combo Drive
2 x 36 GB HD U160/M 2 x3 6 GB HD U160/M SCSI
SCSI 1” 10 K 1” 10 K HD 2x 36 GB SCSI, Ultra/320,
10K rpm,
Non RAID SCSI Cable for 1 or
2 HDs
Video ATI RADEON VE 32 MB nVidia Quadro 280NVS Matrox G550 video driver
VRAM DUAL VGA/DVI DVI/VGA
VIDEO OUTPUT
Power Voltage: 90-135/ Voltage: 90-135/ Voltage: 90-135/
180-265 V at 50/60 Hz 180-265 V at 50/60 Hz 180-265 V at 50/60 Hz
Wattage: 460 W Wattage: 460 W Power 650 W
supported OS Win XP Win XP Win XP
(*) For GenRad applications a RAM size of minimum 1 GB is recommended.

For Mammo applications a RAM size of minimum 2 GB is recommended.
Note that there is no RAM upgrade kit available. Contact your RSN in case you need
to make a RAM upgrade.

1 2 3
Dell PowerEdge 700 Optiplex GX620

Type PowerEdge 700 SMT
CPU Intel Pentium 4 processor Intel Pentium 4
2.8 GHz 3.4 GHz
Ram (*) 1 x 1 GB DDR1 SDRAM 2 GB (4x 512MB)
DIMM’s DDR2 SDRAM (0 slots free)
(3 MEM SLOTS FREE)
Disks 3.5”/1.44MB FD hard disks SATA: 1x 80GB +
1x 160 GB
IDE DVD/CDRW combo
CD/DVD R/W + sw media
2 x 36 GB SCSI ultra320, 10 K
rpm 1 inch 68 pin 3.5" FD
Video Matrox G450 video driver nVidia NVS280
Power Voltage: 90-135/ 90 – 135 V at 60 Hz
180-265 V at 50/60 Hz 180 – 265 V at 50 Hz
Wattage: 330 W Wattage: 305 W
supported OS Win XP WIN XP

For Mammo applications a RAM size of minimum 2 GB is recommended.

1 2 3
3.2 Hardware Requirements for P-values on CR QS Server (optional)
If the customer wants to work with P-values the hardware requirements of the
server system must meet the requirements for P-value application.
When you set up a new CR QS 3.5 server system this will be the case.
When you perform an upgrade from CR QS 3.0 or ADC QS 2.1 you have to
check if a hardware upgrade for the P-value application is necessary. For this
refer to the following table:
Server system P-values

Dell Precision WS650 P-value upgrade kit available
2.4 GHz, midsize tower
Dell Precision WS650 Supports P-values
2.8 GHz, midsize tower
Dell Precision WS670 Supports P-values
misize tower
Dell Poweredge 700 Supports P-values
For the installation of the P-value hardware upgrade kit refer to chapter 6 in
this service documentation.
3.3 Technical Data of the CR QS Server Station
3.3.1 Electrical Connections
Mains connection
Connection to an outlet 3 x 100 - 120 V / 230 - 240 V, 50 - 60 Hz
External fuse protection min. 6 A slowblow, max. 16 A slowblow
Connection cable Euro: 3 x H05VV - 3 x 1.5 mm², with grounded
pin plug, cable length 2.5 m (98 inch)
US: cable SJT, 3 x AWG 18 with NEMA 5-15P,
cable length 2.3 m (91 inch)
Interface connections 1 x network connection (Ethernet) for RIS Link
Serial ports 1 x RS232

1 2 3
3.3.2 Environmental Requirements for the PC
Temperature 10° -35°C 50° - 95°F

Humidity 20 -80% (non-condensing)
3.3.3 Network
In order to have a good performance the server and its clients should be in a
network environment of at least 100 Mbit .
3.3.4 Weights
CR QS Server Station with box: ≈ 20 kg

without box: ≈ 19 kg
4 CR QS 3.5 Client Station
4.1 Hardware Requirements
Dell Optiplex GX260+ Dell Optiplex GX260+ Dell Optiplex GX270

2.4 Ghz SFF 2.4 Ghz SMT 2.8 Ghz SFF
Type Optiplex GX260+ Optiplex GX260+ Optiplex GX270
Small Form Factor Small Mini Tower
Small Form Factor
CPU Intel processor P4 2.4 GHz Intel processor P4 2.4 GHz Intel processor P4 2.8 GHz
RAM (*) 1 x 256 MB DDR SDRAM 1 x 256 MB DDR SDRAM 2 x 512 MB DDR SDRAM
PC400 Non-ECC
PC266 Non-ECC PC266 Non-ECC
Disks 3.5"/1.44MB FD 3.5"/1.44 MB FD 3.5"/1.44 MB FD
CD/RW CD/RW 24 x IDE CD-RW/DVD
1 x 40 GB HD 1 x 40GB HD combo
1 x 40 GB HD
Video 32 MB 4XAGP ATI 32 MB 4XAGP ATI on board + DVI adaptor
Radeon VE Multi Monitor Radeon VE Multi Monitor Intel(R) 82865G Graphics
With DVI out With DVI out Controller
Power Voltage: 90-135/ Voltage: 90-135/ Voltage: 115/230 V
180-265 V at 50/60 Hz 180-265 V at 50/60 Hz
Wattage: 160 W

1 2 3
Dell Optiplex GX270 Dell Optiplex GX620

2.8 Ghz SMT
Type Optiplex GX270 Optiplex GX620
Small Mini Tower Small Mini Tower
CPU Intel processor P4 2.8 GHz Intel Pentium 4 Processor,
3.0 GHz
RAM (*) 2 x 512 MB DDR SDRAM 1 GB MHz Dual Interleaved
PC400 Non-ECC DDR2 SDRAM
(2 MEM SLOTS FREE)
Disks 3.5"/1.44 MB FD HD: serial ATA 2, 40 GB
24 x IDE CD-RW/DVD combo 3.5” FD
1 x 40 GB HD NEC DVD + RW ND 3530A
Video on board + DVI adaptor graphics on board, DVI
Intel(R) 82865G Graphics extension, video cables
Controller (VGA + DVI)
Power Voltage: 115/230 V Voltage: 115/230 V at 60/50 Hz

1 2 3
4.2 Hardware Requirements for P-values on CR QS Client (optional)
If the customer wants to work with P-values the hardware requirements of the
client system must meet the requirements for P-value application.
When you set up a new CR QS 3.5 client system this will be the case.
When you perform an upgrade from CR QS 3.0 or ADC QS 2.1 you have to
check if a hardware upgrade for the P-value application is necessary. For this
refer to the following table:
Client system P-values

Dell Optiplex GX260+ Not supported
SSF
Dell Optiplex GX260+ Upgrade kit available
SMT
Dell Optiplex GX270 Not supported
256 MB, SFF
Dell Optiplex GX270 Upgrade kit available
256 MB, SMT
Dell Optiplex GX270 Not supported
1 GB, SFF
Dell Optiplex GX270 Upgrade kit available
1 GB, SMT
Dell Optiplex GX270 Supports P-values
1 GB, SFF with Matrox G450
video board
Dell Optiplex GX270 Supports P-values
1 GB, SMT with Matrox G450
video board
Dell Optiplex GX620 SMT Supports P-values
For the installation of the P-value hardware upgrade kit refer to chapter 6 in
this service documentation.

1 2 3
4.3 Technical Data of the CR QS Client Station
4.3.1 Electrical Connections
Mains connection
Connection to an outlet 3 x 100 - 120 V / 230 - 240 V, 50 - 60 Hz
External fuse protection min. 6 A slowblow, max. 16 A slowblow
Connection cable Euro: 3 x H05VV - 3 x 1.5 mm², with grounded
pin plug, cable length 2.5 m (98 inch)
US: cable SJT, 3 x AWG 18 with NEMA 5-15P,
cable length 2.3 m (91 inch)
Interface connections 1 x network connection (Ethernet) for RIS LINK
Serial ports 1 x RS232
4.3.2 Environmental Requirements for the PC
Temperature 10° -35°C 50° - 95°F

Humidity 20 -80% (non-condensing)
4.3.3 Network
In order to have a good performance the server and its clients should be in a
network environment of at least 100 Mbit.
4.3.4 Packing Dimensions
CR QS Client Station L x W x H: 61 x 58 x 43 cm (24 x 23 x 17 inch)

Monitor (max. dimension) L x W x H: 68 x 80 x 76 cm (27 x 32 x 30 inch)
(max. dimension – depends on monitor type)
4.3.5 Weights
CR QS Client Station with box: ≈ 7 - 14 kg

(depending on type) without box: ≈ 6 – 12.7 kg

1 2 3
4.4 Other Optional Hardware
• UPS (uninterruptible power supply), see chapter 3.2 in this service

documentation
• service host for remote support
4.5 Software Requirements
Delivered on staging CD:

• Windows XP Pro
• CR QS 3.5 application
5 Typical Load
Typical Cycles per...

100 Day
2000 Month
25000 Year
6 Service Metrics and KPI’s (specified Target Values)
Server Client
MTTI 50 – 80 min 50 – 80 min
(Mean Time To Install) new installation
MTTI 120 min 80 min
(upgrade from ADC QS 2.1)
MTTI 120 min 80 min
(upgrade from CR QS 3.0)
MTTI 60 min 60 min
(upgrade from a previous CR QS 3.5)
MTTM (Mean Time To Maintain) 30 min 30 min
MTBM 1 year 1 year
(Mean Time Between Maintenance)
MTBU (Mean Time Between Upgrades) 6 months 6 months
Service support time, parts availability 3 years 3 years

1 2 3
7 GUI - Templates for ID Viewer
The ID-Viewer GUI is configured by means of predefined templates coming

with the CR QS ID Viewer software (licensed option). There are templates for
normal screens and for 15'' touch screens available.
IDVFormDefault.xml
figure 2

1 2 3
IDFormDefaultJP.xml
figure 3

1 2 3
IDVFormNoDestination.xml
figure 4

1 2 3
IDVFormNoPrint.xml
figure 5

1 2 3
IDVFormNoPrintTemplate.xml
figure 6

1 2 3
IDVFormSimple Print.xml
figure 7

1 2 3
IDVFormTouch15''.xml
figure 8

1 2 3
IDVFormTouch17''.xml
figure 9

1 2 3
IDVFormDefaultFr3.xml
figure 10

1 2 3
IDVFormDefaultSCN.xml
figure 11

1 2 3
IDVFormKorean.xml
figure 12

1 2 3
8 Connection to HIS/RIS System
The connection from a hospital HIS/RIS system to the CR QS system is

realized by the QS RIS Link Toolkit (licensed option).
The configuration of the RIS Link is described in the RIS Link Toolkit User
Manual (enclosed in the QS RIS Link Toolkit option). It gives the information
how the data provided by the RIS should look like in respect to format,
structure and DICOM mapping. The data the hospital RIS system delivers,
have to match to these definitions. Changes on CR QS side are not foreseen.
To avoid delays during setup, it is absolutely necessary that the customer is
aware well in advance what his HIS/RIS system has to deliver.
Please take care that the customer gets the QS RIS Link user manual
together with the installation planning.

1 2 3
9 Monitors
9.1 Correct Position of Monitors

When choosing a site for the CR QS System, observe the following principles
for positioning monitors:
NOTE:
If the customer wants to work with P-values, the ambient light conditions in
the room have to be considered when setting up the monitor.
For the functional description of P-values refer to chapter 2 in this service
manual.
For the configuration of P-values on the QS system refer to chapter 3.7 in
the service manual.
• Prefer working parallel to a

window.
figure 13
• Avoid sitting opposite a

window.
figure 14

1 2 3
• Avoid reflections through direct

sunlight.
figure 15
• Avoid reflections from a light

source in the room
(e.g. lamps, view box).
figure 16
NOTE:
For detailed information on ergonomic working conditions, please consult
the respective local regulations.

HEALTHCARE Installation Planning
Global Services Organisation Checklist

Type 4406/421
In order to avoid any unnecessary delays during the installation and the
machine startup, the following points of the checklist below should be carried
out prior to the installation.
Check and discuss all the required measures for the installation by means of
this checklist. Remarks on the individual items may be made on the back of
the list.
After installation of the system, we ask you to give this checklist to your local
Agfa representative.
Customer: .........................................................................................................................
Department: .........................................................................................................................
System .........................................................................................................................
Components:
.........................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................
Remarks: .........................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................

2006-07-04
1 2 3
Installation Planning Checklist DD+DIS130.06E
NOTE:
Transport to the installation site, unpacking and removal of the devices from
the pallet must be done by the carrier.
Required External Connections Prepared: yes no
1. Client Station minimum 2 outlets for PC and monitor

a third outlet in case client station is
used as ID Viewer
(ID Tablet, RIS system connected)
Ethernet connection (twisted pair)
prepared
2. Server Station minimum 2 outlets
a third outlet in case server station is
used as ID Viewer
(ID Tablet, RIS system connected)
Ethernet connection (twisted pair)
prepared
3. Hardcopy printer Is/are there hardcopy printer(s) to be
available via integrated to the cluster?
network
4. Local network For the connection of the system
components to the local network
please plan an appointment
concerning network configuration with
the local network administrator.
5. Selected ID Viewer Please have the customer make his
GUI template selection from the ID Viewer GUI
templates:
Selected template:
______________________ .xml
6. RIS connection Note down connection mode
____________________________
7. PACS connection Note down connection mode
____________________________
Desired Name: ..........................................

installation
date: .................................... Signature: .....................................

Checklist Chapter 11 / Page 2 CR Quality System 3.5 Edition 2, Revision 0
DD+DIS130.06E Installation Planning Checklist
1 2 3
Installation Information Forms

Fill in network parameter which are necessary to setup a QS system properly.
NOTE:
It is not allowed to give hostnames with an underscore.
System Type WS650 WS670 PE700 GX620
Computer Name
Workgroup Name
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Preferred DNS
Server
Alternate DNS
Server
Windows License
Key

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR Quality System 3.5 Checklist Chapter 11 / Page 3
1 2 3
Installation Planning Checklist DD+DIS130.06E
System Type GX260+ GX270 GX620
Computer Name
Workgroup Name
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Preferred DNS
Server
Alternate DNS
Server
Windows License
Key
QS Server Name
ID Viewer 1st ID Viewer 2nd ID Viewer Remarks

Hostname
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Router
Station Name *
ID Viewer GUI
template
ADC QS Server to
connect to
Digitizer 1st Digitizer 2nd Digitizer Remarks

Hostname
IP Address
Subnet Mask
default router
AE_title
Station Name *
*) Station name appears in the USER interface

Checklist Chapter 11 / Page 4 CR Quality System 3.5 Edition 2, Revision 0
DD+DIS130.06E Installation Planning Checklist
1 2 3
Hard Copy 1st HCP 2nd HCP Remarks

Printer
Hostname
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Router
AE_title
Station Name *
PACS 1st Archive 2nd Archive Remarks

Archive Station Station Station
Hostname
IP Address
Subnet Mask
default router
AE_title
Station Name *
RIS/HIS Server RIS/HIS Server Remarks

Hostname
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Router
AE_title
RIS Connection
Mode

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR Quality System 3.5 Checklist Chapter 11 / Page 5
Copyright  AGFA GEVAERT HealthCare GmbH, DD+DIS130.06E
All rights reserved
Published by

D - 81539 München
Technical modifications reserved
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH

2006-07-04
DD+DIS302.05E Glossary and Key Word Index
Chapter 12
List of Contents
1 Glossary ........................................................................................1


1 Glossary
Active Directory The component of Microsoft’s Active Platform that

acts as an advanced directory service for distributed
computing environments. The Active Directory
presents applications with a single, simplified set of
interfaces so that users can locate and utilize
directory resources from a variety of networks while
bypassing differences among proprietary services.
ADB Agfa DICOM Bridge; software program that is able
to remap elements in a DICOM message.
ADC QS Agfa Diagnostic Center – Quality System
(used for Software up to Release 2.1.xx)
ADVT Agfa DICOM Validation Tool, also called ADV Tool;
tool for checking DICOM communication.
AE Application Entity: e.g. digitizers, printers and
QS workstations can be an Application Entity in a
hospital network.
ASPRO Agfa Service Provider name in CR QS 3.0 for the
former tasks in ADC QS 2.1.
BIOS Basic Input/Output System. A set of instructions
stored on a ROM chip inside IBM PCs and PC-
compatibles, which handles all input-output
functions.
BO Server Business Object Server
Application on ADCCR QS which manages the
whole image and demographic data by means of a
database. The BOS decides where and how to
store, retrieve and manipulate data. It is the core of
the ADC/CR QS.
BOExplorer Browser for database entries
Business Objects Everything a certain treatment is done on.
CCD Elements Charge-Coupled Device. CCDs can be charged by
light or electricity.
CD-R Compact Disc Recordable. A recordable CD-ROM
which can be read by normal CD-ROM drives; data
can only be recorded once onto a CD-R, and cannot
be changed.
Cipher An algorithm for putting a message into code by
transposition and/or substitution of symbols.
Cluster Active Directory Domain with minimum one
CR QS Server and one CR QS client.

Edition 2, Revision 0 CR Quality System 3.5 Chapter 12/ 1
Glossary and Key Word Index DD+DIS302.05E
COM/DCOM Distributed Component Object Model .An extension

of COM (Component Object Model), DCOM was
developed by Microsoft for Windows Operating
Systems. It supports objects distributed across a
network.
Configuration Viewer ADC/CR QS Viewer to configure and administer the
Processing Station.
Control Center ADC CR QS 3.0 component to configure, start and
stop background tasks (e.g. routing, automatic
deletion). It centralizes the management of different
tasks like system related tasks (e.g. disk monitoring)
and procedure step related tasks (tasks depending
on the procedure step status, e.g. print, archive,
distribute).
CPF File Customer Parameter File contains most of the
configuration data in table form.
CR Computed Radiography
CR QS Computed Radiography – Quality System
(successor of ADC QS, as of release QS 3.0)
Demographic Data Patient, examination and routing data
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(automatic IP address assignment)
DICOM Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine;
DICOM is a standard which addressed the issue of
vendor-independent data for mats and data transfer
for digital medical images.
DICOM Gateway Application to receive images from CR-Digitizers.
DMWL DICOM Modality Work List
DNS Domain Name System that translates an IP address
into a domain name.
Domain A domain is a group of computers and devices on a
network that are administered as a unit with
common rules and procedures
Encryption Putting data into a secret code so it is unreadable
except by authorized users
Ethernet Frequently spread technologies for LANs
(Local Area Networks)
FAT File Allocation Table. A special file located in
sector 0 on a disk, which contains information about
the sizes of files stored on the disk and which
clusters contain which files.

Chapter 12/ 2 CR Quality System 3.5 Edition 2, Revision 0
FIFO First In First Out. A method of storage in which the

data stored for the longest time will be retrieved first.
FireWire High-performance serial bus with data transmission
rate of 400 Mbit/s
Firewall Method to shield a network from another network. A
firewall prevents the protected network from access
from outside, but for the protected network it is
however possible to get access to other networks
outside this firewall.
FTP File Transfer Protocol – The standard protocol for
copying files from one computer to another on a
Internet network.
GSDF Grayscale Standard Display Function describes how
all available greyscales in an image can be made
perceptible on a viewing device.
GUI Graphical User Interface. An interface that has
pictures as well as words on the screen. Originally
invented by Xerox, the idea was expanded and
popularised by Apple Computers. With windows,
icons, pull-down menus, and the mouse, the
graphical user interface is easier to learn and work
with.
Healthcare Model Data model to structure patient and examination
data in a hierarchical way in a medical environment.
HIPAA Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act
is a law passed in 1996. It describes the
administrative simplification for electronic
standardization of healthcare applications and
patient privacy and security standards.
HIS/RIS Hospital or Radiology Information System
Hostname Alias name of a device connected to a network
HTML (HyperText Markup Language) – The coding
language used to create Hypertext documents
HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol. The protocol most
often used to transfer information from World Wide
Web servers to browsers, which is why Web
addresses begin with http://. Also called Hypertext
Transport Protocol.
HTTPS HyperText Transmission Protocol, Secure.
Netscape's version of HTTP for secure transactions.
ID Viewer Software, which allows cassette identification and
basic viewing.

IHE Integrated Healthcare Enterprise offers the

possibility that all devices of a solution or part of a
workflow are compatible with each other.
IIS Internet Information Server is a powerful Web server
that provides a highly reliable, manageable, and
scalable Web application infrastructure for all
versions of Windows Server 2003. IIS helps
organizations increase Web site and application
availability while lowering system administration
costs.
IMPAX AGFA's PACS
(Picture Archiving and Communication System)
IP Internet Protocol. The IP is part of TCP/IP; the
protocol that is used to route a data packet from its
source to its destination over the Internet.
IPD Viewer Interactive Processing Display Viewer
Java A general-purpose programming language created
by Sun Microsystems. Java can be used to create
Java applets. A Java program is downloaded from
the Web server and interpreted by a program
running on the machine containing the
Web browser.
Java Virtual Machine The Java Virtual Machine works as a self-contained
operating environment to run Java applets, with the
advantage that Java applets can be run
independently from the host operating system.
JND Just Noticable Differencee between two greyscales
is the contrast between them.
Logfile A file which records messages issued by the
applications.
LSASS Local Security Authority Subsystem Service; It
generates the process responsible for
authenticating users for the Winlogon service
LUT Look-up Table: All gray-scales of an image are
stored as values in a LUT. The application software
can easily and quickly access the LUT and convert
its data into the gray-scale value for each pixel of
the image and so bring the image to the monitor.
Meta Data Data about data. Normally, meta data describes
how data is to be interpreted by applications. An
example for meta data is a mapping file.

Scripting Host The Microsoft Windows Script Host (WSH) is a

language-independent Script Host for 32-bit
Windows platforms.
MSDE Microsoft SQL Desktop Engine is a reduced and
thus more economic version of Microsoft’s SQL
relational database. A relational database contains
a full test search function and a graphical tool for
database management and programming.
Multithreaded Within a single program, processing more than one
transaction at a time.
MUSICA MUltiple Scale Image Contrast Amplification
(Agfa Image Processing Software)
Net BIOS Network Basic Input/Output System. An
applications programming interface used in
conjunction with other programs to transmit
messages between applications running on PCs
hooked to a local area network.
NT Event Viewer NT (New Technology) – tool to view logged
messages. ADCCR QS uses this tool to log the
messages.
NTFS NT File System.
The file system used by Windows NT. It supports
multiple file systems, has file recovery for hard disk
crashes, uses the Unicode character set, and
provides for file names up to 255 characters long.
NTP Network Time Protocol. A protocol that can
synchronize clocks on local computers with radio or
atomic clocks on the Internet.
Object An object exists of data and methods.
OLE Object Linking and Embedding, Microsoft’s
proprietary mechanism for allowing documents and
applications to access data and subroutines from
within other applications
PACS Picture Archiving and Communication System
Partition A division of a disk or storage area.
PHI Protected Health Information: patient data which
must be kept protected in order to maintain the
patient’s privacy.
Ping Ping is a program to verify if a host system is
available via IP network. Ping has been developed
by Mike MUUS in 1983.

PNG Portable Network Graphics. A file format for

bitmapped graphic images, designed to be a
replacement for the GIF format
PPD Postscript Printer Definition describes the
capabilities of a printer.
PPP-Protocol Point to Point Protocol. A protocol for
communication between computers using TCP/IP,
over standard telephone lines, ISDN, and other
high-speed connections. PPP was developed by the
Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) and is
defined in RFC 1171. It can be used to connect a
computer to the Internet, for services such as the
World Wide Web and email. PPP is faster than SLIP
and has better error correction; it can be used with
both synchronous and asynchronous transmission.
Pre - Viewer Pulls a specific image automatically out of the
server.
Preview Monitor Displays the image and the name of the patient.
This monitor enables to roughly check whether the
exposure was successful.
Print Composer ADCCR QS Viewer to create a layout for images to
be printed.
Print Spooler Program which takes care that print jobs are
managed in the background
Procedure In healthcare terms a certain examination on a
patient.
Procedure Step In healthcare terms a substep of a procedure, i.e. a
CR exam.
Proxy Server A server that provides access to files from other
servers by retrieving them either from its local cache
or from the remote server.
QC Viewer Quality Control Viewer
Remote Desktop Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) enables you to
Protocol connect remotely to another system via network or
internet. In a scenario like this the remote desktop is
called “server” and the PC where you start the
section from is called “client”. Use a remote desktop
connection to control the server, e.g. for
configuration purpose.
RIS Radiology Information System
Rislink AGFA tool to connect to RIS-Systems.

SCP Service Class Provider (e.g. a printer offering

service “printing” in a DICOM network)
SCU Service Class User (e.g. an X-ray modality using the
service of others to print, store images in a DICOM
network)
Selector Certain View in ADCCR QS to get an overview or to
search for certain studies. This view is either based
on character or on thumbnail images or both.
Series Images belonging to a procedure step
SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol is used to build up an
IP network connection between two systems which
are connected via serial port.
SMB Server Message Block is Microsoft’s file and print
sharing protocol
SNDB Service Network DataBase allows to connect
remotely to a site via SRSS.
SOP Service-Object Pair: combination of information
object (image) and related possible services (print,
send to destination, etc.)
SP2 Service Pack 2: patch or set of patches to update a
software containing e.g. solved bugs, new
functionalities etc.
SRP Security Roll-up Package: software update to fix
potential security defects and increase protection
against viruses, worms and intrusion.
SRSS Secure Remote Service System: Agfa’s solution to
protect health information of individuals. The SRSS
enables the secure connection required for remote
service between Agfa Service Support Engineers
working from an Agfa facility or their homes and the
Agfa Equipment installed at a hospital.
SSL Secure Sockets Layer. A protocol from Netscape
Communications Corporation, which is designed to
provide secure communications on the Internet.
Study In healthcare terms a substep of a procedure.
Subnet Mask A number used to identify a subnetwork when an
IP address is shared by multiple networks.

TCP Transmission Control Protocol. Internet networking

software that controls the transmission of packets of
data over the Internet. Among its tasks, TCP checks
for lost packets, puts the data from multiple packets
into the correct order, and requests that missing or
damaged packets be resent. Computers must run
TCP to communicate with World Wide Web servers.
TCP/IP Transport Control Protocol / Internet Protocol.
Common Protocol for Networks. Used in the
Internet.
Telnet A terminal emulation protocol that lets a user log in
remotely to other computers on the Internet; it has a
command line interface. Originally developed for
ARPAnet, Telnet runs on top of the TCP/IP protocol.
Thumbnail Iconized image of an original.
UDP User Datagram Protocol is a transport layer protocol
for computer networks.
UI User Interface
UID Unique Identifier: In DICOM conformant devices
each clinical information object (different patients,
different images, different studies) get an UID in
order to protect patient safety.
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply supplies the system
with voltage in case of an outage.
VR Value Representation
WINS Windows Naming Service (Netbios based lookup
comparable to DNS)
Workgroup A workgroup is a logical way to group computers on
a network. In this configuration all the members are
considered “peers” and each computer maintains its
own security policies and database of resources,
such as users, printers, and file shares.
Worklist A list that shows the user which studies (Procedure
Steps) still have to be done at a certain modality
(e.g. CT, MR, CR).
XML Extended Markup Language

DD+DIS302.05E CR Quality
Order Number:
System 3.5
Type 4406 / 421
2 Edition
nd
n
tio
ta
en
um
tio
n
Doc
a al
ent ic
cum chn
Do Te
al
nic
ch
Te
R
D
C
T.
R KD
D U
R
T.
C 94
KD
U
R
94
CR Quality
DD+DIS302.05E
Order Number:
System 3.5
Type 4406 / 421
2nd Edition

CR QS 3.5 - Service Manual For Download 2009-11-16

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CR QS 3.5 - Service Manual For Download 2009-11-16

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HEALTHCARE ReadMeFirst

Imaging Services Service Manual for Download

► Purpose of this Document

Edition. Release Changes

1 Integrating the Order List for Documentation

2 Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual

Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3 or ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 2 of 5

2.1 Printing single Pages or Chapters

To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows:

Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar

(3) Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.

Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 3 of 5

2.2 Printing the complete Service Manual

To print the complete service manual proceed as follows:

Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual

Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 4 of 5

3.1 Exporting your Comments

Figure 5: Drop down menu “Comment & Markup”

3.2 Importing Comments

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 5 of 5

Document No.: DD+DIS302.05E

CR Quality System 3.5

Document Node ID: 9504388

Agfa HealthCare N.V.

Copyright © 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2 CR Quality System 3.5

1. Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedure

3. Repair and Service

5. Spare Parts List

8. Manufacturing Standard Modifications

10. Service Bulletins

11. Installation Planning

12. Glossary and Key Word Index

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2 CR Quality System 3.5

This documentation uses:

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the

Not-safety relevant notes

NOTE: • Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action without

Actions Way of writing Sample

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 2 CR Quality System 3.5

CR QS 3.5 – Service Documentation, 2nd Edition

Information for the Field Service Engineer

Chapter 1: • Upgrade installation instructions have been moved to chapter 7

Chapter 3.2: • Troubleshooting for usage of a Restore CD has been added.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Chapter 7: • “Upgrade installation instructions to CR QS 3.5.398 (Service Pack 1) have

Chapter 8: • Overview of technical standard modifications since first release of

Printed copies of this document are not controlled.

Generic Safety Directions

► Purpose of this Document

Edition. Release Changes

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE: